The University of Pennsylvania Today: Its Buildings, Departments, and Work [Reprint 2016 ed.] 9781512801477

Citation preview

MAP OF THE

CHESTNUT

UNIVERSITY of PENNSYLVANIA

SAN S O M

PHILADELPHIA

LOCUST

IRVINE

SPRUCE

BEIANCEY

STREET

PINE

Gtisztl

STRJEET

Dormitories Triangle

|H

έ

ΜΗ

•UWERlrlO. H£RSH£V STREET

STREET Tel""

Swimming }fyqitrt£

lab. "ifuArisBUUf:

Hutchinsons. Gymnasium '•Student Infirmary

Harrison laboratory oft lllllpl Ckemistty / Wriahtman

or-'-i'n-jii; Danklin

Field

University Museum '

lUrviversitij Hospital HAMILTON

WALK.

JWuseum Hursts' Horn* Annex

field.

HtaUntjPUml

Field. Ά (Convention \ fiaU

Commercial /Austum,

Tennis

\FitldIlouu

THE UNIVERSITY of PENNSYLVANIA TODAY

CAMPUS Library

VIEW

Irvine Auditorium

College

Hall

THE U N I V E R S I T Y of PENNSYLVANIA TODAY

ITS BUILDINGS DEPARTMENTS •

·

& WORK

·

Edited by Cornell M. Dowlin

U N I V E R S I T Y OF P E N N S Y L V A N I A

Philadelphia 1940

PRESS

C o p y r i g h t 1940 UNIVERSITY OF P E N N S Y L V A N I A PRESS Manufactured in the United States of America by the Haddon Craftsmen, Inc., Camden, N. London: Humphrey Milford O x f o r d U n i v e r s i t y Press

J.

FOREWORD

THE present volume has been prepared in the hope that it will be of interest to visitors to the University of Pennsylvania and also to undergraduates, alumni, and other friends of the University who would be glad to have a brief outline of its present organization and activities, the extent of its physical equipment, and something of the origin of its many divisions. In the arrangement of the material, it was found advisable not to give a strictly geographical account of the Campus and its buildings and of the departments of the University. Because of the belief that visitors and others will especially wish to learn how the University of Pennsylvania functions, the book has been organized on the basis of departments. Strangers to the Campus are urged to examine the map printed on the end-papers and to make full use of the index. If a considerable amount of space has been devoted to current research activities, which change from year to year, the reader will realize that no picture of the University at work would be complete without a description of the varied contribution to human knowledge that is continually being made. For a full account of the growth of the University from its Colonial roots to the present, the reader is referred to the History of the University of Pennsylvania, IJ40-I940, by Edward Potts Cheyney, for fifty-one years an active member of the Department of History and since 1935 Professor Emeritus and Curator of the Lea Library of Medieval and Church History. T h e Editor wishes to express his deep appreciation to Dr. Cheyney for his assistance in supplying data and for the Introduction which he has provided for this book. T h e Editor is also grateful for the assistance rendered him by Dr. Edward W . Mumford, Secretary of the Corporation and the official custodian of the archives of the University; to the various departmental officers and others who have contributed articles and information; and to Dr. George E. Nitzsche, Recorder of the University, whose files are a storehouse of interesting information and whose interest has been of great value. Dr. Nitzsche is the compiler of a guidebook to the University which, between 1905 and 1918, passed through seven editions.

vi

Foreword

I n the e i g h t e e n t h century the O x f o r d University guidebooks were amplified by a wag ( T h o m a s Warton), who published a Companion to the Guide a n d a Guide to the Companion. It is hoped that similar a d j u n c t s to the present work will not be needed. CORNELL M .

DOWLIN

CONTENTS

page

Foreword

ν

Introduction

ι

T H E ARTS AND SCIENCES

The The The The The The The The The

College Wharton School Towne Scientific School Moore School of Electrical Engineering School of Fine Arts College of Liberal Arts for Women School of Education Summer School Graduate School

T h e University Library T h e University Press T h e University Museum T H E STUDY OF LAW

3 36 56 65 68 71 73 79 80 87 90 91 97

TEACHING AND RESEARCH IN MEDICINE

The The The The The The

School of Medicine Graduate School of Medicine Wistar Institute Phipps Institute Evans Institute and the School of Dentistry School of Veterinary Medicine

103 149 153 155 157 161

STUDENT LIFE

165

ADMINISTRATIVE AND SERVICE BUILDINGS

199

Index

205

ILLUSTRATIONS

MAP OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA Drawing by John H. Geiszel CAMPUS VIEW Library — Irvine Auditorium — College Hall

end-paper frontispiece facing page

THE PROVOSTS T O W E R : DORMITORIES

10

BOTANICAL GARDENS AND MEDICAL LABORATORIES

11

COLLEGE H A L L MORGAN L A B O R A T O R Y OF PHYSICS

26

HARRISON LABORATORY OF CHEMISTRY ZOOLOGICAL L A B O R A T O R Y

27

LOGAN H A L L MOORE SCHOOL OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

42

ENGINEERING BUILDING 43

SCHOOL OF FINE ARTS EXPERIMENTAL ELECTRICAL W O R K : MOORE SCHOOL HYDRAULICS L A B O R A T O R Y : TOWNE SCIENTIFIC SCHOOL

58

MORRIS ARBORETUM PROVOST'S HOUSE

59

BENNETT H A L L

74

UNIVERSITY MUSEUM 75

UNIVERSITY LIBRARY L A W SCHOOL MEDICAL LABORATORIES ON HAMILTON W A L K CHEMISTRY L A B O R A T O R Y : SCHOOL OF MEDICINE

IOO

COURTESY OF THE SCOPE, 1941 X - R A Y TREATMENT: VETERINARY HOSPITAL

ΙΟΙ

MALONEY CLINIC

1

G R A D U A T E HOSPITAL

Ϊ39

Χ

ILLUSTRATIONS

SCHOOL OF DENTISTRY W I S T A R INSTITUTE

154

PHIPPS INSTITUTE S C H O O L OF V E T E R I N A R Y MEDICINE

155

BIG Q U A D : DORMITORIES Photograph by Horace M. Lippincott HOUSTON H A L L

166

CHRISTIAN ASSOCIATION L I T T L E Q U A D : DORMITORIES

167

P L A N OF DORMITORIES Drawing by John H. Geiszel

IRVINE AUDITORIUM

page

I 70

facing page

184

F R A N K L I N FIELD THE PALESTRA

"

"

185

INTRODUCTION

THE buildings and grounds that now spread through West Philadelphia and stretch to several outlying regions are the third of the successive homes of the University. In almost any corner of the present C a m p u s could be tacked the couple of buildings with their acre of ground at Fourth and Arch streets that formed its first. It was in these two buildings and the three or four adjacent houses in which the professors lived that the colonial College led its vigorous and picturesque life. T h e college hall was for a long time the largest building in the city, and it was in it that colonial governors and the aristocracy of Philadelphia and, after the Revolution, representatives of the new republican government and foreign diplomats attended academic and other functions. B y the close of the eighteenth century this location had become too restricted and too inconvenient of access to satisfy the University authorities. Moreover, a stately house, built by the government of Pennsylvania in a much better part of the city as a dwelling house for the President w h e n it was expected that Philadelphia would remain the national capital, was lying untenanted and for sale. It was surrounded by open lots that might well be utilized or made a source of income. " T h e President's House," as it was always called, and its successors at N i n t h and Market streets became the University's second home. T h e house was purchased, repaired, then extended, then replaced on the same site by the two buildings, one for the College, one for the Medical School, that gave the University certainly its most symmetrical and on the whole the most pleasing architectural appearance in its history. In these buildings, with a few dependencies for the Medical School, its life was carried on for a half-century or more. By about 1870 it had become evident that neither the size of the buildings on N i n t h Street, nor the repute of the neighborhood, nor the land available for growth, was suited to a dignified and growing institution. R i n g e d around with dwelling houses, shops, offices, and saloons, the University had no room for expansion of any kind. T h e old questions whether to remain a city college or to go to the ι

2

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

country; w h e t h e r to settle in some small town, as h a d been the policy of H a r v a r d , Yale, Princeton, and most other A m e r i c a n and English colleges, where students should live on the campus in buildings b e l o n g i n g to the University; or to separate academic life from personal life, as at C o l u m b i a and in the Scotch and continental universities, came u p for vigorous discussion. Each h a d its advocates. T h e decision to remain a city institution was mainly the result of two circumstances: the desire of the Philadelphia trustees to keep the institution near e n o u g h to make their visits to it easy, a n d the k n o w l e d g e of the existence of an available tract to the west of the Schuylkill yet w i t h i n the limits of the city life a n d its advantages. T h e land belonged to the city and, it was hoped, c o u l d be purchased o n f a v o r a b l e terms. So the o l d site was sold, a n d in June 1871, the corner stone of C o l l e g e H a l l , the first b u i l d i n g west of the river a n d the nucleus of the present extensive but somewhat incongruous a g g l o m e r a t i o n of buildings was laid. However, the first four, the greenstone g r o u p that covers the first ten-acre purchase of l a n d — C o l l e g e H a l l , the University Hospital, the medical b u i l d i n g of that period (now L o g a n H a l l ) , a n d the dental (now Hare) b u i l d i n g of the t i m e — w e r e consistent e n o u g h in design a n d materials, if not very distinguished in their architecture. Since that period the University has n i b b l e d away at the city land, o b t a i n i n g one piece after another, o n o n e set of conditions or another, and for the various uses of o l d or new departments or activities as they have been undertaken. Some i n d e p e n d e n t purchases or gifts of adjacent land have been made, till the W e s t P h i l a d e l p h i a property alone now covers 112 acres, o n w h i c h have been erected or purchased since the migration some 130 buildings, a n d w i t h i n the bounds of w h i c h have been laid eight athletic fields, the B o t a n i c a l Gardens, and various parking places. T h e s e buildings, in the natural course of things, have been altered, a d d e d to, superseded, a n d changed in purpose as demands and f u n d s have r e q u i r e d or permitted. B u t all this is merely the outer shell of the University, for a university is an organism in w h i c h the shell a n d the life w i t h i n it are incapable of b e i n g separated. Classrooms and libraries a n d laboratories, studies a n d museums, seminary rooms a n d dormitories a n d places of recreation are alike the necessary means b y w h i c h the l i f e and work of faculty and students can be carried on. In the f o l l o w i n g survey of the buildings as they are now, an attempt will be made t o describe the organization a n d work of all the principal departments of the University. EDWARD POTTS

CHEYNEY

THE ARTS AND SCIENCES

COLLEGE AND THE COLLEGE

HALL

OF LIBERAL

ARTS

AND

SCIENCES College Hall THE black-and-gilt sign on the portico gives the date 1871, but College Hall first opened its doors to students on September 16, 1872. With the enthusiasm usual to such publications, the University catalogue described the new building as "one of the most stately colleges in the country," and with equal satisfaction it commented on "the quietness, the absence of excitement, and the pure air which so greatly tend to promote industrious habits, to render study profitable, and to preserve the health, all of which objects it was impossible to secure in an equal degree while the School remained in the center of the City." The actual building site of College Hall was a half-acre of the old Almshouse Farm. T h e design was Gothic, as conceived by Thomas W. Richards of the faculty. The green stone, a serpentine quarried near West Chester, was also to be used for Logan Hall, the older part of the University Hospital, and the Hare Building. In time erosion caused by sulphur in the city air, which the geologists say formed Epsom salts, made cement refacing necessary. In 1914 the Clock Tower on the west wing, in 1929 the East Tower, were taken down. The bell which for forty-two years had rung out the classes was given honored resting place in Houston Hall. Old landmarks, old customs, also passed. The Senior Fence no longer flanks the rear entrance. T h e Bowl Fight, which once raged in, out, and about the building, in time moved away to Museum Field and final extinction. T h e Hall Fight, the Flour Fight, the Corner Fight, undergraduates of today know only through commemorative tablets. 3

4

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

A s one stands by the Boyle statue of B e n j a m i n Franklin, erected in 1938 before the main entrance through a loan by the C i t y of Philadelphia, the old b u i l d i n g bulks massive, impressive in length a n d height even in this day, and perhaps not o u t m o d e d in dignity. S o f t e n i n g the gaunt lines, the ivy planted on H e y Days by successive generations clambers over and beyond the m e m o r i a l plaques. Few, save older graduates, realize w h a t service C o l l e g e H a l l has rendered d u r i n g its sixty and more years. T h a t once, for e x a m p l e , the west w i n g was devoted to arts, the east to science. T h a t , in its time, it has harbored the Chapel, Gymnasium, L i b r a r y , M u s e u m ; the G r a d u a t e School; the L a w School; classrooms a n d laboratories of chemistry, physics, biology, engineering; the School of Architecture; the allied sciences now constituting the W h a r t o n School; the School of Education. Except one or two, merged or superseded, these have f o u n d housing of their own. A n d until 1930, in a subbasement, part of the old realm of " P o m p , " College Hall's f a m o u s janitor, was stabled the white horse k n o w n to undergraduates as R o l l o , w h o pulled the lawn-mower on work days, a n d o n great occasions led parades o n Franklin Field. B e l o w even the level of the sub-basement lies a catacomb of passages e x t e n d i n g o u t w a r d to the east a n d west beneath the paths. M u c h of the present administration of the University is still carried o n in College H a l l . T o the left of the front entrance are the offices of the President of the University, and of the Vice-President w h o serves as his assistant. T o the right are those of the Provost. T o the left along the hall are the offices of the D e a n a n d Associate D e a n of Student Affairs. T h e offices of the College itself are directly a h e a d as one enters the building. Here are to be f o u n d the D e a n of the College, the Assistant to the Dean, a n d the Personnel Officer of the College, w h o is especially concerned w i t h the scholastic problems of the students. In addition to these administrative offices College H a l l contains the offices of eleven of the fifteen departments of the C o l l e g e a n d of m a n y members of the faculty, and thirty-six classrooms seating 2,303 students. In the basement is the Psychological C l i n i c ; o n the second floor is the Geological Museum; on the fourth floor, a c l i m b of 101 steps from the basement, is the office of the D e p a r t m e n t of A n t h r o pology, itself almost a museum. Indeed, College H a l l now serves partly as an art gallery, for a fine g r o u p of paintings loaned by the A c a d e m y of Fine Arts decorates the halls and stairways.

COLLEGE

5

T H E COLLEGE In the history of American education, it is a special distinction of the College that Provost William Smith in 1756 outlined the first liberal curriculum of higher learning in the western world. It departed from traditional, narrowly theological aims, pointing the way for other American institutions after the Revolution. The College was the first academic body of its kind to offer various practical courses such as surveying, navigation, accounting, commerce, government, international law. It established the first chair of chemistry in America in 1769, was the first to make formal inclusion of modern languages in its curriculum. A part of the College in 1765 was the faculty of the School of Medicine, the first in America. Naturally, then, since the days of Provost Smith and his plea for a more liberal education, the curriculum has been progressively adapted to the needs of the students. In 1825 the course was lengthened from three to four years, entrance credits were made more rigorous, and students under fourteen years were denied admission. After deficiencies in the curriculum had been pointed out by Provost Stilli, an elective system was tentatively adopted in 1867 with a fixed roster in freshman and sophomore years, but for junior and senior years possible electives in modern languages in place of Greek or Latin, and various subjects in place of mathematics. Choice of electives was further widened in 1887—too much, it was found, and the group system was adopted. Former freedom of choice was regulated, and in certain subjects electives were extended to the first two years and to the entrance requirements. The group system, modified to meet changing demands, has continued in effect to the present. In 1922 the requirement of an ancient language was eliminated from the Pre-Medical course, and in 1930 from the straight Arts and Science course. The last change of importance was the granting, in 1938, of freer choice within the group requirements and the introduction of placement examinations which make possible the more rapid advancement of capable students. Enrolled in the College each year are over a thousand full-time students and another thousand part-time students. The latter are registered in what are known as the College Collateral Courses. These are courses given in the afternoon and evening and on Saturday morning. Established in 1894 as the College Courses for Teachers, they were given their present name in 1933, when it became clear that most of the teachers in Philadelphia and neighboring

6

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

communities were already college graduates and that the students were being drawn from many walks of life besides the teaching profession. But the College faculty, which now numbers 271, does not teach students in the College alone, for in the undergraduate schools of the University and the Graduate School all instruction in a particular subject is given by a single department. Hence, each week the College faculty teaches some forty thousand "student hours," of which more than two-thirds are in various other undergraduate schools and the Graduate School. DEPARTMENTS IN COLLEGE HALL

English: A college without a Department of English would seem strange today; yet, that English was taught in the Academy and later the College of Philadelphia, and not Latin and Greek alone, was largely due to Benjamin Franklin's interest in modern languages and other workaday subjects. But until 1842, when Henry Reed, the friend of Thackeray and the popularizer of Wordsworth in America, began his lectures on the English poets, little literature for its own sake was taught. A n d following Reed's drowning on the lost Arctic in 1854, it subsided once more, for Reed's successors devoted most of their time to history, social science, and even law rather than to English literature. T h e principal purpose of the courses until late in the century was practice in composition and public speaking, and the students foraged for ideas in textbooks devoted to many branches of learning. T h e explanation, no doubt, lies in Franklin's statement, in his Proposals Relating to the Education of Youth in Pensilvania, that English should be taught to the students "by Grammar," and in his ensuing query, "If History should be a constant Part of their Reading, . . . may not almost all Kinds of useful Knowledge be that W a y introduc'd to Advantage, and with Pleasure to the Student?" In 1886 Felix E. Schelling, later to achieve his reputation as an Elizabethan scholar and as the academic father of professors of English widely scattered throughout the United States, joined the Department, and in 1888 he was asked by Provost Pepper to propose a plan for the reorganization of the work in English. U n d e r the plan many new courses in English literature were instituted, and composition, philology, and literature became clear-cut divisions of the work in English. A significant aspect of the reorganization was the insistence on the importance of modern literature. As a result Dr. Schelling's course in the English novel, given in 1889—the first

COLLEGE

7

course in the novel for undergraduates in America—was the first to include current novels. W i t h Dr. Schelling's appointment as Professor of English in 1891 and as John Welsh Centennial Professor of History and English Literature in 1893, that group of teachers and scholars for which the Department has long been known began to form. In 1891 Josiah H. Penniman was appointed, later to become Dean of the College and Provost of the University; in 1895 Arthur Hobson Quinn, pioneer historian of the American drama and the first man to give a course in the subject, but one whose writings have covered many other aspects of our native literature; in 1896 Clarence Griffin Child, teacher and scholar in the field of English philology and the earlier literature; in 1897 Cornelius Weygandt, who at once began those courses in modern literature echoes of which can be heard in his books on the English novelists and poets and the Irish playwrights, and to some degree also in his essays and sketches which preserve a passing America. Some of these men have since retired, but other members of the Department have taken their places; and those w h o remain are aided by younger men, themselves specialists in their respective branches of philology and literature, whose recent books have dealt with Chaucer, the Elizabethan and Jacobean playwrights, the poets of the Romantic movement, and various periods of American literature. Included are a number of anthologies, a history of the English language, and t w o volumes of the Variorum Shakespeare, the latter undertaken at the suggestion of Horace H o w a r d Furness, Jr., w h o carried on his father's work and later bequeathed his excellent Elizabethan library to the University. In 1900 thirty courses were offered by the Department; that number has now grown to 149, more than half of which represents work given in the Graduate School. A n d so it is hardly surprising that the staff now has more than fifty members, whose offices occupy most of the east end of the second floor of College Hall and a great deal of space on the third floor of Bennett Hall. Indeed the English Department is one of the few departments in the College that has its own building. T h i s is a property at 3433 W o o d l a n d Avenue, possessed of more atmosphere than elegance and popularly known as the "Journalism Building." T h e first floor of this building, where "Beastons," celebrated gathering place for students, once did business, houses a city-room and an experimental laboratory for broadcasting. T h e second floor contains the offices of the Director of the courses in journalism and publishing, which have

δ

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

been a part of the w o r k of the English d e p a r t m e n t since 1901. T h e t h i r d floor has been fitted out as a laboratory for speech correction a n d is used by those members of the D e p a r t m e n t w h o devote their time especially to p u b l i c speaking. In a d d i t i o n to teaching more students than any other d e p a r t m e n t of the University and p r o d u c i n g books a n d articles that in variety a n d e x t e n t stand h i g h in the records of the F a c u l t y R e s e a r c h C o m mittee, even w h e n the size of the staff is considered, the English Dep a r t m e n t has h a d a large share in a d m i n i s t e r i n g the affairs of the University. Since 1900 it has p r o v i d e d three D e a n s of the C o l l e g e , a D e a n of the G r a d u a t e School, a D i r e c t o r of the S u m m e r School, a Vice-President in C h a r g e of U n d e r g r a d u a t e Schools (an office no l o n g e r in existence), an A d m i n i s t r a t i v e Vice-President, a n d t w o Provosts. History: U n t i l 1881 history, w i t h rare exceptions, was t a u g h t in connection w i t h some other subject, usually E n g l i s h literature, of w h i c h history was o f t e n considered a part. In 1876 this r e l a t i o n s h i p was emphasized by the f o u n d a t i o n of the J o h n W e l s h C e n t e n n i a l Professorship of H i s t o r y and E n g l i s h Literature. Its first i n c u m b e n t , Provost Stille, was a historian a n d laid stress o n that half of the partnership, b u t his successor, R o b e r t Ellis T h o m p s o n , w i t h his kaleidoscopic interest, taught history o n l y alternately w i t h E n g l i s h literature, political economy, a n d i n t e r n a t i o n a l law. H i s t o r y first b e c a m e a separate subject, then a distinct g r o u p of studies, a f t e r the f o u n d a t i o n of the W h a r t o n School in 1881. H i s t o r y was a necessity f o r a d e p a r t m e n t l a y i n g stress o n social studies; so J o h n B a c h M c M a s t e r , w h o h a d just p u b l i s h e d the first v o l u m e of an A m e r i c a n history of great distinction, was called in 1883 f r o m his instructorship in geodesy at Princeton to o c c u p y the n e w l y created chair of A m e r i c a n history, then in the W h a r t o n School, a n d to devote his w h o l e time to this subject. H e r e m a i n e d a source of distinction to the D e p a r t m e n t for thirty-seven years, u n t i l his retirem e n t in 1920. B u t still more history was needed for the j o i n t uses of the C o l l e g e , the W h a r t o n School, the Scientific D e p a r t m e n t s , and the G r a d u a t e School; a n d in 1884 E d w a r d P. C h e y n e y w a s e n g a g e d for one year to give half his time to t e a c h i n g history. I n 1886 he was given a f u l l instructorship in history a n d c o n t i n u e d to serve the D e p a r t m e n t for fifty-one years, d u r i n g w h i c h t i m e h e was recognized as one of the o u t s t a n d i n g historical scholars of A m e r i c a . I n 1889 James H a r v e y R o b i n s o n was a d d e d to the staff as Assistant Professor of History. H e was fresh f r o m a G e r m a n d o c t o r a t e f o l l o w -

COLLEGE

9

ing graduation from Harvard, and his knowledge, originality, and charm infused an attractiveness into the group that strengthened its hold on all the departments in which it gave instruction. After six years he was called to Columbia (1895), where he built up a wellknown group of followers. In 1891 a "School of American History and Institutions" was founded on the basis of a considerable library already collected, the appointment of Francis Newton Thorpe as Professor of American Constitutional History, the services of other instructors already on the ground, and the promise of a considerable endowment. This school was opened in the fall of 1892, but unfortunately the principal donor failed in the depression of 1893 and it ceased to exist at the end of that year. Its history instructors, however, remained. They had been organized as a definite department of instruction in 1892, with Professor McMaster as chairman. T h e following year Dana C. Munro was added as instructor in medieval history, and from that time until 1912-13 the Department was made up of five members. Of the original group of five it may be noted that four—McMaster, Cheyney, Munro, and Robinson—have been elected presidents of the American Historical Association—the highest honor that can be bestowed on an American historian. One member of the present Department, Dr. Conyers Read, is Executive Secretary of the Association, and Dr. William E. Lingelbach is chairman of the American Council of Learned Societies and Dean of the College. Since 1912 various new members have been added to the Department, replacing those who have died, have retired, or have been called to other institutions. In addition to the earlier fivefold division of American political, American constitutional, English, modern European, and medieval history, six other special fields— ancient history, Renaissance and Reformation, Latin America, colonial history, American cultural, and European cultural history— have their place in the curriculum. From the time of its formation, the Department has had a significant part in the development of historical instruction and research in the United States. Its members have produced widely used textbooks and many important historical works, among them McMaster's History of the People of the United States and Cheyney's Industrial and Social History of England, publications whose influence has long been felt in the emphasis given to the social and economic aspects of history. In addition the Department has trained a group of scholars who now occupy prominent positions in a score

ΙΟ

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

or more of i m p o r t a n t universities and colleges throughout the country. M e n t i o n m a y also be m a d e of the T r a n s l a t i o n s and Reprints from the O r i g i n a l Sources of E u r o p e a n History. T h e s e publications, which began to a p p e a r in 1894, have been used in most of the colleges and m a n y of the h i g h schools of the U n i t e d States and have done much to influence historical teaching. Since their first appearance scarcely a historical textbook published in this country has not mentioned them. In addition, the late Dr. M c K i n l e y f o u n d e d a n d edited The Historical Outlook, w h i c h was for many years the only periodical devoted to the interests of history teachers in the secondary schools. T h i s magazine, u n d e r the title Social Studies, is now edited by a m e m b e r of the D e p a r t m e n t w h o also edits Pennsylvania History, the o r g a n of the Pennsylvania Historical Association. Philosophy: T h e teaching of philosophy has been continuous in the University of Pennsylvania a n d its forbears since 1751, a period d u r i n g w h i c h the very definition of philosophy has changed. I n the earlier years the teachers were not called Professors of Philosophy, but rather of L o g i c , Ethics, a n d Metaphysics. L a t e r there appears the title "Professor of M o r a l Philosophy," as opposed to " N a t u r a l Phil o s o p h y , " w h i c h signified, of course, the physical sciences. " L o g i c " a n d " E t h i c s " are terms properly applied to branches of philosophy today, but "Metaphysics," b e i n g somewhat narrow, is n o l o n g e r used as a title for courses or professorships in the University. In fact it does not properly fit even the eighteenth-century teaching of philosophy, in w h i c h theological bias and something of an anti-scientific point of view were likely to be present. A n d " M o r a l P h i l o s o p h y " is but a small part of what philosophy comprises. Indeed, a l t h o u g h the University was the first to have a distinctly secular c u r r i c u l u m , a n d some of the early teachers of philosophy t a u g h t n a t u r a l philosophy as well, the present conception of philosophy as a critique of the sciences and as a systematic commentary o n the history of ideas hardly appears anywhere in American education before 1870. W h e n in 1868 Provost D a n i e l G o o d w i n , who, like most of the Provosts before him, wore the cloth and also taught philosophy, resigned to become D e a n of the Philadelphia Divinity School, ano t h e r c l e r g y m a n succeeded h i m in the chair of philosophy. T h i s was H e n r y P. K r a u t h , whose title of Professor of Intellectual and M o r a l Philosophy was intended, perhaps, to indicate that ethics and theology were not the chief concern of philosophy. T h o u g h a clergy-

T H E PROVOSTS' T O W E R :

DORMITORIES

B O T A N I C A L GARDENS AND MEDICAL L A B O R A T O R I E S

COLLEGE

11

man, Dr. Krauth was our first Professor of Philosophy in the modern sense, and through him the University was among the first of American educational institutions to recognize philosophy in its present röle as a theory of knowledge. T h e new professor must have seemed a bit radical, for he conducted rousing seminars in Sir William Hamilton's agnostic philosophy. Dr. Krauth died in 1883, and his successor was George Stuart Fullerton, who for twenty years led a whole generation of students along the pleasant paths of philosophy. T o others Dr. Fullerton was a distinguished man; to the present College faculty he has become a tradition. H e made philosophy a living thing, and many an alumnus still alive remembers his inspiring lectures. In 1887 the newly endowed A d a m Seybert Professorship of Moral and Intellectual Philosophy was conferred on Dr. Fullerton. Its original purpose was to subsidize research in psychical phenomena and to investigate the claims of spiritualism. In 1889 William Romaine Newbold, a young instructor in Latin with a wide training in psychology, was made Lecturer in Philosophy and undertook a systematic review of spiritualism—with distinctly negative conclusions. In 1903, on Dr. Fullerton's retirement, Dr. Newbold succeeded him and soon distinguished himself as a brilliant scholar. B y 1920 he was generally recognized as an authority on Greek philosophy, and by the time of his death in 1926 his remarkable work in deciphering the Roger Bacon texts had earned him an international reputation. During Dr. Newbold's tenure the Department ceased to consist of but one or two men. In 1896 Edgar A . Singer, Jr., was called from Harvard, where he had been an assistant in psychology under W i l liam James, and shortly he was engaged in his widely recognized work on the history of modern thought and the philosophy of science. Others who later joined the Department were Louis William Flaccus, author of distinguished publications in ethics and aesthetics; Isaac Husik, able teacher of jurisprudence and social philosophy, who died in 1939; and Henry Bradford Smith, a nationally known authority on logic, who died in 1938. Beginning with Dr. Fullerton, most of the men who have been named have contributed greatly to the development of the program of the present Department. T h i s program consists of nearly forty courses covering the entire range of philosophy. It is offered by a staff of nine to undergraduate and graduate students who number considerably more than the twenty youngsters taught in 1 7 5 1 by Mr. David Martin, first Rector of the Academy of Philadelphia. But

12

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

more significant than the mere increase in numbers is the Department's achieving of something of the spirit of Dr. Fullerton, w h o insisted that philosophy must not be regarded as a thing apart from life. Continuing to have a decent respect for history, the Department at the same time follows the tendency of the age to reestablish philosophy as mother of the sciences and as a source for the criticism of the scientist's postulates and for the correlation of his conclusions. Romance Languages and Literature: One clause of the charter of the old Academy stated that "the Trustees shall, with all convenient Speed, endeavour to engage Persons capable of teaching the French, Spanish, and German Languages," a provision that was owing to Franklin's interest in modern languages. T h e first teacher, a Mr. Creamer, was appointed in 1754, and, according to the minutes of the Trustees, he was to teach French, Italian, and German, with perhaps some music and painting on the side. Spanish was added to the curriculum in 1766, when Mr. Paul Fook was "chosen Professor of the French and Spanish T o n g u e s . " F r o m that time to the beginning of the present century, there were rarely more than two teachers of modern foreign languages in the University at one time. T o d a y , however, the Department of Romance Languages has a staff of twenty persons, w h o give courses in French, Spanish, Italian, Provengal, and Portuguese. Of the departments in the College, Romance Languages is third in the number of students receiving instruction. English is first by a considerable margin and History is second, being closely followed by Romance Languages. Many textbooks in French and Spanish written by members of the Department are widely used throughout the world. T h e separation of French and Spanish from German in the University and, therefore, the beginning of the Department of Romance Languages, dates from the appointment of Dr. H u g o A. Rennert as Professor of Romanic Languages and Literatures in 1893. Dr. Rennert had previously taught G e r m a n as well as French, having been appointed instructor in these two languages in 1885. In 1889, to prepare seriously for a career of research and teaching, he went to Germany, where he became acquainted with the new scientific methods of language and literary investigation developed earlier in the century by German scholars, receiving his doctor's degree at Freiburg in 1891. Dr. Rennert was the first American scholar to come into direct contact with these new scientific methods as applied to Spanish linguistics and literary history, and the publication of his dissertation on the Spanish pastoral romances marks the beginning of the

COLLEGE

»3

truly systematic investigation of Hispanic languages and literatures in the universities of the United States. Convinced that the serious study of the early period of Spanish depended on obtaining reliable texts, Dr. Rennert soon went again to Europe to visit many of the great European libraries, and transcribed numerous documents which he later studied and published. But his fame as a Hispanist is based chiefly on two important volumes: The Life of Lope de Vega, 1562-1635, first published in 1904, and The Spanish Stage in the Time of Lope de Vega, which appeared in 1909. His library, gathered over a long period of teaching and research, is now a valuable part of the extensive Romance collections in the University Library. Several members of the Department have been disciples of Dr. Rennert, but none was so directly influenced by him as the late J . P. Wickersham Crawford, who was Professor of Romanic Languages and Literatures from 1914 until his death in 1939. His doctoral thesis, The Life and Works of Cristobal Sudrez de Figueroa, was followed by numerous articles on the early lyric poetry and drama of Spain. T h e studies on the drama developed later into a work of major importance, The Spanish Drama before Lope de Vega. In 1933, at the request of the Spanish Section of the Modern Language Association of America, Dr. Crawford founded and assumed editorship of the Hispanic Review, a quarterly devoted to research in the Hispanic languages and literatures. T h e Review, which is published by the University of Pennsylvania Press, has been praised by Hispanists the world over for the high standard of its scholarship. Other successors of Dr. Rennert have carried on productive research in the field of Hispanic studies. Many contributions have been made to the study of Spanish literary history, among which might be noted an important critical edition of Baltasar Graciin's Criticon. In addition extensive work has been done in Portuguese, notably a historical grammar of the Portuguese language, the only systematic exposition in any language of the modern findings of Portuguese philology. T h e latter publication and others have given the University recognition in both Europe and American as a center for Portuguese studies. T h e work in French and Italian is also distinguished. It includes an edition of much of the verse of the troubadours and its accompanying music, a work that is a remarkable correlation of the fields of literature and musicology; and an extensive study of the thought of Jean-Jacques Rousseau, which is a monu-

14

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

ment of comprehensive research in eighteenth-century literature and philosophy. Contributions to the study of Italian literature have included works on the modern Italian novel and the drama of Luigi Pirandello, the latter having been prepared with the approval and advice of the great Italian himself. A l l of these publications have been followed by supplementary works in the form of doctoral dissertations, many of which have appeared in the Romance Language Publications Series, sponsored by the Department. Germanic Languages and Literature: If Benjamin Franklin's interest in modern languages led to the teaching of European tongues in the Academy and College of Philadelphia, there was a further reason for the teaching of G e r m a n — t h e presence of a large German population in the Province of Pennsylvania. German was first taught by the same Mr. Creamer who was appointed in 1754 to teach French, Italian, and German, and perhaps music and painting. N o special emphasis was given to German, but in 1780 an independent G e r m a n school was established, with John Christopher Kunze as Master. T h e new school, in which all subjects of the curriculum were taught in German, was evidently an attempt to interest the Pennsylvania Germans in the University. Professor Kunze, it would seem, was a gentleman of wide learning, for in 1784 he resigned to becomc Professor of Oriental Languages at Columbia. From 1784 to 1867 no unusual recognition was given to either German or the Pennsylvania Germans, but in the latter year, when German and other modern languages were made electives with the same status as Greek and Latin, the prominent German-American scholar Oswald Seidensticker was appointed Professor of the German Language and Literature. H e was a more recent arrival in this country than the "Pennsylvania D u t c h , " for he was born in Göttingen in 1825; nevertheless he was a pioneer investigator into the activities of the Germans in this country. Of the twenty-two books and articles which he published, many were important contributions to the early history of Germans in America. Dr. Seidensticker's successor was Marion Dexter Learned, who was appointed to the chair of Germanic Languages and Literature in 1895, a year after Dr. Seidensticker's death. Like his predecessor, Dr. Learned was greatly interested in German-Americans and their history. H e founded the quarterly Americana-Germanica, which later became the bi-monthly German-American Annals, and was the author of numerous books and articles, notably the scholarly Life of

COLLEGE

>5

Francis Pastorius and a Guide to the Manuscript Sources of American History in the German State Archives, the latter written at the suggestion of the Carnegie Foundation. But the interest in German-American history did not prevent the teaching of echt Deutsch in an increasing amount and variety. It should be noted that Dr. Learned was Professor of Germanic Languages and not of the German Language. After his appointment, the Scandinavian languages in their various periods were gradually introduced, and the graduate department in time became one of the strongest in the country. One member of the German Department throughout the entire period of Dr. Learned's chairmanship and for long after his death in 1917 was Edward C. Wesselhoeft, the finest undergraduate teacher of German the University has had. Another was the late Daniel B. Shumway, who in 1895 returned to the University from Göttingen, where he had taken his doctorate in philology. T h e author of many philological articles, Dr. Shumway also wrote for many years the critical German bibliography for the Publications of the Modern Language Association, and after Dr. Learned's death he became chairman of the Department. T h i s was just at the time when America entered the World War, and a capable administrator was needed. Student enrollment had fallen to one-third of its previous number, yet the work was never interrupted, no teacher was dismissed, and with the end of the war a prompt recovery in enrollment occurred. T o d a y the Department has a staff of ten, whose publications include, besides a great number of contributions to learned journals in the United States and Europe, such varied books as grammars of Old Icelandic, Swedish, Lithuanian, and Middle High German; and a Lithuanian-German dictionary. It is interesting to note also that the earlier attention to German-American matters is being renewed. Greek: T h e present chairman of the Department of Greek is the sixteenth occupant of the principal chair of Greek at the University of Pennsylvania in a line which extends back to David Martin, who was appointed Rector of the Academy in 1750 at a salary of £200 with the stipulation that he was to teach Greek—as well as Latin, History, Geography, Chronology, Logic, Rhetoric, and the English Tongue! At present, Greek does not bulk so large in the curriculum as it did in the early days, when as many as four years were devoted to it; nevertheless the number and variety of courses offered by the Depart-

ι6

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

ment have greatly increased. T h i s is due partly to the expansion of the Graduate School and partly to the archaeological discoveries in Greek lands, which made it imperative that the Department give courses in Greek archaeology, as has been done for more than forty years. A t present twenty-four courses in Greek are offered in the College and twenty-five in the Graduate School. T h i s has been managed with a small faculty by organizing the courses in two- and three-year cycles. T h e dropping of Greek as a required subject for undergraduates, which occurred in 1915, naturally led to a great decrease in the number of students, but this loss has been more than compensated for by the increase which has come from two courses, Greek 21 and Greek 25. T h e first of these is a course in the history of Greek literature in which the student is permitted to read standard translations. T h e other, a course in Greek civilization, is composed of lectures on Greek literature, archaeology, private life, philosophy, and oratory. T h u s a single course presents much that the student would obtain only incidentally from a broad study of Greek authors. It might be added that the Catalogue for 1830-31 mentioned a course in " R o m a n and Greek Antiquities," one of the first of the sort to be given in any university. T h e Greek Department has always had a group of excellent graduate students, and the theses they have published have been real contributions to the study of Greek language and literature. O n e reason for this, apart from the quality of the men, is the fact that the University Library is strong in Greek texts and in various periodicals devoted to classical studies, for which Provost C. C. Harrison was largely responsible. In recent years Dr. Charles W . Burr has made valuable additions to the Aristotle collections. For many years the University has contributed to the support of the American School of Classical Studies at Athens. Members of the Greek faculty have at times been directors of the School, among them Dr. W i l l i a m N . Bates, recently retired chairman of the Greek Department and a member of the Managing Committee of the School since 1902. Dr. Bates was also Editor-in-Chief from 1920-24 of the American Journal of Archaeology. Latin: In his Proposals Relating to the Education of Youth, the matter-of-fact Benjamin Franklin declared himself in favor of a written style that was above all things clear and concise. But a little farther on in the same pamphlet, the benefits of studying the classics are described in an ornate period that has almost Ciceronian

COLLEGE

17

eloquence. He added, however, that no student should be compelled to study Latin and Greek; but perhaps his own persuasiveness, if not the educational tradition of the day, was too much for his fellow incorporators, and the classics were required of all students in the College of Philadelphia and later in the University of Pennsylvania. But whatever the merits of Latin as a required subject, it is certain that the Latin Department has given distinction to the University of Pennsylvania. Dr. John C. Rolfe, who became Professor of the Latin Language and Literature in 1902, for many years has been a trustee of the American Academy in Rome and has also served as Professor and Professor-in-Charge, being decorated Commendatore della Corona d'ltalia by the Italian Government in 1930. Dr. Walton B. McDaniel, who joined the Department in 1901 and succeeded Dr. Rolfe as chairman in 1932, has also served as professor in the Academy, and both he and Dr. Rolfe have been presidents of the American Philological Association. Dr. McDaniel's successor, Dr. George DePue Hadzits, has also been a professor in the Academy and is now Editor of the Publications of the American Philological Association. Each of these men has contributed extensively to the literature of Latin scholarship. T h e most ambitious project of the Department was the sponsorship of a library of forty-five volumes entitled Our Debt to Greece and Rome, to which teachers of Latin at the University contributed the volumes on Cicero, Roman Private Life, Language and Philology, and Lucretius and His Influence. Throughout the nineteenth century the teaching of Latin in the University followed the pattern that is well known to those who have studied and taught the language and literature. T h e poets, orators, historians, and philosophers were read and interpreted as literature and also for their revelation of Roman civilization. But with the appointment of Professors Rolfe and McDaniel the Department at Pennsylvania entered upon a new career. These two eminent scholars and teachers rapidly increased the enrollment in the undergraduate courses and established the prestige of the graduate courses. Courses have been given regularly in the public and private life of the Romans, the architectural and topographical history of Rome, in Roman religion, archaeology, epigraphy, and paleography, as well as in the authors, both classical and medieval. T h e graduate students have made sound contributions to scholarship and in several cases have received fellowships in the American Academy. By 1930, when Latin ceased to be a required subject in the College, the staff had increased to twelve, as compared to the one or two professors who, until the turn of the century, had usually

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

been responsible for all of the L a t i n taught in the University. T o d a y e n r o l l m e n t is b e i n g m a i n t a i n e d at a h i g h level, and the same variety of courses is b e i n g offered by the present staff of six men, for b o t h the D e p a r t m e n t a n d the University are aware of the present need for stressing the relationships between the ancient civilizations a n d those that have f o l l o w e d . Mathematics: T h o s e m e m b e r s of the D e p a r t m e n t of M a t h e m a t i c s w h o have been the authors of so many algebras, trigonometries, geometries, a n d other m a t h e m a t i c a l textbooks k n o w n to Pennsylv a n i a m e n in the last fifty years h a d a precedent to f o l l o w , for the first t e x t b o o k to be p u b l i s h e d by a m e m b e r of the faculty was The Uses of Globes, by T h e o p h i l u s G r e w , the first master of mathematics in the A c a d e m y . A copy of the book is still in the L i b r a r y . G r e w was a p p o i n t e d o n D e c e m b e r 17, 1750, at a salary of £ 1 2 5 a year, and, a c c o r d i n g to the minutes of the T r u s t e e s , he was to teach " W r i t i n g , Arithmetic, Merchants Accounts, Algebra, Astronomy, Navigation, a n d all other Branches of M a t h e m a t i c s . " W h e t h e r w r i t i n g was really considered a b r a n c h of m a t h e m a t i c s or not, it is certain that in those days mathematics was but o n e b r a n c h of the l e a r n i n g that a c a p a b l e scholar should possess. T h e R e v . W i l l i a m Smith, first Provost of the University, had come to the A c a d e m y in 1754 to teach logic, rhetoric, a n d n a t u r a l and moral philosophy. A c a p a b l e m a t h e m a t i c i a n a n d astronomer besides all this, he ably assisted D a v i d R i t t e n h o u s e at the transit of V e n u s in 1769, w h e n the A m e r i c a n observers m o v e d the earth twenty p e r cent farther f r o m the sun. A n d the second Provost, J o h n E w i n g , D.D., was equally versatile. B e f o r e b e c o m i n g Professor of N a t u r a l P h i l o s o p h y in the C o l l e g e in 1762, he had been Professor of Mathematics at Princeton. In a d d i t i o n to his duties as teacher a n d Provost, he served as an engineer, surveying state b o u n d a r y lines and l a y i n g out turnpikes. B o t h of these men, w h i l e n o t officially professors of mathematics, taught the subject in the C o l l e g e , a n d the same is true of D a v i d R i t t e n h o u s e , w h o b e c a m e Professor of A s t r o n o m y in 1779. Some of his accomplishments have been noted below, in the account of the D e p a r t m e n t of A s t r o n o m y , b u t R i t t e n h o u s e , w h o was the first member of the University's faculty to m a k e i m p o r t a n t investigations in mathematics, is difficult to confine to one d e p a r t m e n t , for in the eighteenth century nice d e p a r t m e n t a l distinctions were v i r t u a l l y unknown. U n d o u b t e d l y the most i m p o r t a n t m a t h e m a t i c i a n in the earlier

COLLEGE

19

days of the University was Robert Adrain, who became Professor of Mathematics in 1827 and who, unlike his predecessors, was a specialist. A n Irish refugee who at Princeton, Columbia, and Rutgers had already won acclaim as the foremost mathematician in America, he showed great originality in descriptive geometry, calculus of variations, elliptic functions, and classical mechanics. T h e highwater mark of his published writings was his statement of the law of accidental error, said to be the first broad principle of pure mathematics discovered in America. But comparatively few of the professors of mathematics during the nineteenth century were specialists like Adrain. In many cases they occupied the three chairs of mathematics, astronomy, and natural philosophy, and the Department did not achieve final independence until 1899, when Edwin S. Crawley was appointed T h o m a s A . Scott Professor of Mathematics. Dr. Crawley was the author of a series of textbooks on trigonometry, analytic geometry, and calculus, and was the first to receive a Ph.D. in mathematics in the University (1892). Since that time more than fifty men and women have earned the degree, most of whom are full or associate professors in twenty-five colleges and universities, while six have remained in public schools and five are in public service. T h e r e have been fourteen appointments to National Research Fellowships, besides Rosenwald and Guggenheim Fellowships and many scholarships and fellowships at Pennsylvania. T w o former students have been invited for a year to the Institute for Advanced Study. T h e present Department has a staff of seventeen and ranks high in the amount of instruction given in the undergraduate schools and the Graduate School. A broad field of study in both undergraduate and graduate courses maintains the two-century tradition of thoro u g h class work and amply prepares for specialization and research, which is now chiefly in number theory, topology, and analysis. Present members of the Department have been Vice-Presidents of the American Mathematical Society and members of the editorial staff of its Bulletin, Transactions, and Colloquium Lectures, and are associated with other scientific and educational activities both within and without the University. A n important activity within the University is the Mathematical Research Club, which is frequently addressed by members of the faculty of neighboring institutions and from the Institute for Advanced Study. Professors from Bryn Mawr, Haverford, and Swarthmore are active in the Research C l u b and have frequently conducted courses in the Graduate School, while members of the Department of Mathematics at the University

20

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

of Pennsylvania in turn have conducted graduate courses and advanced seminars at those colleges. Earth Sciences (Geology and Mineralogy): T h e Department of Geology and Mineralogy, or of Earth Sciences, as it has been known since 1938, occupies the old Chapel on the second floor of College Hall, and the only faintly surviving ecclesiastical atmosphere of the location is suggestive, perhaps, of a victory for science. In 1835, when the Department was organized, with Henry Darwin Rogers as the first professor, the establishment of a chair of geology was regarded almost as a dangerous social act and an encouragement to heresy. At any rate, in 1930 the Department moved into the Chapel, which had long ceased to serve its original purpose, and which was transformed into a museum housing the following collections: The F. A. Genth Collection of Minerals and Foreign Fossils, which forms the bulk of the mineral collections. T h e fossils, especially those of an extinct group of animals known as the Ammonoids, found mainly in Europe, are of permanent value, both scientifically and financially. The Clay Collection of Minerals, containing some two thousand valuable specimens, many from mines no longer open. The Cardeza Collection, formed by the late Dr. J . M. D. Cardeza and his father. T h e collection is rich in local minerals and rocks, many of them from quarries no longer worked. The Bement Collection, a small but valuable collection given by the late Clarence Bement of Philadelphia. The Koenig Collection, presented by Mrs. Elsa Koenig Nitzsche in memory of her father. This is a large collection of miscellaneous specimens, many of them from material analyzed by Dr. George A. Koenig, former Professor of Mineralogy in the University. The James Hall Collection, purchased from the former Director of the New York State Geological Survey. It contains several thousand specimens of American fossils and a valuable series of rocks representative of the strata of the eastern United States. In addition there are various small collections contributed by members of the staff and other donors, or acquired by purchase. In 1938 these resources were greatly enlarged by an association with the Philadelphia Academy of Natural Sciences. At the same time a broadly planned scientific and cultural course known as the "Four-Year Course in Earth Sciences" was created. This educational arrangement is among the first to be established in American universities.

COLLEGE

si

T h e Department has been known especially for the participation of its professors in geological surveys. Professor Rogers organized the First Geological Survey of Pennsylvania and also that of New Jersey. Following a series of annual reports, his work ultimately saw daylight in two great volumes called The Geology of Pennsylvania. Although he worked with no accurate base maps and in an atmosphere of popular indifference to the need for accurate surveys of the coal fields, the landscape features, the mountain structures, and other major aspects of the area, his descriptions, especially of the coal fields and the Allegheny Mountains, formed the basis of later surveys. Among Rogers' successors were J. Peter Lesley and Ferdinand V. Hayden. Lesley, an expert topographer who saw the need for exact, painstaking detail in the mapping of the various aspects of our geological structures, organized and was Director of the Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania. His work in the coal fields has become a classic, and his studies in the Appalachian Mountain structures are still regarded as a monument in geological literature. Hayden organized and was Director of the first of the great American governmental scientific surveys. T h e "Hayden Survey," which laid the foundations for the present United States Geological Survey, is still famous for its revelation of the wonders of the West—the Badlands of Dakota, the Yellowstone geysers, the vast areas of Montana, Idaho, and Wyoming. Included in Hayden's remarkably able organization were Leidy and Cope, professors in the Medical School and famous as the founders of vertebrate paleontology in America. Anthropology: O n the top floor of College Hall, in a large room formerly occupied by the Zelosophic Society, is the Department of Anthropology. Here, usually, are to be found professors and students, and perhaps an American Indian (Amerindian to the anthropologists) or other racial type. T h e room is filled with bookcases, and hanging from the walls are ceremonial masks, hunting shirts, primitive weapons, and various other picturesque properties. Anthropology was introduced at the University in 1886 with the appointment of Daniel Garrison Brinton as Professor of American Languages and Archaeology in the Department of Philosophy, as the Graduate School was then known. Dr. Brinton gave no courses in the College proper. During the early years, which were dominated by Dr. Brinton, the term "anthropology" was not used, and the courses were built

22

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

about archaeology a n d linguistics, chiefly A m e r i c a n , as can be guessed by the title of the chair. W h e n , in 1893, Dr. B r i n t o n initiated a course in p r i m i t i v e religion, it was necessary to give it in the D e p a r t m e n t of the History of R e l i g i o n . T h i s period was also m a r k e d by the presentation in the D e p a r t m e n t of Sociology of courses having anthropological significance. T h e second era of a n t h r o p o l o g y at the University began w i t h the introduction of courses in this subject in the College in 1904, w h e n Dr. G . B . G o r d o n was a p p o i n t e d to the staff of both the G r a d u a t e School a n d the College. W i t h his appearance, anthropology began to take the f o r m it has today, and the last vestige of the f o r m e r period disappeared i n 1 9 1 0 , w h e n the subject was separated f r o m archaeology a n d was set u p as a department in its o w n right in the G r a d u a t e School. T h i s step meant a less f o r m a l association w i t h the University M u s e u m , w h i c h was originally k n o w n as the D e p a r t m e n t of A r c h a e o l o g y ; nevertheless a constant interrelationship has always been m a i n t a i n e d w i t h the M u s e u m . T h e members of the D e p a r t m e n t a n d the students travel a b r o a d as well as to the u p p e r regions of College H a l l , f o r the o p e n field of general a n t h r o p o l o g y , archaeology, a n d ethnography has always been the laboratory, w i t h special emphasis in recent years o n A m e r ican I n d i a n cultures. T h e areas e x p l o r e d a n d the research completed, m u c h of it published, have included N o r t h A m e r i c a , f r o m the E s k i m o of the Arctic, the A l g o n k i a n of the sub-Arctic, the northeast a n d eastern W o o d l a n d s , the Iroquois of the G r e a t L a k e s area, the c i r c u m p o l a r zone of N o r t h A m e r i c a and Asia, the tribes of the northern Plains, the Basin-Plateau area of the R o c k i e s , the southern Plains a n d the lower Mississippi, the G u l f area, the Southwest, the M e x i c a n Plateau, Y u c a t a n and C e n t r a l A m e r i c a to P a n a m a , the O r i n o c o and A m a z o n i a n areas, a n d the West Indies. I n the O l d W o r l d the chosen fields have been in western Asia, eastern a n d southeastern E u r o p e , the Caucasus, south-central a n d southeastern A f r i c a , the F i j i Islands, A u s t r a l i a , J a p a n , C h i n a , a n d India. The Psychological Laboratory and Clinic and the Department of Psychology: W i t h one exception all of the scientific laboratories that were in College H a l l in 1872 have m o v e d out. A n d o n l y one, the Psychological L a b o r a t o r y , has m o v e d i n — t o rooms in the east end of the first floor a n d basement. B u t the D e p a r t m e n t of Psychology at the University of Pennsylv a n i a is in no sense a p a r v e n u , either at the University o r in the

COLLEGE

23

world, for in 1887, only eight years after the first psychological laboratory in the world had been established in Leipzig by Wundt, James McKeen Cattell founded the Psychological Laboratory at the University of Pennsylvania, the oldest in America with a continuous existence. A n d one year later, in 1888, Dr. Cattell was appointed Professor of Psychology, his chair being the first in psychology in the world. In many institutions, especially abroad, the directors of psychological laboratories still hold the title of Professor of Philosophy, but at Pennsylvania a distinction is made between philosophy and psychology. From the beginning, when the Laboratory consisted of two rooms in the present Botany building, psychology has been recognized as a science, and for the last decade it has been classed as a biological science. From these meager beginnings of two small rooms and a staff of one, the Department has increased to a staff which includes nine professors of various ranks as well as numerous instructors, assistants, and consultants; and in addition to the space assigned to it in College Hall, it has a seminar room and eleven rooms for experimental research on the third floor of the Hare building. T h e move from the Botany building occurred in 1901, when the Department of Physics was transferred to the R a n d a l Morgan Laboratory. Without delay the psychologists moved into the physics laboratory in the basement. Only one room was available at first, but ultimately more space was assigned to psychology. At present the former chemistry lecture room on the first floor is occupied by the offices of the Department; across the hall the former physics lecture room serves for lectures and clinical demonstrations; and adjoining it is a large room used by laboratory classes. In the basement is a machine shop elaborately equipped for making research and other experimental apparatus, but most of the space is occupied by the Psychological Clinic, which, like the professorship, was also the first to be established in the world. T h e Clinic was founded in 1896 by Dr. Lightner Witmer, who had succeeded Dr. Cattell as Director of the Psychological Laboratory in 1892. It was organized on a plan that provided for (1) a psychological clinic supplemented by a training school for the treatment of retarded children; (2) the training of psychological experts who would examine and treat retarded children, in connection with either the school system or the medical profession; (3) research and teaching by clinical methods. N o training school, how-

24

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

ever, has ever been established at the University, but in 1907, in which year Dr. Witmer also founded a j o u r n a l of orthogenics, The Psychological Clinic, he had under his professional care a number of children needing prolonged educational treatment. T o provide f o r them he established a boarding and day school, independent of the Clinic but working, as it still does, in association with it. Although the work of the Clinic has been expanded and diversified, the original purposes for which it was founded still guide its policy. On one hand it serves the public by making examinations and offering advice and guidance regarding all types of psychological problems; on the other it continues to be a laboratory for teaching and research within the Department of Psychology. So greatly has the work expanded that the Clinic now has five sections: the General Mental Clinic, which is concerned with the educational problems and the problems of neglect and conduct of all mental types from infancy to early maturity; the Speech Clinic, which treats speech defects of all kinds, cooperating in cases of malformation with the orthodontists and oral surgeons of the Dental School; the Vocational Guidance Clinic, which studies the vocational and educational problems of persons over the age of thirteen; the Personnel Clinic, which works especially w i t h prospective college students and students at the University, advising them concerning their fitness for college work and for professional education. Although for many years the work of the C l i n i c was mainly with retarded and defective children, normal children and adults now form the majority of the cases examined. W h e n Dr. Witmer's interest turned to clinical psychology, Dr. E d w i n B. T w i t m y e r became responsible f o r much of the experimental research and especially for the development of new forms of research apparatus. Dr. T w i t m y e r , whose experiments on the knee jerk demonstrated the establishment of a conditioned reflex in man ten years before Pavlov's results were published, continued the tradition that psychology, like other sciences, must be taught by laboratory methods. As a result the experimental method is maintained throughout most of the undergraduate courses and almost exclusively in the graduate courses. Naturally equipment is important in such a program, and in addition to a wide variety of standard apparatus f o r undergraduate and graduate instruction the laboratory is e q u i p p e d for research on problems of sensation and perception, memory and learning, imagination and thinking, emotional reaction, reflexes, choice and habit, and the physiology of these processes.

COLLEGE O T H E R D E P A R T M E N T S IN T H E

The

Randal

Morgan

Laboratory

25 COLLEGE

of

Physics

T h e R a n d a l M o r g a n Laboratory of Physics, w h i c h is on the east side of T h i r t y - f o u r t h Street below W a l n u t , is not one b u i l d i n g but two. T h e brick structures were designed in an Italian Renaissance s t y l e — n o t for the University, however, but for a short-lived school for girls. In 1901 they were remodeled by the Physics Department w i t h the e x p e n d i t u r e of part of a f u n d given to the Department by R a n d a l Morgan, a T r u s t e e of the University. A f t e r the necessary renovation had taken place, the D e p a r t m e n t moved over f r o m the west end of C o l l e g e H a l l to w h a t must have seemed very roomy quarters, for the stafi then n u m b e r e d but f o u r (compared to eighteen at present), and naturally the e q u i p m e n t was less extensive a n d elaborate than today. Fortunately the largest piece of the Department's present equipm e n t is not kept indoors. T h i s is a h u g e steel cylinder, forty-six feet high, w h i c h was constructed in 1939 at the rear of the smaller b u i l d i n g to the north. Physicists recognize it as a V a n de Graaf generator; to the laity it is an " a t o m smasher." I n effect, it is a huge L e y d e n jar w h i c h w i l l receive its charge (up to five million volts) f r o m a motor-driven rubber belt controlled in a research laboratory in the basement, where members of the D e p a r t m e n t conducting research in nuclear physics will be able to study flying fragments of atoms broken off f r o m larger nuclei by streams of ions accelerated to a speed of twenty thousand miles a second by the V a n de G r a a f generator. T h e less spectacular but equally important e q u i p m e n t of the laboratory is largely in the main b u i l d i n g to the south. H e r e are the large student laboratories w i t h apparatus needed in the courses o n mechanics, heat, light, sound, electricity, a n d x-rays; in the theory a n d application of thermionic v a c u u m tubes a n d gas discharges, a t o m i c a n d m o l e c u l a r theory, a n d the various other aspects of physics studied by the undergraduates. I n both buildings are research laboratories in which the members of the staff are carrying o n important investigations in radio activity, luminescence, the o p t i c a l properties of metallic surfaces, electron diffraction, the theory of solids, and the phenomena of low temperatures, as well as in nuclear physics. Extremely important work in the development of the electron microscope is being carried o n under a physicist asso-

26

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

ciated with the R . C . A . Victor Company. M u c h of the necessary apparatus is designed by the staff and is constructed in the Department's completely equipped workshop. T u c k e d away in odd corners in the Laboratory is apparatus considerably older than that used today, dating in fact to 1754, when the Trustees appropriated the round sum of £ 1 5 0 for "apparatus f o r exhibiting experiments in natural philosophy," and to 1757, when they sponsored a lottery to provide, among other things, for a "compleat apparatus for experiments." Many of the surviving pieces of those early purchases, however, are now exhibited in the Franklin Museum, for space in the Laboratory is needed for the four hundred undergraduate and graduate students studying physics each year at the University of Pennsylvania. Physics: T h e study of physics at the University has come a long way, yet it owes much to those early beginnings, f o r Benjamin Franklin and his fellow experimenters in electricity—Ebenezer Kinnersley, T h o m a s Hopkinson, and Philip Syng—gave Philadelphians a bent towards science that was felt for generations. It was not by accident that Franklin's Proposals of 1749 put so much stress on natural philosophy, f o r in 1748 he had retired from business, intending to devote his life to his experiments. T h e impetus thus given lasted not merely through the administrations of the first two Provosts, W i l l i a m Smith and J o h n Ewing, who were Professors of Natural Philosophy, but f a r into the next century, when such men as the two R o b e r t Pattersons, A l e x a n d e r Dallas Bache, J o h n Fries Frazer, and Persifor Frazer occupied the chair. In the Department's excellent library is a copy of Cajori's History of Physics, which mentions twenty-seven American physicists of note, from the earliest days u p to 1876, and seven of these were associated with the College or University as trustees, teachers, or students. More recent histories include Dr. George F. Barker, the first to hold the title of Professor of Physics in the University. Dr. Barker, who was appointed in 1872, maintained the earlier tradition. In addition to being a prolific author, an editor, a brilliant lecturer, and president of various learned societies, he was in constant demand as a consultant in technical problems, one of his clients being T h o m a s A . Edison. H e was widely acquainted at home and abroad, and a close friend was L o r d Kelvin, a visitor to the laboratories in College Hall. Dr. Barker's record rests also on his students. Some of these were Dr. William Duane, biophysicist; Dr. Paul R . Heyl, authority on

COLLEGE

27

gravitation; Dr. George F. Stradling, known for his analysis of the "human equation," a term so frequently misused by the layman; Dr. Arthur YV. Goodspccd, who did pioneer work with roentgen rays and who became Director of the new Morgan Laboratory in 1901; and Dr. Horace C. Richards, who was Director of the Laboratory from 1931 to 1938. Among the men who studied under Dr. Goodspeed and Dr. Richards were Η. E. Ives, known for his work in photo-electricity and television; H. C. Snook, developer of x-ray equipment; and a group of prominent geophysicists which includes W. P. Haseman, E. A . Eckhardt, J . C. Karcher, Β. B. Weatherby, and C. B. Bazzoni. T h e last named, who was Professor of Experimental Physics at the University until 1938, was cited by General Pershing and decorated by the French and British governments for his distinguished service in sound-ranging on the American Front. The Flower

Observatory

T h e offices of the members of the Department of Astronomy are in the remodeled residence at 3438 Walnut Street, but the real center of the Department's activities is the Flower Observatory, completed in 1895, which is on the "Flower F a r m " about one mile west of Sixty-ninth Street on the West Chester Pike. Here are the large equatorial buildings, a meridian building, and the residence of the Director, who is also Flower Professor of Astronomy. T h e Observatory and the chair are named for Reese W a l l Flower, who willed all his property to the University for an observatory and a chair of astronomy. T h e principal instrument of the Observatory is an excellent 18-inch refracting telescope, and only the climatic conditions prevent magnifying powers of the theoretical limit being used. It is equipped with a filar micrometer and a wedge photometer that are in constant use. Smaller instruments are a 41^-inch zenith telescope, a 3-inch prism transit instrument, and two refractors of 4- and 414inch apertures. In 1937, through the generosity of Dr. Gustavus W . Cook, a Trustee of the University, a splendid Ross photographic telescope was acquired. T h i s has a 4-inch lens and a focal ratio of one to seven, the field being large and the images excellent over an area twelve degrees in diameter. T h e Observatory is open to the public every Thursday evening that is not a University holiday, and visitors in considerable numbers come there, even on winter nights, when the unheated building is not exactly comfortable.

28

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Astronomy: T h e history of the Department begins in the earliest years of the Academy, when T h e o p h i l u s Grew taught astronomy as the only form of mathematics required of members of the senior class. Astronomy was also taught in connection with natural philosophy, Provosts William Smith and J o h n Ewing, the first holders of that chair, being capable astronomers. T h e first Professor of Astronomy, however, was D a v i d Rittenhouse, F.R.S., a man whose versatility almost challenges that of the manysided Franklin. A l t h o u g h receiving little formal education, he was not only an exquisite mechanic and a famous clockmaker, but a mathematician of note, a great astronomer, and a modern physicist. H e made a " F r a u n h o f e r grating" for the study of the dark lines of the spectrum before F r a u n h o f e r was born; he anticipated " E w i n g ' s Principle" by striking a soft ramrod in the magnetic field of a compass; he amused himself by explaining optical illusions by psychological methods; he devised a method of directly computing logarithms, and independently discovered Wallis's F o r m u l a f o r integrating powers of trigonometric functions. A n d he was a statesman, engineer, translator, and a Trustee of the University. T h r o u g h o u t the nineteenth century, one man was usually professor of mathematics, astronomy, and even of natural philosophy; and astronomy did not achieve final independent status until 1899, four years after the appointment of Dr. Charles L . Doolittle as Professor of Mathematics and Flower Professor of Astronomy. In 1 9 1 2 Professor Doolittle, who did pioneer work in the variation of latitude, was succeeded by his son, Eric Doolittle, who had been associated with his father since the opening of the Observatory. E r i c Doolittle's work with double stars had already brought him a high reputation, for in 1 9 1 3 S. W . B u r n h a m , of the Yerkes Observatory, selected him to carry out the extension of his famous General Catalogue of double stars. Following the younger Doolittle's death in 1920, the chair remained vacant until 1928, when Dr. Charles P. Olivier was called from the University of Virginia. In the meantime Dr. S. G . B a r t o n devoted his time to the measurement of double stars and the search of the catalogues of the Carte de del, in which he has detected u p to the present about 2,500 new double stars. T h i s work has appeared in numerous articles in scientific journals, and usually has been issued later in reprints of the Flower Observatory, as well as in V o l . V., Part 1, of the Astronomical Series of the Publications of the University of Pennsylvania. T h e latter, which appeared in 1932,

COLLEGE

»9

contained 1,414 measures of 1,033 double stars, made by the five members of the staff; and Vol. V., Part 2, published in 1940, contained 2,117 additional measures. In photometry, work in which was begun by Dr. Olivier on his arrival and which he, aided by the assistants, has carried on since, about eighty variable stars, most of them recently discovered, have been studied. One star, EZ Aquilae, has proved to be of surpassing interest as a transition type. Magnitudes of comparison stars for several score of regions have been derived with the photometer, and several thousand observations of the variables themselves have been made. Fully half of the time of the 18-inch refractor is used for this work, and all of the time of the photographic telescope. Dr. Olivier, who founded the American Meteor Society in 1 9 1 1 , also devotes much of his time to meteors and fireballs. Since 1928 several hundred thousand observations, made all over America and in other continents, have been sent to the Observatory for discussion and observation, the results appearing in numerous articles and in many of the reprints of the Flower Observatory. THE

DEPARTMENTS

Macfarlane

OF BOTANY AND ZOOLOGY

Hall of Botany

T h e study of botany at the University of Pennsylvania is conducted primarily in a three-story, red brick building on Hamilton Walk west of Thirty-sixth Street and facing the considerably more ornate dormitories. Not the most attractive structure on the Campus, it was built in 1884 to house a newly organized School of Biology. The original cost was defrayed largely by a gift from Dr. Horace Jayne, a member of the faculty. In 1887 a third story was added to accommodate the increasing numbers of students, and pillars on the lower floors are reminders of the fact that the city authorities once demanded that the top floor be strengthened. Its present name is in honor of Dr. John M. Macfarlane, Professor of Botany from 1893 to 1920. Although Macfarlane Hall once housed the Departments of Botany, Zoology, and Psychology (it was here that J . McKeen Cattell established the oldest psychological laboratory in the United States and Eadweard Muybridge made his celebrated pictures of a galloping horse), the Department of Botany does not find the vacated space too extensive for its needs, for more than four hundred students each year make use of the laboratories and other facilities in

30

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

the building. T h e s e consist of a large laboratory for plant physiology and two classroom laboratories on the first floor; a laboratory of plant pathology and a laboratory of plant cytology on the second floor; three classroom laboratories, a chart r o o m c o n t a i n i n g an especially excellent collection of charts, a dark room, and a room for the preparation of fossil sections, on the third floor. T h e basement contains a bacteriology laboratory, a laboratory of forest pathology, used by the U n i t e d States Forest Service, and a m o u n t i n g room. A small annex at the rear is devoted to instruction and research in protoplasm. Scattered through the building are the offices of the members of the staff and small research laboratories. T h e excellent departmental library and the herbarium are housed for greater safety in the fireproof Zoology Laboratory to the west. O f obvious importance in instruction and research are the six greenhouses a d j o i n i n g Macfarlane Hall at the rear. T h e s e contain more than five thousand specimens of plants from the tropical, subtropical and temperate regions of the world. A great n u m b e r of the specimens have been in the greenhouses for m a n y years a n d were acquired by purchase or gift, but most of the newer specimens are propagated by the Department's expert from seeds a n d cuttings distributed w i t h o u t cost to botanical gardens t h r o u g h o u t the w o r l d by the Botanical G a r d e n Exchange. T h e largest greenhouse contains palms a n d other large tropical plants; another serves for experimental purposes only; others contain the collections of flowering plants, desert plants, aquatic plants, ferns, hardwoods, a n d orchids. Every type of plant is available to the students, f r o m algae, liverworts, and mosses u p to the orchidaccae. The

Botanical

Gardens

T h e Botanical Gardens behind Macfarlane H a l l are a distinctly ornamental feature of the Campus. Established by Dr. Macfarlane in 1894 and consisting then of f o u r acres, they have now been reduced to three acres as a result of the subsequent construction of the Medical Laboratories a n d the Zoological Laboratory. Beautifully landscaped and containing thousands of specimens of hardy plants, they attract many visitors. T h e lily pond in the center, usually called the " f r o g p o n d , " once served as a place to duck freshmen, but h a p pily the practice has been ended to prevent d a m a g e — t o the flora, not the fauna. T h e gardens are not merely ornamental, however, for they provide the Department w i t h great quantities of plant material for instruction a n d research.

COLLEGE

3»

The Morris Arboretum Somewhat more remote from Macfarlane Hall is the most recent addition to the facilities for the study of botany in the University. This is the Morris Arboretum, which is on a tract of 170 acres fourteen miles away in Chestnut Hill, on the northern boundary of Philadelphia. Oncc the property of Miss Lydia Τ . Morris and her brother, John T . Morris, the land and the large stone residence on it were bequeathed to the University in 1932, along with a large fund for the maintenance and extension of the rich collections of plant life on the tract and for research in botany. Under the terms of the bequest, the Arboretum serves as a Graduate School of Botany affiliated with the University through the Department of Botany. Undergraduate classes, however, are frequently held there, and a regular bus service carries students and staff to the Arboretum. During their lifetime Mr. Morris and his sister had developed eighty acres of the Morris home by landscaping the tract with profuse plantings of shrubs and trees from all over the world, a large proportion being from Asia. T h e maintenance of the collections has been no mean task, especially because of the unusually severe winters of 1933-34-35, which damaged or destroyed many important specimens. Virtually all of these have now been replaced by specimens propagated at the Arboretum. For replacing and extending the plantings, two nurseries are maintained, one for deciduous plants and one for conifers, the latter containing the widest variety of specimens in the United States. T h e greenhouses at the Arboretum also serve for propagation and for experimental purposes. T h e original plantings were made with appearance almost solely in mind, but as these die they are being replaced in groupings of closely related specimens that will also preserve the landscaping. In this way the Arboretum serves for the study of ecology and taxonomy combined with modern landscape art. T h e large stone residence at the Arboretum has been converted to the uses of the staff. It contains a laboratory especially devoted to forest pathology, an herbarium, offices, and a lecture room in which monthly public lectures are given. T h e public is also admitted to the grounds on Wednesday, Thursday, Saturday, and Sunday afternoons. The Zoological Laboratory T h e Zoological Laboratory is just west of Macfarlane Hall and close to the western entrance of Hamilton Walk. T h e impressive

32

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

three-story building, which was first occupied in the fall of 1 9 1 1 , was the last to be arranged for during the administration of Provost C. C. Harrison. T h e architectural design is an English collegiate style of the mid-seventeenth century, similar to that of the dormitories and harmonizing with the Medical Laboratories. T h e building is T-shaped, the longer section extending 204 feet along Hamilton Walk. T h e shorter section extends south and is connected with the " V i v a r i u m " by an animal breeding house. T h e plans f o r the building were mainly the work of Dr. T h o m a s H . Montgomery, chairman of the Department of Zoology at the time, w h o died in A p r i l 1912. Dr. Montgomery's plans anticipated a greatly increased number of undergraduate and graduate students, and included unusual facilities for a broad program of research. T o provide for experimentation, the plans included breeding rooms, constant temperature rooms with a wide range of temperatures, dark rooms for controlled spectral and ultra-violet light, rooms f o r physiological and embryological experimentation, chemical rooms, microtome rooms, a balance room, and a machine shop. In addition there is an excellent departmental library at the west end of the first floor, and an auditorium seating three hundred, which is on the first floor of the rear wing. T h e r e are also research museums containing among others the osteological collection bequeathed to the Department by Dr. E d w a r d Drinker Cope, the noted paleontologist w h o was a member of the faculty of the School of Biology until his death in 1897. A part of Dr. Cope's bequest was the famous H y r t y l collection of fish skeletons. The

Vivarium

T h e V i v a r i u m is a substantial one-story brick building at the rear of the Zoological Laboratory. Constructed in 1899, it was the first of its kind connected with any university in this country and, with the exception of one at Amsterdam, probably in the world. T h e building provides facilities for maintaining in a healthy condition a variety of small terrestrial, fresh-water, a n d marine animals. Its suitability is shown by the large number of species that have become established and breed. T h e salt-water a q u a r i a have a capacity of two thousand gallons, the fresh-water a q u a r i a contain eight thousand gallons. T h i r t e e n of the aquaria have glass fronts on a dark underground corridor, so that their inmates may be observed from below.

COLLEGE The San Francisco Mountain

33 Zoological

Station

Certain of the activities of the Department of Zoology are carried on at a location extremely remote from the Campus. T h i s is the San Francisco M o u n t a i n Zoological Station, near Flagstaff, Arizona. It was established in 1929 by a member of the Department w h o since 1926 had been carrying on research at that location while o n leave of absence. T h e laboratory of the station provides opportunity for graduate study and research in m o u n t a i n and desert f a u n a under especially favorable circumstances. B I O L O G Y A T T H E UNIVERSITY O F

PENNSYLVANIA

T h e r e is no Department of Biology at the University of Pennsylvania, but rather separate Departments of Botany a n d Zoology. Naturally the development of the two is closely related, a n d for l o n g both were closely associated w i t h the faculty of medicine. T h e first Professor of Botany in the University (appointed in 1768) was A d a m K u h n , a p u p i l of Linnaeus. Zoology was introduced in 1789, w h e n K u h n ' s successor, B e n j a m i n Smith Barton, pioneer investigator of A m e r i c a n flora, was a p p o i n t e d Professor of B o t a n y a n d N a t u r a l History. Both of these men were M.D.'s, a n d for many years of their service to the University they also taught materia medica. I n 1813 the chairs of botany a n d natural history were separated f r o m the M e d i c a l Faculty and were made a part of the Faculty of N a t u r a l Science. Nevertheless the medical point of view continued to d o m i n a t e until close to the b e g i n n i n g of the present century, for most of the teachers were M.D.'s. It was for this reason, perhaps, that the teaching of botany a n d zoology for their o w n sake was not very extensive in the University u n t i l 1884, w h e n a School of B i o l o g y was established by Provost Pepper. T h e f o u n d i n g of the School was the result partly of the need for more effective teaching of biology in the University and partly of a d e m a n d for the education of women. A t first only a two-year course preparatory to medicine was offered, b u t shortly a four-year course in natural history, leading to the degree of B.S. in Biology, was offered t o both m e n and women. T h u s for the first time it was possible at the University for w o m e n to secure an undergraduate degree (except in music), a privilege, however, that was not finally a p p r o v e d by the Trustees until 1892. T h a t the School q u i c k l y achieved p r o m i n e n c e is not surprising, for the faculty contained names of extremely important biologists. Joseph L e i d y was Director; Joseph R o t h r o c k (later Commissioner of Forestry of the C o m m o n -

34

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

w e a l t h of Pennsylvania) a n d W i l l i a m P. W i l s o n (later D i r e c t o r of the C o m m e r c i a l M u s e u m ) were Professors of B o t a n y ; J o h n A . R y d e r was Professor of Histology a n d E m b r y o l o g y ; a n d E d w a r d D. C o p e was L e c t u r e r o n G e o l o g y a n d V e r t e b r a t e Paleontology. L e i d y , C o p e , a n d R y d e r were a c o m b i n a t i o n p r o b a b l y never e q u a l e d i n this country. The Department of Botany: O l d e r a l u m n i of the University, b o t h in biology a n d medicine, recall Professors R o t h r o c k a n d W i l s o n ; a far larger g r o u p k n o w D r . J o h n M u i r h e a d M a c F a r l a n e . A p p o i n t e d Professor of B o t a n y in 1893, he became head of the D e p a r t m e n t in 1910, w h e n b o t a n y a n d zoology separated. T h i s distinguished botanist, w h o , like the first Professor of B o t a n y , K u h n , was a g r a d u a t e of the University of E d i n b u r g h , was responsible for the establishm e n t of the B o t a n i c a l G a r d e n s , and t h r o u g h his association w i t h the B o t a n i c a l Society of P e n n s y l v a n i a , w h i c h was f o u n d e d in 1897 u n d e r the auspices of the D e p a r t m e n t , d i d m u c h to e x t e n d the recognition of the i m p o r t a n c e of botany, b o t h w i t h i n a n d w i t h o u t the University. A n effective teacher and administrator, he was also an a u t h o r i t y o n insectivorous plants a n d the a u t h o r of Evolution and Distribution of Flowering Plants, a w o r k representing fifty years of investigation. Associated w i t h Dr. M a c F a r l a n e for m a n y years were Dr. R o d n e y H . T r u e , whose w o r k in economic b o t a n y , carried o n for the U.S. D e p a r t m e n t of A g r i c u l t u r e , resulted in the establishment of m a n y n e w crops and the i m p r o v e m e n t of others; a n d Dr. J o h n W . H a r s h b e r g e r , a u t h o r of nearly three h u n d r e d scientific papers devoted m a i n l y to p l a n t d i s t r i b u t i o n and the factors d e t e r m i n i n g it. T h r o u g h o u t m u c h of the n i n e t e e n t h century, b o t a n y was r e g a r d e d to a considerable extent as a science that was i m p o r t a n t p r i m a r i l y because it p r o v i d e d drugs to the doctor, raw products to industry, a n d better a n d healthier p l a n t s to the farmer. If studied for its o w n sake, it was of interest to the dilettante, a n d study was directed mainly toward description a n d classification. T o d a y , w h i l e t a x o n o m y continues to be a part of the f u n d a m e n t a l e q u i p m e n t of the botanist, the anatomy, physiology, a n d p a t h o l o g y of plants are the objects of most of the investigative effort at the University. T h i s c h a n g e d point of view, however, has by no means divorced b o t a n y f r o m associated fields of k n o w l e d g e . If a n y t h i n g it has b r o u g h t b o t a n y closer to the other b i o l o g i c a l sciences, for it is now studied for the light it can shed o n the structure and f u n c t i o n s of cells a n d g r o u p s of cells, o n microorganisms, genetics, and the life process in general.

COLLEGE

35

The Department of Zoology: Like botany, zoology was long dominated by the medical point of view. Notwithstanding the great eminence of Dr. Leidy and his colleagues, as zoologists they were essentially self-made, nearly all of them were M.D.'s, and the zoological interests of two of the most prominent, Dr. Leidy and Dr. Cope, lay largely in paleontology. Indeed these two men are acknowledged as the fathers of American vertebrate paleontology. T h e first Professor of Zoology at the University who was professionally trained for the position was Dr. E. G. Conklin, who in 1896 succeeded Dr. Ryder as Professor of Histology and Embryology and after Dr. Cope's death in 1897 became Professor of Zoology. D u r i n g the period of his service, which ended in 1908, the requirements for the Ph.D. were strengthened, many new courses were added, and zoology came to be regarded as an independent, basic science. In 1910 Dr. T h o m a s H. Montgomery became head of the Department, and in 1911 the new laboratory made possible real progress in an extensive program of undergraduate and graduate study and research. T h i s program, which was planned by Dr. Montgomery, was not to be realized by him, for he died in 1912, but by his successor, Dr. C. E. McClung, a zoologist known as the discoverer, in 1901, of the sex chromosome. W i t h the new laboratory, the more advantageous curriculum, and the skillful management of the new chairman, the Department progressed steadily, until today the four hundred undergraduate students w h o use the Zoological Laboratory each year test its facilities, especially those parts devoted to the more advanced courses and research. A half-century of growth has produced other changes. T h e teaching staff has increased to more than twenty, conditions of work have improved, technical methods have become more exact and searching, courses have multiplied and have become more technical, and the emphasis has shifted from morphology and observation to physiology and experiment. T h e advanced courses now deal with the analysis of cell mechanisms and functions, such as general physiology, genetics, cytology, and protozoology; and experimentation plays an increasing part in all branches of comparative anatomy, embryology, bionomics, and even taxonomy.

36

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

LOGAN HALL, THE HARE AND THE WHARTON Logan

BUILDING SCHOOL

Hall

Just west of College H a l l and facing on Thirty-sixth Street is L o g a n Hall, the home of the W h a r t o n School sincc 1904, w h e n what is now an extremely large division of the University moved over from College H a l l w i t h 226 students. T h e building, until then k n o w n as Medical Hall, had just been vacated by the Medical School, for w h i c h it was constructed in 1874. It was renamed in h o n o r of James L o g a n , secretary to W i l l i a m Penn and one of the founders of the University. L i k e College Hall, it was designed by T h o m a s Richards and is built of serpentine stone. L o g a n H a l l now houses ten of the eleven teaching departments of the W h a r t o n School and, on the f o u r t h floor, the L i p p i n c o t t Library. O n the second floor is A l u m n i Hall, a large, handsomely furnished room used for faculty and committee meetings and for interviews between representatives of business organizations and seniors w h e n graduation is approaching. T h e offices of the D e a n and other administrators are o n the first floor, to the right a n d left of the m a i n entrance on Thirty-sixth Street. T h e s e include the offices of the W h a r ton E v e n i n g School of Accounts and Finance, of the Extension Courses, and of the G r a d u a t e Course in Business Administration. T h e exterior of L o g a n H a l l is virtually the same as in 1874, b u t the interior has been greatly changed, especially since the fire that burned out the north end on O c t o b e r 31, 1919. A n earlier fire in 1888 had done considerable damage, but resulted in no great alteration. A f t e r the fire of 1919 it was decided that a complete r e b u i l d i n g of the interior w o u l d be more economical than the erection of a new home for the W h a r t o n School on the vacant g r o u n d on the north side of W o o d l a n d A v e n u e w h i c h h a d l o n g been reserved for that purpose but is now used for parking faculty automobiles. A n d so the old medical amphitheatres, each seating three hundred, were r i p p e d out, concrete floors replaced what was left of the old w o o d e n ones, and a passageway that also provided additional office space permitted the W h a r t o n School to e x p a n d into the H a r e B u i l d i n g . The Hare

Building

T h e H a r e B u i l d i n g (once called the H a r e Laboratory) is also built of serpentine, and it is an easy guess that its designer was

WHARTON

SCHOOL

37

Thomas W. Richards. T h e building was opened in 1878, the year that the Dental School of the University was founded, and it provided the necessary additional space, part of the work in dentistry being carried on in Medical Hall and part in the Hare Laboratory. Because most of the building was used for chemistry, it was named for Robert Hare, the great Professor of Chemistry in the Medical School, who, interested in industrial chemistry as well as the chemistry of medicine, invented the oxyhydrogen blowtorch. At present all of the original departments in the H a r e Building have moved out. On the fourth floor is the organic chemistry laboratory of the Department of Chemistry in the T o w n e Scientific School. On the third floor is a laboratory for experimental psychology and some offices, mainly for Wharton School professors. T h e second floor contains the offices of the Department of Political Science and classrooms, used primarily by the Wharton School. T h e Department of Admissions, which serves the seven undergraduate divisions of the University, is also in the Hare Building. After having been moved from College Hall, where it began functioning in 1912, to the Fine Arts Building, to Blanchard Hall, it now seems permanently lodged in what was once the dental clinic. In addition to its principal duties, it also conducts a guide service which introduces visitors, especially prospective students, to the Campus and its various buildings. THE WHARTON

SCHOOL

Students and visitors waiting in R o o m 102, Logan Hall, to see the Dean of the Wharton School may gaze at the portrait of Joseph Wharton, who, on March 2 1 , 1881, submitted to the Trustees of the University his "Project for a School of Finance and Economy." Joseph Wharton was a successful businessman and accustomed to seeing his enterprises prosper, but it is probable that he would be astonished today by the subsequent growth of the institution he founded, the first collegiate school of business. T h e idea apparently was slow in taking hold. Starting with one full-time professor of political economy and a part-time instructor in accounting, the Wharton School in its early years was a small part of a small college. In 1881 the enrollment in the Department of Arts was 183, in the Wharton School 13; in 1884 the respective enrollments were 128 and 21. In 1893 the Wharton School had only seventy-one students, but the establishment of a full four-year course the following year raised the enrollment to 1 1 3 . It took ten years

38

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

more, however, to double that figure. T h e classical course was still dominant, and although many University of Pennsylvania "firsts" were quickly imitated elsewhere, it was not until 1898 that the Universities of Chicago and California set up the second and third business schools of collegiate rank to be established in the world. T h o u g h small, the faculty in those early years was distinguished. Robert Ellis Thompson, the first Professor of Political Economy, was an important figure in education. Even more so was Edmund J . James, who was chairman of the Wharton group in the College Council until 1896, when he left the University of Pennsylvania and shortly became president first of Northwestern University and then of the University of Illinois. Others were John Bach McMaster, later a noted member of the History Department, and Simon Patten, internationally known as a pioneer in consumption economics. By 1894 political science, economics, and sociology were being taught, and already a start had been made toward the development of technical courses in finance, accounting, transportation, insurance, and the rest of the subjects represented in the present instructional departments. Since most of the teaching in these courses was pioneer work, the necessary textbooks had to be provided, and it is not surprising that a predominant number of the standard publications in the various fields have been written by members of the Wharton School faculty. T h e remarkable numerical growth, both in faculty and enrollment, dates from 1912, when the Wharton School was separated from the College and was given its own Dean. T h e present enrollment, 2,100, which includes over 100 full-time students working for their M.B.A. in the two-year Graduate Course in Business Administration established in 1921 under Dean Emory R. Johnson, is lower than the peak of nearly 2,700 reached in 1926, partly because of the depression, but also because in 1926 the authorities determined that a better job could be done with a smaller group of students. T h e figures above, however, do not include nearly 4,000 in the Wharton Evening School, founded in 1904, and in the Extension Courses, founded in 1913. T h e latter division, it might be added, administers courses in Arts and Sciences and Education, as well as Wharton School courses, given to nearly a thousand additional students. Dr. Johnson, who became Dean in 1919, was confronted by a formidable task. On one hand the student body had increased almost twofold, and on the other the faculty had been greatly diminished, either through enlistment or by participation in government service. In his first year the number of teachers was increased by fifty per cent, and to make the work of the larger faculty more effective, the

WHARTON

SCHOOL

39

number of departments was increased and their chairmen were given added responsibility. A n d because the greater enrollment presented problems of guidance and counsel that could no longer be cared for by individual faculty members, an "Industrial Service Department" was created in 1920, renamed in 1926 the "Department of Student Personnel," to aid the undergraduates in scholastic and personal matters and to assist them in starting their life's work. W h e n Dr. Johnson retired as Dean in 1933, after forty years of service in the W h a r t o n School, the organization and curriculum were virtually what they are today. From the beginning of the academic year 1933-34 u n t ü February 1939, when he became Director of the Department of Social Sciences of the Rockefeller Foundation, Dr. Joseph H. Willits was Dean of the Wharton School. His marked ability enabled the W h a r t o n School to develop its educational work despite the adverse economic conditions of recent years. T h e maintenance and, indeed, the elevation of faculty standards has been due largely to the creation in 1933 of the Faculty Personnel Committee, which considers all appointments to the staff. Other important events during his administration were the establishment in 1937 of the Institute of Local Government and of the Howard Crawley Memorial Lectures, which are given to the W h a r t o n students by men of national and international prominence. The Lippincott

Library

T h e Lippincott Library, which was founded in 1927, is a reference library devoted to the social sciences, public affairs, and business. T h e only library of its kind in Philadelphia, it serves all of the departments of the Wharton School and many business and research organizations. Financed partly by a gift from Mrs. J. Bertram Lippincott, a daughter of Joseph Wharton, the library is in a large room occupying nearly a quarter of the fourth floor of L o g a n Hall. Here some 18,000 volumes and 58,000 pamphlets, and the 1,100 periodicals that the library receives are arranged and classified w i t h reference to the curriculum. A trained staff of nine is in charge. In the hall outside the well-lighted room are shelves holding b o u n d volumes of the last twelve years of the New York Times. As might be expected, the library is a busy place. It receives more than fifty thousand visits a year. D E P A R T M E N T S IN T H E W H A R T O N S C H O O L

Economics:

Economics, or political economy as it was formerly desig-

nated, is a relatively modern science, and the University of Penn-

40

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

sylvania was one of the first to give it formal recognition. T h e early development of the subject matter was, in the nature of the case, in connection with other subjects—philosophy, history, l a w — a n d its emergence as a separate course was gradual. In 1749 Benjamin Franklin urged the inclusion in the curriculum of the Academy of Philadelphia of information on the "History of Commerce, of the Invention of Arts, Rise of Manufactures, Progress of T r a d e , Change of its Seats, with the Reasons, Causes &c." It is not surprising, therefore, that the University of Pennsylvania was one of the first half-dozen institutions to recognize political economy as a distinct field of instruction. Although origins are somewhat obscure, it is clear that the first formal instruction in the subject at the University was given as early as 1855, by Dr. Henry Vethake, Professor of Mental and Moral Philosophy. T h e present Department of Economics, however, traces its origin to Robert Ellis Thompson, later President of the Philadelphia Central High School, who is credited with giving the first formal instruction in "social science" in the United States. In a world given to specialization, it may seem odd that Dr. T h o m p s o n , who was a Presbyterian minister, was instructor in mathematics in the College, and that his lectures in social science were a part of the English requirement of the senior year. T h a t was in 1869-70, and in 1874 Dr. Thompson was appointed to the newly created Professorship of Social Science, but his course, which embraced all of the social sciences, continued to be a senior requirement in English until 1878, when it was given independent status. Interested like T h o m p s o n in the entire field of group activity and human welfare was Simon Nelson Patten, w h o was appointed Professor of Economics in 1888, the first to hold that title in the University and one of the best known of American economists. His complete mastery of the entire range of social science made him one of the most stimulating of teachers, and his provocative writings anticipated in a remarkable manner much that is now accepted by economists and by scholars in other fields. Especially noteworthy were his emphasis on dynamic economics and his insistence that improvements in consumption as well as in production may contribute to progress. In its earlier days, the Department of Economics included all instruction in the broad field covered by its title, but its connection with the Wharton School has very naturally led to the splitting off of many topics of instruction, such as finance, insurance, industry,

WHARTON

SCHOOL

41

and marketing, which are now taught by departments with these special names, leaving to the original Department courses chiefly devoted to what may be called economic theory. In these courses, however, economic theory is tempered by a close and objective observation of the data of the economic system. T h i s approach can be found in the widely used textbooks and other works published by members of the Department and in their research activities. T h e latter have resulted in the publication of a variety of important studies for such organizations as the National Bureau of Economic Research, the National Industrial Conference Board, and the United States Department of Commerce. In recent years two members have participated in the Consumer Installment Financing Project, under the Financial Research Program of the National Bureau of Economic Research, one of them serving as director of the program, which is supported by grants from the Association of Reserve City Bankers and the Rockefeller Foundation. Others have served various agencies of the Federal and Commonwealth governments as experts. One member is now Deputy Secretary of the Department of Public Assistance of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, and since 1930 another has been President of the American Academy of Political and Social Science. The American Academy of Political and Social Science: Closely related to the University and especially to its work in economics, sociology, and political science, is the American Academy of Political and Social Science, which, after having had such varied habitations as Logan Hall, the Zoology building, and the Veterinary building, is now located at 3457 W a l n u t Street. T h e Academy is widely known, having a membership of about nine thousand. It publishes a bi-monthly journal, the Annals, and a series of monographs and a series of pamphlets; it holds, also, many meetings for the discussion of public questions. A l t h o u g h the Academy is separately incorporated, it is everywhere identified with the University, and throughout its fifty years of life each of its presidents and most of its other officers have been members of the Wharton School faculty. Finance: From 1881 until 1902 the W h a r t o n School was known as the W h a r t o n School of Finance and Economy. In the latter year, possibly because a redundancy was detected in the earlier name, it was changed to the W h a r t o n School of Finance and Commerce. T h a t there was a redundancy neither the Department of Economics nor

42

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

the D e p a r t m e n t of F i n a n c e w o u l d d e n y ; in fact b o t h w o u l d insist that finance is a m a j o r division of economics. T h e teaching of the F i n a n c e D e p a r t m e n t is c o n c e r n e d not o n l y w i t h the technicalities of c o r p o r a t i o n finance, b a n k i n g , real estate, a n d the m a n a g e m e n t of trust f u n d s , but w i t h business cycles, the forces u n d e r l y i n g the rise of m o d e r n A m e r i c a n industry, g o l d a n d other m o n e t a r y problems, and the i m p o r t a n c e of credit in the w o r l d of commerce. A course e n t i t l e d " I n v e s t m e n t s " m i g h t be s u p p o s e d to deal w i t h technical m a r k e t c o n d i t i o n s a f f e c t i n g c u r r e n t prices of securities, but instead it is d e v o t e d m a i n l y to the u n d e r l y i n g forces w h i c h influence corporate income, n a t i o n a l i n c o m e , a n d b u d g e t a r y stability. T h e p u b l i c a t i o n s of m e m b e r s of the D e p a r t m e n t also show a n interest in b o t h the f u n d a m e n t a l s of e c o n o m i c s a n d the technical aspects of finance. O n one h a n d there are such works as Interpretation of Accounts, Financing and Production and Distribution of Cotton, Railroad Consolidation, Banking Theory and Practice, Real Estate, Trust Finance, The Careful Investor, a n d Cost of Obtaining Money to Public Utilities in the United States. O n the other h a n d there are The Economics of Money, Credit, and Banking; England Today; The Meaning of Money; a n d the Story of Gold. These, w h i c h are b u t a few items f r o m the e x t e n s i v e b i b l i o g r a p h y of the D e p a r t m e n t , represent standard t e x t b o o k s used at the U n i v e r s i t y a n d in m a n y other institutions, solid pieces of research, a n d in some cases books of interest to the g e n e r a l p u b l i c . In recent years m e m b e r s of the D e p a r t m e n t have also served the p u b l i c as Secretary of B a n k i n g of the C o m m o n w e a l t h of P e n n s y l v a n i a , as T r e a s u r e r of the C i t y of P h i l a d e l p h i a , a n d as D e p u t y T r e a s u r e r . W i t h " F i n a n c e " so p r o m i n e n t in the n a m e of the W h a r t o n School, it is to be e x p e c t e d that the s u b j e c t w o u l d be t a u g h t f r o m the beg i n n i n g . N o course w i t h that specific title was g i v e n i m m e d i a t e l y u p o n the f o u n d i n g of the School, b u t topics that w e r e clearly the f o r e r u n n e r s of the present courses in finance w e r e p r o m i n e n t in the courses offered by R o b e r t Ellis T h o m p s o n , the o n l y professor o n the W h a r t o n School faculty f r o m 1881 to 1883. I n d e e d , e x c e p t f o r a c c o u n t i n g a n d business law, D r . T h o m p s o n ' s all-inclusive lectures c o n t a i n e d at least the g e r m of v i r t u a l l y e v e r y t h i n g n o w t a u g h t in the W h a r t o n School. T o d a y the D e p a r t m e n t offers in the W h a r t o n School f o u r t e e n courses o n the various aspects of finance besides a great n u m b e r i n o t h e r divisions of the University, a n d instead of u t i l i z i n g o n l y p a r t of the services of one professor, it has a staff of seventeen.

WHARTON

SCHOOL

43

Insurance: Insurance is one of the fundamental divisions of economics. T h a t it has a vital bearing on business, the management of individual estates, and social welfare has been recognized at the University at least since 1904, when S. S. Huebner was appointed Instructor in Insurance and Commerce in the Wharton School, the first such post in any college or university. In that year approximately $12,500,000,000 worth of life insurance was in force; in 193g the figure was in the neighborhood of $100,000,000,000. In this phenomenal increase the Wharton School's Department of Insurance has played a part. T o d a y there is hardly a sizable city in the United States where one or more underwriters cannot be found who have received their instruction in insurance at the University of Pennsylvania, and many of these hold the post of president, vice-president, or actuary in some of the most important insurance companies of this country. Moreover, the Department was primarily responsible for the establishment of the American College of L i f e Underwriters, of which two members of the Department have been President and Dean for many years; and former members are in charge of the instruction in insurance at four important American universities. L i f e insurance, however, is but part of the work of the Department, which is concerned with the whole subject of risk and risk bearing. Naturally property insurance (fire, title, and marine) has been important from the beginning, and since 1 9 1 3 , when the present Department was established, the first department of its kind apparently in the world, courses dealing with compensation insurance, casualty insurance, transportation insurance, actuarial science, loss prevention activities, fidelity and surety bonding, as well as courses on such special aspects of life insurance as life insurance salesmanship and a course in preparation for the chartered life underwriter examinations have been added. These, along with courses on security and commodity markets and brokerage, which are also a part of the work of the Department, are now given by a staff of thirteen full-time teachers to nearly 1,600 students each year in five divisions of the University, including the Graduate Course in Business Administration and the Graduate School. Both here and abroad the Department is recognized as a pioneer in insurance education, and it continues to be generally regarded as a leader, for it is widely known, not only through the many students it has trained but through its publications, its activities in connection with scientific societies, and its services to the public through agencies of the federal, state, and municipal government.

44

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Its teaching staff has prepared eight outstanding textbooks, nearly all of which were pioneer works and are widely used throughout the world. In addition to numerous articles prepared for scientific journals, twenty-two volumes have been written by the staff and sixteen other volumes have been prepared editorially. Only a slight indication of the public and semi-public services of members of the Department can be given. A list of such activities would include services as experts and consultants to various congressional committees, the United States Shipping Board, the Federal Social Security Board, and many other agencies of the federal or state government. T h e list would also include services as members or chairmen of nationally recognized committees concerned with insurance and insurance education, social security, and labor legislation. Commerce, Transportation, and Public Utilities: T h e Commerce, Transportation, and Public Utilities Department began its educational work without precedents to follow or literature to use. T h e courses that have developed reflect in part the intellectual interests of the men who have been connected with the Department and in part the evolution of trade, transportation, and public utility services, their agencies and facilities. T h e teaching of transportation in the Wharton School was begun by Emory R. Johnson in 1894 with a course scheduled for one hour a week. But sixteen students were enrolled. A specialized course in railway and corporation finance was also given by Joseph French Johnson, and a course in the geography and history of commerce had previously been introduced and was being taught by Roland P. Falkner. Out of these early beginnings the Department of today gradually developed, largely under the guidance of Dr. Johnson. In 1912, when the Wharton School became autonomous, the various courses then being offered were listed as a separate group, and the teaching staff, headed by Dr. Johnson, became known as the Commerce and Transportation Department. In 1935 its name was changed to Commerce, Transportation, and Public Utilities Department. At present the eight members of the Department give twenty-six courses in the Wharton School and other undergraduate schools, the Wharton Evening School, the Graduate Course in Business Administration, and the Graduate School. Members of the Department have written many textbooks which have contributed much to the effectiveness of their courses and to

WHARTON

SCHOOL

45

the introduction of business education in other colleges and universities. They have also written books for the use of readers other than college students, and numerous reports for departments and agencies of the United States government. Some of the publications were the first in their particular fields. T h e list includes the first treatise on water transportation in the United States, the first comprehensive treatment of railroad freight and passenger traffic, the first textbook on the marketing of farm products, the first comprehensive history of American commerce, and the first books to treat ocean traffic management, motor traffic management, and coordinated motorrail-steamship transportation. Experts in a highly technical field, members of the Department have held many positions with governmental agencies. Dr. Johnson was a member of the Isthmian Canal Commission from 1899 to 1902, in 1 9 1 1 he was requested to recommend tolls and vessel-measurement rules for the Panama Canal, and in 1936 he served as chairman of a special board to recommend revision of Panama tolls and measurement rules. H e served as an expert for many other agencies of the Federal government and has been a member of the Public Service Commission of Pennsylvania. Other members of the Department have performed special services for such agencies as the Isthmian Canal Commission, the W a r T r a d e Board, the Federal T r a d e Commission, the Tariff Commission, the Maritime Commission, the Federal Communications Commission, the Interstate Commerce Commission, the Federal Coordinator of Railroads, and the Foreign T r a d e Zones Board. Geography and Industry: T h e departments of the Wharton School can be divided roughly into two groups: those devoted to the social sciences, and those devoted to technical business subjects. T h e Department of Geography and Industry, which came into existence in 1912, stands midway between the two, as is evidenced by such courses as Economic Geography (required of all freshmen), Geographical Environment, and Economic and Political Geography of Europe. Obviously the Department has wider interests than the mere amount and availability of natural resources, and this viewpoint can be traced to the first course in geography given in the Wharton School (in 1893), in what was then known as the Economics and Social Science Group. T h e courses in industry are more technical, particularly those which deal with industrial management and manufacturing, subjects which include much of what is known as industrial engineering; but a strong sociological bent is to be found in

46

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

such a course as the one entitled " I n d u s t r i a l R e l a t i o n s and Personnel A d m i n i s t r a t i o n , " in w h i c h an analysis is made of workers' attitudes, the rise of l a b o r unions, strikes, labor turnover, absenteeism, and the restriction of output. T h a t the teaching of the D e p a r t m e n t , w h i c h now has a staff of twenty-four, is not merely theoretical a n d academic is the result of the long-standing policy of taking a d v a n t a g e of the highly industrialized area near at hand. P h i l a d e l p h i a p r o p e r offers an array of industrial establishments i n c l u d i n g such industries as r a d i o and electrical appliances, textiles, clothing, sugar refining, p u b l i s h i n g , p a p e r , petroleum refining, s h i p b u i l d i n g , a n d iron a n d steel. B o r d e r i n g P h i l a d e l p h i a are others: c a n n i n g a n d glass m a n u f a c t u r e in the southeast, silk a n d ceramics in the northeast, steel a n d cement in the northwest. T h e D e p a r t m e n t benefits f r o m these resources in two ways. Students are taken t h r o u g h the plants, w h i c h serve as laboratories f o r the study of m a n u f a c t u r i n g processes, o p e r a t i n g procedures, a n d m a n a g e m e n t methods. T h e s e visits are an integral part of the course in m a n u f a c t u r i n g industries a n d comprise entirely the course k n o w n as F i e l d W o r k in Industry. T h e D e p a r t m e n t also takes advantage of the industrial area by inviting to the classroom p r o m i n e n t business executives. Students engage in g r o u p discussion w i t h these men a n d are i n d i v i d u a l l y r e q u i r e d to submit written solutions to actual current business problems. F i e l d work in g e o g r a p h y courses consists of s u m m e r tours conducted to foreign countries by members of the D e p a r t m e n t . Students are thus e n a b l e d to obtain course credits by the ideal c o m b i n a t i o n of study a n d travel u n d e r professional g u i d ance. T h a t the w o r k of the D e p a r t m e n t is considered i m p o r t a n t by the undergraduates is shown by the fact that each year some 1 , 3 0 0 students enroll in the elective courses alone. V a r i o u s members of the staff are f r e q u e n t l y engaged by industrial organizations as consultants in such technical matters as budgeting, p l a n t layout, a n d analysis of wage-payment plans. As a result of the upsurge of the l a b o r movement, both l a b o r unions and business m e n h a v e repeatedly called u p o n members of the D e p a r t m e n t to arbitrate disputes arising in e m p l o y m e n t relations. T h i s has occurred in the confectionery, carpet, textile, a n d s h i p b u i l d i n g industries. A n d as is so f r e q u e n t l y the case w i t h the W h a r t o n School faculty, v a r i o u s members of the D e p a r t m e n t have held i m p o r t a n t g o v e r n m e n t a l posts. Besides serving in the cabinets of governors of P e n n s y l v a n i a of both parties, they h a v e been associated at various times w i t h the

WHARTON

SCHOOL

47

United States S h i p p i n g Board, the N R A , a n d the A u t o m o b i l e L a b o r Board. Marketing: A c c o r d i n g to available records, the University of Pennsylvania offered the first course in marketing in the U n i t e d States. T h i s was in 1904, w h e n " M a r k e t i n g of Products" was the name of a course given by \V. E. Kreusi to some twenty-five students. T h e course, listed as Economics 102 in those early days w h e n Economics embraced virtually everything in the W h a r t o n School, was thus described in the catalog: T h e methods now practiced in the organization and conduct of the selling branch of industrial and merchandising business. T h e principal subjects in the field are publicity, agency, advertising, forms and correspondence, credit and collections, and terms of sale.

M r . Kreusi emphasized advertising and selling, and this emphasis was continued under later instructors. In 1910 the name was changed to Advertising. W i t h the increase in enrollment in the W h a r t o n School and the greater attention being p a i d to advertising, new courses were added from time to time until, in 1921, a D e p a r t m e n t of Merchandising, composed of six members, was established. In the meantime a n u m b e r of courses in marketing h a d developed in the Department of Commerce and T r a n s p o r t a t i o n , w h i c h since the nineties h a d p a i d attention to the historical and geographical aspects of the distribution of goods. N o clear line divided the w o r k of the t w o departments, b u t in general the merchandising courses tended to stress advertising a n d sales management; the commerce courses, the description a n d analysis of marketing as a n economic institution. Finally, in 1936, the two related groups of courses were merged in a new Department of Marketing. Evidently the combination appeals to the W h a r t o n undergraduates, for more than 125 members of the graduating class of 1939 wrote their senior theses i n marketing. T h e location of the W h a r t o n School in o n e of the most important commercial centers of the U n i t e d States contributes materially to the w o r k of the Department. T h e students make f r e q u e n t visits to i m p o r t a n t industrial plants, department stores, a n d advertising agencies; and, in turn, experts in m a r k e t i n g a n d merchandising technique f r o m these organizations act as visiting lecturers a n d also provide data a n d material used by the students in solving problems in marketing.

48

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

A s has been indicated, the courses fall i n t o two groups: those r e l a t i n g to advertising a n d selling a n d those r e l a t i n g to the analysis of the conditions affecting the successful d i s t r i b u t i o n of m a n u f a c tured goods, w i t h o u t w h i c h no intelligent sales effort is possible. T h e w o r k , therefore, is p r i m a r i l y technical, b u t like o t h e r departments of the W h a r t o n School w h i c h trace their origin to the early courses in social science, the D e p a r t m e n t of M a r k e t i n g recognizes the i m p o r t a n c e of the b r o a d e r social a n d e c o n o m i c aspects of the d i s t r i b u t i o n of goods, such as the ethics of advertising, fair prices, m o n o p o l i s t i c practices, a n d the flattening of the peaks a n d valleys of p r o d u c t i o n . T h i s point of view is to be f o u n d not o n l y in the t e a c h i n g a n d p u b l i c a t i o n s of members of the D e p a r t m e n t b u t also in their activities in c o o p e r a t i o n w i t h the m a j o r f o u n d a t i o n s of the country, trade and professional organizations, g o v e r n m e n t agencies, a n d other e d u c a t i o n a l institutions, and as consultants for i n d i v i d u a l business enterprises. Economic and Social Statistics: A l t h o u g h instruction in statistical methods has been offered in the W h a r t o n School since 1888, a dep a r t m e n t of statistics was not organized u n t i l 1930. D u r i n g the early period, the courses in statistics were taught by various m e m b e r s of the faculty of the W h a r t o n School a n d were listed f r o m time to t i m e in the c u r r i c u l a of different departments, b u t most f r e q u e n t l y in the D e p a r t m e n t of Economics. Since its f o r m a t i o n , the D e p a r t m e n t of E c o n o m i c a n d Social Statistics has consistently m a i n t a i n e d the p o i n t of view that statistical methods are an essential tool of research. A l l of the courses stress the practical uses of statistics in the solution of social a n d e c o n o m i c problems, w i t h very limited emphasis o n the b o d y of m a t h e m a t i c a l disciplines w h i c h u n d e r l i e many of the methods. T h e p r i n c i p a l g o a l has been to train the students to analyze a n d interpret n u m e r i c a l data correctly. I m p o r t a n t in the w o r k of the D e p a r t m e n t is the statistical laboratory m a i n t a i n e d in R o o m 4 1 1 , L o g a n H a l l , w h i c h is e q u i p p e d w i t h a variety of c a l c u l a t i n g machines. A l t h o u g h i n t e n d e d primarily f o r students registered in the various courses in statistics, this laboratory has come to be an i m p o r t a n t w o r k r o o m for u n d e r g r a d u a t e s , graduates, a n d members of the faculty t h r o u g h o u t the entire W h a r t o n School. A statistical study a p p l i e d by the D e p a r t m e n t to its o w n services d u r i n g the year 1938-39, indicated that f r o m fifty to seventyfive students use the r o o m daily, of w h o m a b o u t one-third are n o t registered in any of its o w n courses. A l a b o r a t o r y assistant is i n

WHARTON

SCHOOL

49

charge of the room at all times and is prepared to give instruction in the use of the machines and render general assistance to the student. Enrollment in the various statistics courses shows considerable variation from year to year, but recently there have been about 150 undergraduates and 100 graduate students enrolled each year. T h e trend is upward, and with the growing interest in research the expansion of the Department may be expected to continue. T h e Department of Statistics since its formation has cooperated regularly with other departments of the University, with research agencies, and the Federal government. A member of the Department w h o has been on leave of absence for a number of years is serving as chairman of the Central Statistical Board, the agency which coordinates the statistical work of the Federal government. Another is affiliated with the National Bureau of Economic Research, for which organization he has supervised extensive research programs dealing with the study of business cycles, national income, capital formation, seasonal variations in industry and trade, etc. Another has conducted a retail trade study for the United States Bureau of the Census and has served as statistical coordinator for the Pennsylvania State Department of L a b o r and Industry. Another has carried on various research activities, especially in cooperation with the University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine and also with the Pennsylvania State Department of Labor and Industry. Other members have served the United States Bureau of the Census and the Pennsylvania State Department of Labor and Industry. Sociology: Like the Department of Economics, the Department of Sociology traces its descent from Robert Ellis Thompson. A n d it likewise claims at least spiritual descent from Simon Patten, who, although officially Professor of Economics, was frequently referred to as a sociologist. In 1891 Frederick W . Moore was appointed Instructor in Sociology and gave a course o n the Elements of Sociology, the first in the University to bear that name. He was followed in 1893 by Samuel McC u n e Lindsay, one of Patten's first students. Dr. Lindsay's work, w h i c h began in 1894 and followed that of Moore after a gap of two years, marks the beginning of the continuous history of the Department of Sociology. Sociology, however, did not become a fullfledged department until 1907, when Dr. Carl Kelsey became chairman. T o d a y a staff of fourteen has taken the place of the one instructor appointed in 1891, and courses are given to more than

50

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

1,600 students enrolled in all of the u n d e r g r a d u a t e divisions of the University a n d in the G r a d u a t e School. T h r e e factors have been d o m i n a n t in d e t e r m i n i n g the activities a n d the point of view of the D e p a r t m e n t . T h e first of these is the fact that sociology has always been a part of the w o r k of the W h a r t o n School, a n d the D e p a r t m e n t therefore has been able to affect the training of f u t u r e business executives, both t h r o u g h its o w n courses a n d through its influence o n the content of o t h e r courses. Second is the fact that t h r o u g h o u t its history the D e p a r t m e n t has enjoyed consistently f r i e n d l y relations w i t h the a l l i e d social sciences a n d with the D e p a r t m e n t s of Psychology a n d H i s t o r y . T h i r d is the fact that the D e p a r t m e n t has never a d o p t e d a n y single conceptual framework in w h i c h all social data are arranged. O p p o s e d to speculative or " a r m - c h a i r " sociology, the D e p a r t m e n t prefers an eclectic approach to the scientific study of g r o u p structures a n d relationships. T h i s point of view can be readily observed in the teaching of the Department, in recent standard works o n social change, divorce, a n d America's racial problems, w h i c h b e a r the names of members of the staff, and in its service to the p u b l i c . I n recent years members of the D e p a r t m e n t have served variously as c h a i r m a n of the C e n t r a l Statistical B o a r d , W a s h i n g t o n , o n the Social Science R e s e a r c h C o u n cil, N e w Y o r k , as director of a study of the social consequences of p u b l i c housing projects, a n d in m a n y s i m i l a r activities. The William T. Carter Foundation of Child Helping: T h e C a r t e r F o u n d a t i o n , w h i c h has headquarters at 3440 W a l n u t Street, was established at the University i n 1924, h a v i n g been endowed by Mrs. W i l l i a m T . C a r t e r in m e m o r y of her h u s b a n d . A l t h o u g h not a part of the D e p a r t m e n t of Sociology, it is closely associated w i t h that D e p a r t m e n t because of the nature of its w o r k . F o r m a n y years D r . J a m e s H . S. Bossard, w h o became D i r e c t o r of the F o u n d a t i o n in 1938, had been p r i m a r i l y concerned w i t h the social problems of childhood. U n d e r his direction, the resources of the F o u n d a t i o n are being devoted to research in this field. The Pennsylvania School of Social Work: N o courses in the training of social workers are offered by the D e p a r t m e n t of Sociology. Such training is given by the P e n n s y l v a n i a School of Social W o r k , a graduate professional school located at 3 1 1 S o u t h J u n i p e r Street that has been affiliated w i t h the U n i v e r s i t y of P e n n s y l v a n i a since 1 9 3 5 . A l t h o u g h the School is an i n d e p e n d e n t corporation, its students, a f t e r completing a two-year course, are g r a n t e d the degree of Master of Social W o r k by the University.

WHARTON

SCHOOL

51

Political Science: Government has become a partner in every human enterprise, and with every extension of government activity the work of a department of political science grows in importance. T h e modern university's inescapable role is to discover by patient research the principles that underlie wise political action, to publish the results of these inquiries, and to teach them in its classrooms. For more than a hundred years of the University's history such topics as Natural and Political Law, Political Philosophy (based on the American Constitution), and International Law were included in those composite courses usually given the label "English" in the catalogue. It was not until 1888 that work in political science was organized on a more formal basis. In the meantime Joseph Wharton had given his views on the subject of political science and had implemented them with a handsome endowment. W h e n in 1881 he set forth in printed form his Project for a School of Finance and Economy to form a new Department of the University, he emphatically stated his desire that the new school should train young men for public as well as private life. T h i s was not to be merely for the advantage of the student, but to make him a more useful member of society. Fortunate in its personnel from the earliest days of the Wharton School, the Department had as its first chairman Dr. Edmund J. James, who was also the organizer and chief executive of the School. John Bach McMaster, the historian, and the widely known Robert Ellis T h o m p s o n likewise took part in the Department's early work. Dr. John Quincy A d a m s succeeded Dr. James, and after him Dr. L e o S. R o w e served as chairman before becoming chief of the LatinAmerican Division of the United States Department of State and later Director-General of the Pan-American Union. Dr. Rowe's successors have been Dr. James T . Young, Director of the W h a r t o n School from 1904 until 1912, when the office of Dean was reestablished; and the late Clyde T . King, former Secretary of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Secretary of Revenue, and Chairman of the Public Service Commission. Besides those named, the staff, past and present, has also included members of the Foreign Service, a justice of the Supreme Court of Pennsylvania, a budget secretary of the Commonwealth, and an attorney-general, not to mention holders of important municipal posts. In the educational and scientific field there are several trustees of universities, the heads and important members of political science departments in other institutions, and the directors of research

52

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

bureaus. A m e m b e r of the present staff is the H o n . R o l a n d S. Morris, distinguished as a diplomat and as a leader in civic life. Currently the outside activities are broad a n d diverse. T h e s e include many assignments in federal, state, and local administration, consultation services for state legislative committees a n d industrial groups, civic organizations such as the Pennsylvania Economy L e a g u e and the C i t y Charter Committee. Members of the D e p a r t m e n t have also added greatly to the literature of political science. In research a n d writing they have covered such broad fields as city government, rural government; state, federal, and comparative government; public finance, international law and relations, citizenship, Latin-American affairs, a n d public administration. O n c e a subject receiving part of the attention of a single professor, political science at the University is now taught by a staff of nineteen, whose offices alone occupy most of the space on the second floor of the H a r e Building. Eleven u n d e r g r a d u a t e a n d seventeen graduate courses are given to more than a thousand students registered in the W h a r t o n School, the W h a r t o n E v e n i n g School and Extension Classes, the Graduate Course in Business Administration, the College, the College for W o m e n , a n d the G r a d u a t e School. Beg i n n i n g w i t h introductory work in A m e r i c a n government a n d constitutional law, these courses run through all fields of present public interest, i n c l u d i n g local government (city a n d rural), state, federal, a n d comparative government, political theory, public administration, Latin-American relations, international affairs, taxation, a n d public finance. So extensive are these activities that it m i g h t seem as if a school of public affairs were in existence in the University. Such is not the case, but the Department has visions of realizing to a degree not heretofore possible the aims of training citizens, public servants, leaders in public life, f u t u r e lawmakers, and prospective members of the bench and bar. E q u i p p e d with research facilities in all the fields that touch on government activities and staffed by a personnel possessing both broad experience and specialized knowledge, it hopes to train not only citizens whose usefulness lies somewhat in the f u t u r e but men in all walks of life, i n c l u d i n g those already engaged in public service. The Institute of Local and State Government: A significant start toward a school of public affairs has already been made at the University. In 1937, through the generosity of M r . Samuel Fels, an Institute of L o c a l and State G o v e r n m e n t was established to further

WHARTON

SCHOOL

53

the training of men for service to Pennsylvania communities and the State. T h e Institute's courses are given in cooperation with the Department of Political Science. Under the auspices of the Institute, which has offices in Blanchard Hall, eight graduate apprentices are now pursuing advanced work, which includes employment in branches of Pennsylvania local government. T h e Institute also carries on an active program of research. Accounting: T h e original deed of trust of the Wharton School stipulated that the instruction should inculcate "the necessity of system and accuracy in accounts, of thoroughness in whatever is undertaken, and of strict fidelity in trusts." It stated further that there was to be . . . one Professor or Instructor of Accounting or Bookkeeping, to teach the simplest and most practical forms of bookkeeping for housekeepers, for private individuals, for commercial and banking firms, for manufacturing establishments, and for banks; also, the modes of keeping accounts by executors, trustees, and assignees, by the officials of towns and cities, as well as by the several departments of a State or National Government; also the routine of business between a bank and a customer. But the work of the lone instructor w h o was appointed was far from what is indicated by such modern accounting expressions as accounting principles, budgeting, cost accounting, auditing, analysis and interpretation, consolidated statements, accounting systems, governmental accounting, income tax accounting, C.P.A. problems, and fiduciary accounting, all of which represent aspects of accounting included in the courses now offered in the W h a r t o n School. Progress in developing sound accounting courses was slow in the early years of the School. T h e r e were few students in the Wharton School itself, there was a decided lack of personnel trained to teach accounting, and the relative simplicity of business gave no compelling reason for future business men to study the subject. A t first it was taught by a part-time instructor from a downtown business office, and it is a legend of that early period that a faculty member always accompanied him to class, to maintain order. It was not until 1904 that a member of the teaching staff became sufficiently interested in accounting to make it his life's work. In that year Edward P. Moxey, Jr., who had just graduated from the College, was made an assistant in accounting, later becoming the first Professor of Accounting and the first chairman of the Department. Dr. Moxey served as its administrator for eighteen years and built a smoothly functioning organization which now offers twentyseven courses in eight divisions of the University.

54

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

A l l freshmen in the W h a r t o n School are r e q u i r e d to take an introductory course designed to benefit any student of business, a n d each year more than three h u n d r e d students usually elect the second-year course in order to o b t a i n the excellent cross-section of business w h i c h a sound k n o w l e d g e of a c c o u n t i n g provides. In a d d i t i o n some sixty or seventy a year elect h i g h l y technical a d v a n c e d courses w h i c h provide a t r a i n i n g for professional practice as certified p u b l i c accountants a n d for careers in private enterprise or w i t h governmental agencies. A c c o u n t i n g is also of great i m p o r t a n c e in the W h a r ton E v e n i n g School a n d the E x t e n s i o n Courses. W i t h this increase in the e x t e n t of its t e a c h i n g the D e p a r t m e n t has g r o w n in n u m b e r s u n t i l it n o w has a staff of twenty-five. T w e l v e of these m e n give f u l l time to their University w o r k ; the o t h e r thirteen, w i t h two exceptions, are practising a c c o u n t a n t s a n d controllers w h o are associated mostly w i t h the i n s t r u c t i o n in e v e n i n g classes. B u t the influence of the staff spreads b e y o n d the confines of the classroom. T h e books by d e p a r t m e n t members, m a n y of t h e m pioneer texts prepared w h e n little a c c o u n t i n g l i t e r a t u r e existed, h a v e been used w i d e l y . I n a d d i t i o n the D e p a r t m e n t is represented in the various n a t i o n a l a n d local professional a n d a c a d e m i c a c c o u n t i n g societies, a n d members h a v e served as officers a n d consultants to gove r n m e n t a l departments, as well as to business organizations. Business Law: In 1790, w h e n the T r u s t e e s of the C o l l e g e of Philad e l p h i a authorized James W i l s o n ' s lectures o n law, they stated that " T h e o b v i o u s Design of such a P l a n is to f u r n i s h a r a t i o n a l a n d useful E n t e r t a i n m e n t to g e n t l e m e n of all professions, b u t particularly to assist in f o r m i n g the Legislator, the M a g i s t r a t e a n d the L a w y e r . " T h r o u g h o u t m u c h of the n i n e t e e n t h c e n t u r y the Departm e n t of English offered q u a i n t courses such as the o n e described thus in the catalogue of 1829: " E v i d e n c e s of N a t u r a l a n d R e v e a l e d R e ligion. Metaphysics. N a t u r a l a n d Political L a w . E n g l i s h C o m p o s i tion. Forensic Discussions." It was the purpose of such instruction not to train prospective lawyers b u t to give the citizen a c o n c e p t i o n of his relation to society a n d the state, a n d to dispel the f o g w h i c h to the l a y m a n seems to encompass law a n d legal processes. W h e n the W h a r t o n School was established in 1881, it was n a t u r a l to include a course in law in its c u r r i c u l u m w i t h the same purposes in m i n d . In 1889 "Business L a w a n d Practice" becomes the title, not only for the course in law, but for a series of courses in accounting, panics, corporations, stock a n d p r o d u c e exchanges, prices, rail-

WHARTON

SCHOOL

55

way finance, and the like. W h e n the W h a r t o n School was separated from the College in 1912, Business Law was organized on a departmental basis and has remained one of the principal departments of instruction since that time, now giving courses in all of the divisions of the W h a r t o n School and also in the College, in one of the Engineering Schools, the College for Women, the School of Education, and the Graduate School. T h e paramount aim of these courses is to inculcate habits of orderly and discriminating thought, and thus to contribute to the general cultural training of the student. A t the same time the teaching of business law in the W h a r t o n School must be closely related to the particular needs of students in a school of finance and commerce. These needs are reflected in the numerous publications of members of the Department—standard works which bear such names as Pennsylvania Business Law, American Business Law, American Corporations, American Courts, Selected Cases on Agency„ Selected Cases on Contracts, Legal Solutions of Business Problemsr Cases on the Law of Business Associations, and Cases and Materials on Business Associations. Many research publications by members of the Department have also appeared both in book form and as contributions to periodical legal literature, a number of them undertaken for governmental agencies. Industrial Research: T h e headquarters of the Department of Industrial Research are in a remodeled building at 3440 W a l n u t Street. T h e Department was established in 1921 as a research organization which w o u l d have the benefits of a university background and of industrial experience with which to study the local labor market. A group of representative firms interested in unbiased research stood ready to provide data for analysis, and the Carnegie Corporation and the University were willing to help provide salaries for the staff and the complex tabulating and computing equipment which was needed. Contributions from the Rockefeller and Rosenwald Foundations and interested individuals made the later work possible. T h e staff of the Department now numbers eighteen full-time members. Its record of achievement can be measured by its bookshelf of thirty-one volumes, published by the University Press, and its list of informal reports and releases; by the length and extent of its contacts and work in certain industries; by its cooperation w i t h government agencies and industrial, trade, and labor organi-

56

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

zations; and by its training of students and assistants, many of whom now hold important posts in government bureaus. Various phases of employee earnings, industrial relations, production, equipment, labor market problems, and commodity prices are represented in the investigations, which have analyzed data f r o m bituminous coalmines, retail stores, iron and steel foundries, employment office files, from individuals in many walks of life, a n d f r o m mills in every branch of the textile industry. Originally the Department approached outside groups for the purpose of securing data for analysis—analysis which, the staff believed, would clarify some problem in economic relationships as well as aid the organizations supplying the information. A s the work of the Department became known, there was more opportunity to select sources of data. Always the u n d e r l y i n g principle adhered to was that the studies should be defined in areas in which the materials of research could be added to or improved either by the research staff or by cooperative work w i t h other research agencies. In addition to the studies originating in the Department, there have been requests f r o m community, government, and industrial groups for inquiries into special situations, f o r staff members to act as arbitrators in particular cases or in whole industries, for others to serve as consultants and advisers to community and governmental agencies.

THE ENGINEERING BUILDING AND Τ OWN Ε SCIENTIFIC SCHOOL

THE

The Engineering Building W h e n the Engineering Building, which would be at Thirty-third and Locust streets if Locust Street were there, was dedicated in 1906, nearly three years after ground had been broken, the University was genuinely proud of the new structure, and still is for that matter. T h e architects had prepared designs in a fairly simple Georgian style in keeping with both the University setting and the solidly scientific engineering courses, and it was the largest instructional building on the Campus until a new w i n g was added to the Medical Laboratories in 1928. T h e building is a hollow rectangle of brick and limestone three stories high, with two impressive entrances on the south side. T h e offices of the Dean of the T o w n e Scientific School, w h o is also Director of the Department of Mechanical Engineering, are at the west

TOWNE

SCIENTIFIC

SCHOOL

57

entrance; those of the Director of the Department of Civil Engineering are at the east entrance. The laboratories are at the rear of the building on the ground level and occupy approximately 32,000 square feet of floor space. A laboratory for fuel technology is at the west end, the materials and hydraulic laboratories are at the east end, and stretching between are a laboratory for chemical engineering, a heat-power laboratory for mechanical engineering, a machine shop, pattern shop, and foundry. The Engineering Building also houses smaller laboratories for physical chemistry, fuel calorimetry, metallography, heat treatment, photo-elasticity, and vibration analysis. T h e building has numerous offices, classrooms and drawing rooms, a large library, an assembly room seating approximately four hundred, and a large room made available for student activities. In the basement is an electrical substation for regulating the power to the building; there are also locker rooms and a lavatory equipped with a battery of showerbaths that are of great benefit to the engineering students at the close of a long afternoon in the laboratories. T H E T O W N E SCIENTIFIC SCHOOL T h e Towne Scientific School has three departments: Chemistry and Chemical Engineering, Civil Engineering, and Mechanical Engineering. Until 1920, when the School of Fine Arts was organized under its own dean, architecture was a division of the Towne Scientific School, as was electrical engineering until 1923, when the Moore School of Electrical Engineering was established. Engineering at the University of Pennsylvania, which up to the present has developed into these three schools, can be traced to the earliest years of the College of Philadelphia, when surveying was a part of the work in mathematics. But it is generally looked on as having begun in 1850, when the Trustees adopted a resolution providing for a school of Arts. The school had but one chair, a professorship of "Chemistry as applied to the Arts," and according to the catalogue of 1851-52, "Familiar lectures are given by the professor, to students exclusively, upon the following subjects: Mineralogy, Geology, Theoretic and Applied Chemistry." In 1875, after a number of changes of title and a considerable increase in staff had taken place, the school became the Towne Scientific School, named in honor of John Henry Towne, a Trustee,

58

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

who had left his large residuary estate to the University. At once it was made a separate division of the University under its own dean, but in 1883 it again became a part of the College, where it remained until 1912, when both the Towne Scientific School and the Wharton School were given autonomy under their own deans. Civil Engineering: T h e Department of Civil Engineering occupies the east end of the Engineering Building. On the first floor are the offices of the Director, and the members of the staff are assigned offices and classrooms at the east end of the building. Here also, with the entrance on the first floor, are the materials laboratory and the hydraulic laboratory, the principal laboratories of the Department. T h e materials laboratory has the biggest pieces of apparatus to be found in the University. Of the thirteen testing machines of various capacities, the largest is an Olsen four-screw vertical machine, capable of taking a column twenty-four feet high. It can exert a load of six hundred thousand pounds and will test a thirty-inch I-beam, the largest that has yet been rolled. In addition there is equipment for the testing of cement, sand, plain and reinforced concrete, and road materials. T h e equipment of the hydraulic laboratory consists of standpipes, concrete reservoirs, pumps, turbines, and water wheels, and a venturi flume thirty-four feet long. T w o of the pumps have each a capacity of 450 gallons a minute against a head of 165 feet, and another can lift 2,100 gallons a minute to a height of fifty feet, the total maximum rate of discharge of the entire laboratory being eleven million gallons a day, enough water to supply a city of thirty thousand inhabitants if they have normal thirst and habits of cleanliness. For certain work the laboratory is looked on as one of the best equipped in the country, and many users of hydraulic construction specify that their apparatus must be tested in it before being accepted. Equipment for civil engineering in 1852, when the first Professor of Civil Engineering, J . H. Alexander, was appointed, consisted of transits and levels, and not many of them, for the enrollment in the School of Arts was limited at first to ten students. Professor Alexander, who resigned in 1855, was succeeded by Fairman Rogers, later an important figure in the scientific life of Philadelphia and a Trustee of the University. Professor Rogers' course consisted in 1856-57 of fifty lectures on "Civil Engineering and surveying, on triangulation and compass; linear, mining and hydrographic sur-

E X P E R I M E N T A L E L E C T R I C A L W O R K : M O O R E SCHOOL

HYDRAULICS LABORATORY:

T O W N E SCIENTIFIC SCHOOL

MORRIS A R B O R E T U M

PROVOST'S HOUSE

TOWNE

SCIENTIFIC

SCHOOL

59

veying; and on construction, strength of materials, beams, arches and the special application to railroads, canals and water works." When College Hall was opened in 1872, engineering was taught in the newly organized Department of Science, which had J. Peter Lesley, the distinguished geologist, as Dean of the Faculty, and L. G. Franck as Professor of Civil and Mechanical Engineering. T h e Department occupied the east end of College Hall, and the civil engineers and architects faced each other across the hall on the third floor. T h e traditional failure of these two active reagents to m i x without more or less violent ebullition resulted in many of the "hall rushes" and "corner fights" so common in College Hall. T h e somewhat rural territory outside College H a l l served as an admirable training ground, and the students laid out railway lines and thoroughly surveyed the terrain about the University, including the old Almshouse territory. In 1892 Edgar M a r b u r g became Professor of Civil Engineering and immediately moved the civil engineers to the second floor of College Hall, where they remained until the completion of the Engineering Building, where, as a result of his o w n ability and the excellent new laboratories, the Department attained its maximum growth. Dr. Marburg's greatest monument is the American Society for T e s t i n g Materials, which was organized mainly through his vision and efforts and of which he was Secretary-Treasurer from the time of its establishment until his death in 1918. A graduate of Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, he came to Pennsylvania with a thorough practical training as a structural engineer. As a result of his special interest and ability in structural engineering, the Department has attained real prominence in the field. It has also received wide recognition for its work in hydraulic engineering. T h e course in civil engineering, however, is designed to provide a well-balanced training rather than a high degree of specialization. Graduates of the Department have found that this sort of engineering education constitutes a sound basis on which to build successful careers in the various branches of the profession. Mechanical Engineering: W i t h the establishment of the T o w n e Scientific School in 1875 the Whitney Professorship of Dynamical Engineering was set up. A l t h o u g h there had previously been an instructor in mechanical engineering, this chair was not filled until 1877, when W i l l i a m D. Marks became the first appointee. Henry W . Spangler was Whitney Professor from 1889 to 1912, and

6o

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

it was in 1906, during his regime, that the Engineering Building was completed. T h i s was providential for the Department of Mechanical Engineering, for its laboratories (in a building on what is now the site of Irvine Auditorium) had just been destroyed by fire. Actually the Engineering Building was not complete at the time of the fire, but nevertheless on the next day, February 7, the mechanical engineers moved in, and on February 8, instruction began in the new quarters without the use of blackboards, shop, or laboratory equipment. During the rest of the year, shop and laboratory work was unusual but very practical. It consisted of installing salvaged equipment from the old building and new equipment in the extensive laboratories at the rear of the new building. In 1912 Dr. R . H. Fernald was appointed Whitney Professor and Director of the Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering. In 1914, however, electrical engineering was divorced from mechanical engineering, later to become the Moore School of Electrical Engineering. After a long period of distinguished service as Director of the Department, Dr. Fernald assumed the additional duties of Dean of the T o w n e Scientific School in 1930, filling both posts until his death in 1937. Under Dr. Fernald's leadership, the Mechanical Engineering Department followed the general trend away from the use of large and costly equipment intended to familiarize the students with machines as actually used in industry and away from courses calculated to develop mechanical skills and provide factual knowledge, toward the use of smaller and less costly equipment representative of current practice and toward courses of more fundamental and analytical character. A glance at the present curriculum with its fundamental courses in statics, dynamics, thermodynamics, heat transfer, fluid mechanics, and modern atomic and molecular physics shows the extent of this trend. A n d as is also demanded by the times, courses in economics, business law, and industrial management have been added to the curriculum. In the heat power laboratory, besides an assortment of steam engines, gas engines, turbines, compressors, pumps, and condensers, there are various types of fluid meters, dynamometers, balancing machines, vibroscopes and torsographs, stroboscopes, and other instruments of the sort. T h e machine shop has somewhat heavier equipment. In addition to the usual modern tools found in small shops, there is a 22-inch turret lathe, a 30-inch boring mill, a 30-inch engine lathe, and a io-foot planer. In the foundry there are electric

TOW NE SCIENTIFIC

SCHOOL

6i

induction melting furnaces, a commercial cupola, a gas-fired core oven, and molding machines of various types. T h e r e is also a special sand-testing laboratory equipped with every device in use today and a complete pattern shop. T h e fuel calorimetry laboratory is equipped for determining the physical characteristics of solid, liquid, and gaseous fuels and particularly heating values, proximate and ultimate analysis. In the Melville Laboratory of Metallography, made possible by a grant from Admiral George W. Melville, instruction and research are being done on the properties of alloys, both ferrous and nonferrous, which are of increasing importance in modern engineering. Its apparatus includes a Leitz metallograph with which photographs of metal sections can be made at 2,500 diameters, four metallographic microscopes which magnify u p to 1,200 diameters, and various grinders, polishers, and heat treatment furnaces. Another laboratory is devoted to photo-elasticity, one of the most fascinating of the experimental methods used in the analysis of stress problems. T h e laboratory is equipped for fabricating and annealing the model specimens, and in addition there is especially designed apparatus by means of which measurements on soap films can be obtained to supplement in a very important way the purely photo-elastic data. T h i s laboratory is mainly used in connection with graduate instruction, but it also serves to demonstrate some of the fundamental concepts of stress analysis to the undergraduate student. Graduate work is an important activity of the Mechanical Engineering Department, and with it there is increasing activity in research, especially in aerodynamics, a branch of fluid mechanics dealing with the motion of compressed fluids. Apparatus embodying the Schlieren method of making the flow of gases visible is being used to study sub-acoustic velocities encountered in airplanes, heating and ventilating equipment, low-pressure turbine blades, etc., and also super-acoustic velocities encountered in impulse turbine blades and nozzles, jet compressors, and airplanes. A n investigation of special interest to the air-conditioning engineer now being carried on in cooperation with the American Society of Heating and Ventilating Engineers attempts to evaluate small departures from Dal ton's L a w of partial pressures—a law which has been the basis of airconditioning theory in the past. T h i s attention to small defects in former methods of analysis is evidence of the engineer's respect f o r fundamental theory and his demand for precise data.

62

UNIVERSITY The Harrison

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Laboratory

of

Chemistry

T h e Department of Chemistry and Chemical Engineering is the only division of the T o w n e Scientific School that has its own building—the J o h n Harrison Laboratory of Chemistry, at Thirty-fourth and Spruce Streets. T h e Laboratory is named for the prominent Philadelphia chemical manufacturer and is the gift of his grandsons, Provost C. C. Harrison, A l f r e d Harrison, and W. W. Harrison. It was dedicated in 1894 and is in an Italian Renaissance style. T h e Laboratory was expected to accommodate five hundred students, but with the astonishing development of modern chemistry and the increase in enrollment (some 1,200 students study in the Department each year), many rooms are now devoted to uses very different from those for which they were intended, and chemistry has invaded several near-by buildings. On the first floor of the Harrison Laboratory are two large laboratories for inorganic and physical chemistry, an electrochemical laboratory, and an amphitheatre seating two hundred. T o the left of the entrance are the offices of the Director of the Laboratory. On the second floor are classrooms and two large laboratories for analytical chemistry. T h e third floor, which is devoted entirely to organic chemistry, has a large general laboratory and an analytical laboratory. On all the floors are small research laboratories for the staff and graduates, the usual balance rooms, store rooms, and dispensing rooms for reagents. T h e Department also uses the entire fourth floor of the Hare Building as an organic chemistry laboratory, has a second laboratory for quantitative analysis in the Hygiene Building just north of the Harrison Laboratory, and uses three rooms in the Engineering Building for graduate instruction and research in physical chemistry. In the Engineering Building is also the large laboratory for chemical engineering, where its location between the mechanical and civil engineering laboratories provides unusual facilities for instruction. T h i s laboratory is equipped for all the " u n i t " operations and has ample space for the erection and operation of apparatus for special projects and for research. Adjacent is a machine shop outfitted with precision equipment and operated by skilled craftsmen who, with the University glass-blowing service maintained in the Medical Laboratories, provide nearly all of the special apparatus required by both undergraduate and graduate students. Equipment for instruction and research in chemistry is too extensive to be described here in detail. It includes apparatus so precise

TOWNE

SCIENTIFIC

SCHOOL

63

that students can determine the amount of oxygen in refined copper or detect the minute traces of iodine in oyster shells. T h e r e is equipment for determining molecular weights of organic compounds, a necessary step in creating new chemical substances, for hydrogenation at pressures up to two hundred atmospheres and temperatures up to 250° centigrade. T h e r e are fractionating columns of all designs for purification of organic substances, along with electrical refrigerators for more rapid crystallization, drying "pistols" and pumps. T h e r e are potentiometers for the study of freezing points and the measurement of the most minute electric effects, dilatometers and precision thermostats accurate to within .03 of a degree, and a photo-electric colorimeter accurate to within .2 per cent. T h e largest piece of equipment is in the engineering laboratory. It is a circulating evaporator, the gift of the United States Cast Iron Pipe and Foundry Company. Professor of Chemistry when the Harrison Laboratory was being planned was Edgar Fahs Smith, under whose direction the Laboratory achieved an international reputation. From 1894 until his death in 1928 he occupied rooms to the right of the main entrance — a s Professor of Chemistry, Vice-Provost, Provost, and Provost Emeritus. In memory of his contributions to the University, the walk stretching from Thirty-third to Thirty-fourth streets has been given his name. A t the west end of the walk, facing the main Library, is a bronze statue of him by R . T a i t McKenzie. The Edgar Fahs Smith Memorial

Collection

A n even more significant memorial to Dr. Smith is the library of more than nine thousand items housed in the rooms he occupied for so many years. O n his death, Mrs. Smith gave the University her husband's extensive collection of books and ultimately endowed it. T h e largest and most important section is devoted to the history of chemistry, a collection that is unquestionably the most important in the United States. T h e items include many incunabula, manuscripts, and rare French, German, and English prints on chemical and alchemical subjects. Chemistry and Chemical Engineering: Unlike the Department of Physics, which is in the College, the Department of Chemistry is in the T o w n e Scientific School. T h e reason is that in 1893, while the T o w n e Scientific School was still a part of the College, the University established the Course in Chemical Engineering, the oldest of such courses in continuous existence in the United States and now

64

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

o n e of the comparatively few a p p r o v e d by the A m e r i c a n Institute of C h e m i c a l Engineers. B u t no matter why chemistry fits into the University organization where it does, it is certain that it has been i m p o r t a n t since the first college class entered in 1754. It was first taught by W i l l i a m Smith, the first Provost and Professor of N a t u r a l Philosophy. In 1769 Benj a m i n R u s h was appointed Professor of Chemistry. His chair was the first independent chair of chemistry in A m e r i c a and he was the first A m e r i c a n to publish a chemistry textbook. O t h e r teachers of chemistry in the University were R o b e r t H a r e , famous as the inventor of the o x y h y d r o g e n blowtorch; R o b e r t M . Patterson, a student u n d e r Sir H u m p h r e y Davy and later D i r e c t o r of the U n i t e d States M i n t ; A l e x a n d e r Dallas Bache, F.R.S., a grandson of B e n j a m i n Franklin, President of the N a t i o n a l A c a d e m y of Sciences, a n d first President of G i r a r d College; and J o h n Fries Frazer, w h o served o n the Geological Survey of Pennsylvania a n d was a f o u n d e r a n d VicePresident of the A c a d e m y of Natural Sciences. W i t h the a p p o i n t m e n t in 1874 of Dr. Frederick A . G e n t h as Professor of Analytical a n d A p p l i e d Chemistry a n d Mineralogy, chemistry at the University assumed its m o d e r n status as a department. In addition to Dr. G e n t h , w h o was n o t e d for his researches o n a m m o n i a cobalt bases, there were two assistant professors. I n 1876 Edgar Fahs Smith was appointed an assistant, b e c o m i n g Professor of Chemistry in 1888. U n d e r Dr. Smith g r a d u a t e work in chemistry became important in the University; the first Ph.D. in chemistry was granted in 1891 a n d since then 150 persons have received that degree. D u r i n g the tenure of Dr. Smith, w h o established the first laboratory for electro-analysis in the U n i t e d States, research in chemistry at the University was directed largely toward electro-analysis, determination of atomic weights, and the study of the chemistry of rare metals. Probably the most significant achievement of technical interest d u r i n g that time was Dr. Smith's o w n w o r k o n tungsten. T h i s provided a basis for the preparation of tungsten salts of sufficient purity to make possible the technical d e v e l o p m e n t of the tungsten filament. A t present research in chemistry t h r o u g h o u t the w o r l d has turned from inorganic chemistry toward the problems of organic a n d physical chemistry, a n d the research of the D e p a r t m e n t has f o l l o w e d this trend. In organic chemistry the staff a n d the graduate students have engaged in the study of the constitution of organic compounds,

MOORE SCHOOL

65

the synthesis of new substances, the improvement of old and the development of new analytical methods. In physical chemistry the work centers largely around the study of the properties of solutions, including reaction velocities, the properties of non-aqueous solutions, the constitution of electrolytes, the accumulation of conductivity data, and the various factors determining ionic activity. The Department now has a staff of thirty-two, who give instruction in seven divisions of the University. In the academic year 1938-39 a total of 148 students were enrolled in the chemical engineering course, forty-six in the four-year course in chemistry; 124 students in the various undergraduate schools were majors in chemistry, and there were 108 candidates for higher degrees, in addition to thirteen enrolled as graduate students in chemical engineering.

THE MOORE SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING The Moore School

ELECTRICAL

Building

Electrical engineering, once but a part of what was offered by the professor of "Dynamical Engineering" in the Towne Scientific School, is now taught in a separate school and in its own building, on the southwest corner of Thirty-third and Walnut streets. It is a brick and limestone structure, 120 feet square, with two floors and a basement. T h e foundations provide for two additional stories when required. Before 1926, when the University purchased the building, it was used for the manufacture of musical instruments. By a kindly Providence the factory had been constructed in a style not inconsistent with that of near-by University buildings, and when the Moore School took over, it was able with some alterations to make its new home appear somewhat similar to the Engineering Building on one side and Bennett Hall on another. T h e first floor contains most of the laboratories of the school. T h e second is devoted chiefly to classrooms, offices for the fourteen members of the staff, and a library containing nearly all of the published books on electrical engineering and many journals. There are also on this floor a short-wave radio station operated by the students and a student lounge. In the basement are lockers and one laboratory. T h e laboratories are excellently equipped for experimentation

66

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

and research in the basic theories of virtually all the fields of electrical engineering. T h e y consist of an extensive machinery laboratory that has been used as a model by other institutions, an instrument and measurements laboratory, a high-frequency laboratory, a laboratory especially devoted to graduate research, a photometric and illumination laboratory, an x-ray laboratory, a sound laboratory, and a differential analyzer laboratory. T h e r e is also a fully equipped shop outfitted with precision machinery for maintaining and making much of the apparatus used for instruction and research carried on in the Moore School. T h e differential analyzer laboratory may be particularly noted because there are but three differential analyzers in this country. T h e instrument is an elaborate calculating apparatus, fifty feet in length and weighing sixty tons. It was built by the Moore School because advancement in the analysis of certain types of circuits had virtually ceased because of inability to handle the mathematics involved. T h e differential analyzer is an instrument that carries mechanical calculation beyond those operations usually considered when one speaks of calculating machines. Devices for adding, subtracting, multiplying, dividing, and similar processes are commonplace, and machines are also available for the solution of algebraic equations, one having been developed in the M o o r e School. Solving differential equations is vastly more complex, yet this is what the differential analyzer has been doing steadily in the Moore School since 1935, in some cases providing in one hour a solution that might otherwise require ten days or perhaps could not be reached at all. T h e analyzer is an important aid in the research in machinery and circuit theory problems, in which the staff and graduate students of the Moore School have been especially active, but it also has its immediate practical application in electrical engineering. T h e analyzer, however, is but one piece of the array of equipment in the building at T h i r t y - t h i r d and W a l n u t streets. Other equipment is to be f o u n d in the machinery laboratory, where there are examples of virtually all types of electric machines and p o w e r equipment; in the instrument and measurements laboratory, where electric instruments of almost every description are to be f o u n d ; in the high-frequency laboratory, which contains equipment f o r almost all types of measurements in the communication field; in the graduate laboratory, where special problems requiring special or unusual equipment are attacked; in the sound laboratory, in which is the only sound " p r i s m " in this country.

MOORE

SCHOOL

T H E M O O R E S C H O O L OF E L E C T R I C A L

67 ENGINEERING

In 1893 a course leading to the degree of B.S. in Electrical Engineering was established in the Towne Scientific School, and the term "Dynamical Engineering" was no longer used to cover both mechanical and electrical engineering. But the two subjects continued to be taught in one department, the Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering, until 1914, when the Trustees, recognizing the importance of electrical engineering, created a separate Department of Electrical Engineering. Chosen to head the new Department was Dr. Harold Pender, who, as a student of the famous American scientist H. A. Rowland, was the first to demonstrate experimentally Rowland's Law, which states that a moving electrical charge is an electric current. In 1923 the University received a large endowment for a school of electrical engineering. T h e donor was Alfred Fitler Moore, Philadelphia cable manufacturer, who in his will provided funds for the establishment of such a school as a memorial to his parents, Joseph Moore and Cecelia Fitler Moore. As a result the Electrical Engineering Department of the T o w n e Scientific School became the Moore School of Electrical Engineering. For the next three years the School occupied the east end of the Engineering Building; in 1926 it moved into its present home. T h e Moore School provides undergraduate and graduate instruction. It endeavors to give the student not only a thorough technical training but also to develop initiative, ability to work with other men, common sense, and other characteristics that are essential to success in engineering. It is the purpose of the technical training to prepare the student to enter any of the major divisions into which electrical engineering is usually divided. These are the so-called power field (including the generation, transmission, and distribution of electrical energy); manufacturing (including the design and manufacture of electrical equipment); communications (including telephony, telegraphy, radio, and television); the industrial field (which includes the applications of electricity in branches of industry other than those mentioned above); and finally a field that comprises the multitude of other applications of electricity, for instance in medicine. But the most rigorous undergraduate training cannot do more than hope to prepare the electrical engineering student to enter these fields: a

68

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

long training period almost inevitably follows before the graduate evolves into the full-fledged engineer. Graduate work has been carried on in the Moore School for many years. It was confined to daytime classes, however, until 1928, when the School inaugurated evening graduate courses for working engineers who wanted to continue their studies after receiving the bachelor's degree. These courses are completely independent of the regular graduate work given during the day for students who wish to prepare themselves by full-time graduate work for the more technical positions in electrical engineering.

THE FINE ARTS BUILDING AND THE OF FINE ARTS The Fine Arts

SCHOOL

Building

T h e School of Fine Arts is in the dark red building in Renaissance style facing the Engineering Building to the north across the Edgar Fahs Smith Walk. Although it was not planned originally for the architectural faculty, whom it has housed since 1915, it was designed by one of their number, Edgar V. Seeler, who was appointed in 1894, fresh from the fxole des Beaux-Arts. Completed in 1896, when the more modern buildings were first beginning to appear on the Campus, it harbored the Dental School until 1915, when the School of Architecture was transferred from College Hall. On the first floor, to the right of the front entrance, is a large exhibition hall, where finished architectural problems, beautifully rendered, are continually on display, along with charcoal and watercolor studies that attract frequent visitors. T o the left of the entrance are the offices of Dean George S. Kcryl, who in his undergraduate days was the first of a long line of Pennsylvania men to win a major prize competition. On the mezzanine floor in the rear wing of the building is the library. This is a well-lighted room, two stories high and fifty by ninety feet. Once used as a clinic amphitheatre by the Dental School, it now contains 8,000 volumes indispensable in the study of architecture and fine arts. Also of importance are the 190,000 mounted photographs and the 16,000 slides which are used largely in courses on the history of art. Of great benefit in such courses is a Carl Zeiss epidiascope, an apparatus that will project on a screen an image of any object placed in it—three-dimensional or flat, transparent or

SCHOOL

OF FINE

ARTS

69

opaque. Another library is the Godfrey S. Singer Collection of 12,000 selections of recorded music, which is in a room in the basement. T h e largest room in the building is the atelier, 50 by 180 feet, formerly the dental clinic, which fills the entire second floor. Used only by men, for the women students have a smaller drafting room on the first floor, it has a somewhat bohemian atmosphere and is largely responsible for the esprit de corps for which the architectural students have been noted. W h e n the students are en charrette, the electric lights shine all night on smocked figures bent over the drawing boards as final touches are given to a problem. The

Studio

Other buildings also serve the School of Fine Arts. M u c h of the work in music is carried on in rooms in Irvine Auditorium, and freehand drawing has a studio in the dormitory quadrangle in a frame structure somewhat reminiscent of an army canteen. Its appearance is not an accident, however, for it originally housed a "commons," r u n by a private individual w h o in the days before the dormitories were built attempted to supply board at $6.50 a week, served by uniformed waiters to the accompaniment of an orchestra. From the time w h e n competition from boarding houses ended the enterprise, the building has been used as a studio, and in spite of its early history and appearance the place is affectionately regarded, for it has been the scene of many an architect's play, and it is here that George W a l t e r Dawson, noted for his water-color studies of flowers and beloved as an inspiring teacher, conducted his classes for many years. T H E SCHOOL OF FINE A R T S T h e origin of the School of Fine Arts was the appointment in 1869 of an instructor in drawing, T h o m a s W . Richards, w h o almost immediately began the plans for College H a l l and the other serpentine buildings on the Campus. Richards' teaching at first was mechanical drawing primarily, but the use of architectural forms was unavoidable, and in 1875 he was appointed Professor of Architecture in charge of a fully organized four-year course in the T o w n e Scientific School. T h e modern development of the study of architecture at Pennsylvania centers largely around two men, Warren P. Laird and Paul Philippe Cret. In 1890 the course in architecture became the School of Architecture, though still a division of the T o w n e Scientific

70

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

School. T e m p o r a r i l y in charge was T h e o p h i l u s P. C h a n d l e r , who, assisted by F r a n k Miles Day, W a l t e r C o p e , J o h n Stewardson, a n d W i l s o n Eyre, laid plans f o r a school organized on the principle that architecture is a fine art a n d not a mere adjunct to engineering. A p p o i n t e d Director in 1 8 9 1 , D r . L a i r d proceeded to gather a faculty whose students t h r o u g h o u t the years have m a d e a distinguished record in prize competitions a n d in practice. Professor Cret's a p p o i n t m e n t in 1903 was the result of the desire to have on the faculty a Professor of Design w i t h a record of achievement in the Ecole des B e a u x - A r t s . Starting w i t h but three months' study of English, he p r o v e d that few words are necessary f o r the able critic to convey an idea to a student. B y the time of his resignation in 1929 to devote himself entirely to his practice, he had unquestionably become the most praised teacher of design in A m e r i c a . I n 1 9 3 1 he received the P h i l a d e l p h i a A w a r d . Architecture is n o w b u t one of the divisions of the School of F i n e Arts. I n 1920 a greater school came into existence, w i t h Dr. L a i r d as Dean. T h e r e were to be f o u r departments: Architecture, M u s i c , L a n d s c a p e Architecture, and F i n e Arts. U n d e r the plan, architecture continued to be the b a c k b o n e of the school, w i t h its o w n c h a i r m a n , J o h n F . H a r b e s o n . Music, w h i c h had been a course of a c a d e m i c study given in the College since 1 8 7 5 by H u g h A r c h i b a l d C l a r k , was given a chairman, Dr. H a r l M a c D o n a l d , now a noted composer a n d conductor, u n d e r w h o m has been developed a f u l l c u r r i c u l u m , i n c l u d i n g the history, theory, a n d aesthetics of music, as w e l l as composition. A n i m p o r t a n t aspect of the work of the f a c u l t y of music has been the development of the C h o r a l Society, composed of the Men's and W o m e n ' s G l e e Clubs. B e g i n n i n g in 1930, the clubs became an " e d u c a t i o n a l " activity, directed since 1933 by D r . M a c D o n a l d . T h e Society has f r e q u e n t l y sung w i t h the P h i l a d e l p h i a Orchestra in P h i l a d e l p h i a , N e w Y o r k , B a l t i m o r e , a n d W a s h i n g t o n . L a n d s c a p e architecture became a f u l l y organized course in 1924, w i t h R o b e r t W h e e l w r i g h t as its head. A t that time the profession was relatively new, w i t h few schools f o r the t r a i n i n g of either m e n o r w o m e n . Because the School of F i n e Arts was in a city noted f o r gardens filled w i t h a w i d e variety of plants both native and exotic, it was logical that w o r k in landscape architecture be given. T h e private gardens and the University's own Morris A r b o r e t u m w i t h its extensive plantings gathered f r o m all over the w o r l d n o w provide laboratories, not only f o r u n d e r g r a d u a t e instruction but also f o r graduate research. T h e D e p a r t m e n t of F i n e Arts, w h i c h was headed by Dr. Leicester

COLLEGE

FOR

WOMEN

7»

B. Holland until he resigned to become Director of the Division of Fine Arts in the Library of Congress, at first included liberal courses in the history and appreciation of art primarily, with a modicum of technical study in drawing and interior design. But in 1925 the scope of the Department was extended to include a coordinated course with the Pennsylvania Academy of Fine Arts so that the degree of Bachelor of Fine Arts might be given to students in painting, sculpture, illustration, and mural decoration. In 1933 a similar course was offered to students of applied arts at the Pennsylvania Museum School of Industrial Art.

BENNETT HALL AND THE EDUCATION WOMEN AT THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA Bennett

OF

Hall

For many years the name Bennett has been associated with the education of women at the University of Pennsylvania. There is the Bennett Club, the Bennett News, and finally Bennett Hall, all deriving their names from Colonel Joseph Bennett, owner of a great deal of Philadelphia real estate, who bequeathed a considerable sum to the University to aid in the education of women. At first the only physical evidence of the Bennett bequest was a group of residences on the south side of Walnut Street east of Thirty-fourth, which were a part of the Bennett estate. Some of these houses were subsequently torn down, and swings and seesaws, erected by the Philadelphia Playground Association, were kept busy during the summer months by neighborhood children. One of the houses that remained standing was fitted out in 1921 as the Bennett Club, a student union for the women, and in 1926 the Club expanded into an adjoining house. In 1924, because the 525 women who were in the School of Education were encroaching on the already overcrowded College Hall rather more than was approved by a part of the University family, the Trustees appropriated most of the Bennett fund to construct a building at Thirty-fourth and Walnut Streets to be used primarily for the education of women. Bennett Hall was opened for use in 1925, and into it promptly moved the School of Education and its various divisions. T h e Summer School and the Graduate School were also allotted offices in the new building. Although none of these schools admitted

72

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

women alone, they formed a majority of the enrollment. T h e College of Liberal Arts for Women, which was not organized until 1933, was located in Bennett Hall when it came into existence. T h e new building is in an English collegiate style which is somewhat simpler than that of the dormitories and other modern buildings on the Campus. T h e main section lies along Walnut Street from Thirty-fourth to Bennett Field, a vacant piece of ground now fenced in and used by women's classes in physical education. At each end a short wing extends south to Chancellor Street, forming a small court at the rear. T h e main entrance is at Walnut and Thirty-fourth streets, at the base of a tower seventy-five feet high. Very wisely, the architects placed the offices on the street side of the building and the classrooms—there are twenty-one, seating 971—at the back, overlooking the court. Bennett Hall does yeoman service. On the first floor to the right of the main entrance are the offices of the College of Liberal Arts for Women and of the Graduate School; at the extreme opposite end of the building are the offices of the School of Education; and stretching between are the offices of the Summer School, Nursing Education, Vocational Teacher Training, a Bureau of Educational Measurements, and the office of the Directress of Women. On the second floor, over the main entrance, is the Maria Hosmer Penniman Memorial Library of Education, in a room eighty by twenty feet and two stories in height. On this floor and the third floor are the offices of members of departments which give a great number of courses in the College for Women and the School of Education—English, history, philosophy, Latin, and, of course, education. There are also the offices of the Departments of Oriental Studies, Indo-European Philology, and History of Religion, the only instructional departments actually in the Graduate School. On the fourth floor are the offices of the Women's Division of the Department of Physical Education, a gymnasium eighty-eight feet by forty-three, and a "correction room," which has nothing to do with breaches of discipline. T h e basement contains a fully equipped reading clinic, a room for commercial education that is equipped with typewriters and computing machines, a student store, and a lounge for the women students. T H E C O L L E G E OF L I B E R A L A R T S F O R W O M E N T h e final creation in 1933 of a College for Women in the University was sensible. Since 1914, when the School of Education was

SCHOOL OF

EDUCATION

73

organized, large numbers of women had received undergraduate instruction on the Campus. Most of them were enrolled in the School of Education, and although that School gave preference in admissions to students who seemed clearly to intend to teach, it was obvious that many wished a course in liberal arts. Indeed, a great number of young women enrolled for a full schedule of afternoon and evening classes given as College Collateral Courses. These courses were offered by the College and were the only means for women to obtain an A.B. at the University. T h a t a college for women was needed is shown by the fact that it has not been possible to keep within the limit of five hundred students, the enrollment that was originally anticipated. With the establishment of the College for Women it became possible to put the School of Education on a strictly professional basis, admitting students after they had completed two years of a liberal arts course. T h e College f o r Women is identical with the College (for men) in entrance requirements, curriculum, and the rest, instruction being given by the same faculty but in separate classes. At first the variety of courses was not so great as was offered to the men, owing to the smaller enrollment, but that discrepancy has virtually disappeared. T h e catalogue of the College for Women f o r 1939-40 lists a total of 467 different courses, not all of them given in one year, of course; while in the College catalogue a similar count gives a total of 546, the difference being represented to some extent by courses in engineering and military science, to which women are not admitted. It is interesting to note that in recent years an increasing number of courses given by the members of the Wharton School faculty have been offered in the College for Women. T h e curriculum makers, realizing that women succeed in business as well as in the professions and also that they inherit much of the accumulated wealth of the nation, have made the courses available with the modest statement that "women may be faced with the problem of property management." T H E SCHOOL OF T h e professional training of now requires the services of a from the creation in 1894 of the of Education," to which Martin

EDUCATION

teachers in the University, which staff of fifty-three, dates definitely chair of the "History and Institutes G. Brumbaugh was appointed, but

74

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

the opening of opportunities to w o m e n some years earlier was a related step. In i 8 g i the G r a d u a t e School created a " G r a d u a t e Department for W o m e n , " and in 1894 this D e p a r t m e n t stated that its work was "especially valuable . . . to those w h o wish to become teachers." In 1892 a four-year course in biology, o p e n to women, was organized in the College a n d was "designed to give a thorough preparation to those w h o purpose b e c o m i n g teachers of N a t u r a l History." In 1893-94 a course in English literature, designed especially for teachers, was first g i v e n by D r . Josiah H . P e n n i m a n . I n 1887, even earlier than many of these developments, the Psychological Laboratory had been established, a n d soon its w o r k was directed to teaching problems. W i t h the a p p o i n t m e n t of Dr. B r u m b a u g h , courses in education were offered in the C o l l e g e (but only to men), in the G r a d u a t e School, and in the newly organized C o l l e g e Courses for T e a c h e r s (now the College Collateral Courses). W h e n Dr. B r u m b a u g h resigned in 1906 to become S u p e r i n t e n d e n t of Schools in P h i l a d e l p h i a and later G o v e r n o r of Pennsylvania, his successor was D r . A . D u n c a n Yocum, w h o had received his doctor's degree f r o m the University in 1900 and until 1914 had sole charge of the courses in education. D u r i n g those years the professional offerings for teachers, particularly in the summer sessions, were greatly enlarged. In 1913 the Pennsylvania Legislature made a large a p p r o p r i a t i o n to the University for teacher training, a n d Frank P. Graves and H a r l a n Updegraf were appointed professors to assist Dr. Y o c u m . In 1914 the School of Education was organized w i t h Dr. Graves as Dean, a post w h i c h he held until 1921, w h e n he became C o m m i s s i o n e r of E d u c a t i o n for the State of N e w York. T h e work of teacher training in the University has changed m u c h in quantity and character, especially since 1914. T h e earlier training was general; the later gave emphasis to special fields. History, philosophy, principles of education, a n d foreign systems were predominant in the program prior to 1914. In 1914 the sole c u r r i c u l u m was designed to prepare for the teaching of academic subjects in secondary schools, but other curricula were soon added. A t present the School of E d u c a t i o n also prepares for teaching in kindergarten and in the primary and intermediate grades, in vocational education, nursing education, home economics, music a n d art, physical education, and commercial subjects. M a n y of the courses in the respective curricula are for the training of administrators a n d supervisors. T h e most significant event in the history of the School since its f o u n d i n g occurred in 1933, w h e n it was reorganized o n a five-year

BENNETT HALL

SCHOOL OF EDUCATION

75

basis. F o r long it had been the policy to restrict enrollment as f a r as possible to students who definitely planned to teach. With the establishment of the College for Women, it became possible to admit at the junior class level or higher. After devoting the junior and senior years mainly to academic courses, the student receives the B.S., but is not eligible for a teaching certificate until after completion of a year of graduate study in which professional training is emphasized. Graduate study and educational research have always had their place. Although only eighteen doctoral dissertations in education appeared before 1916, at present about five are completed each year. These are a part of the work of the Graduate School, but since 1931 the program of the School of Education has included a curriculum leading to the degree of M.S. in Education. T h e literature of education has been enriched even more by the many publications of the members of the faculty, beginning with Dr. Brumbaugh, who was author and editor of many studies in the historical as well as educational fields. B u t the influence of the faculty through their publications has been further increased by the activity of many of them in national, state, and local educational associations and on commissions and educational committees. While serving primarily the needs of Pennsylvania, the School of Education, through the activities of its faculty, has looked beyond the State to the nation and its educational needs. The Penniman Library of

Education

Of great value to faculty and students in the School of Education — a n d to many others—is the Maria Hosmer Penniman Library of Education, which is on the second floor of Bennett. Hall. Housed originally in a special room on an upper floor of the main Library, it was moved to its present location when Bennett Hall was opened. Since that time the Penniman Library has filled the three levels of shelves in the large room at the head of the main stairway and has expanded to a classroom across the hall, where graduate students are assigned desks. T h e Penniman Library, the gift of the late James Hosmer Penniman, brother of the Provost Emeritus, was presented to the University as a memorial to their mother. Throughout the later years of his life, Dr. Penniman collected books relating to education, and these he gave to the University of Pennsylvania, Yale University, of which he was an alumnus, and Brown University. On his death he bequeathed additional books to these universities and funds f o r

76

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

the maintenance of the collections. T h e collection at the University of Pennsylvania now numbers 47,000 volumes, among which are many rare incunabula and other important early editions. Vocational Teacher Training: W i t h i n the School of Education are certain separate divisions, each with its own director. O n e of these is the Department of Vocational T e a c h e r Education. T h i s Department came into existence as a result of the passage in 1917 of the Smith-Hughes Act, following w h i c h the Pennsylvania State Department of Public Instruction assigned to the University of Pennsylvania responsibility for vocational teacher training in the eastern area of the State. Until 1920 no member of the faculty of the School of Education devoted his time exclusively to the work, but in that year the first full-time teacher was appointed as Assistant Professor of Industrial Education, and in 1922 the staff was doubled by the appointment of a Professor of Vocational Education, w h o also served as Director of Vocational T e a c h e r T r a i n i n g . Prior to the creation of the Department, it was the practice in the public schools to take men and women, skilled in their particular trades, and place them in charge of classes. T h e r e were no general educational or professional requirements for shop teachers, department heads, or even for trade school principals. A t present the State of Pennsylvania requires twenty-four hours of college credit for certification as a teacher of vocational subjects and a Bachelor's degree for certification as a trade school principal or director of vocational education, the requirements for the City of Philadelphia being even higher. During the college year 1917-18, nineteen students enrolled in the one course offered by the Department. D u r i n g 1938-39, a total of 341 students, representing forty-one vocations, were registered in fourteen vocational teacher education courses. By 1940 more than 200 such students had earned the B.S. degree in the School of Education, 117 had earned either the M.A. or M.S., and three the Ph.D. Practically all of the teachers, supervisors, and directors of vocational industrial education in the eastern area of Pennsylvania, as well as many from other localities, have been students in the Department. As a result of these contacts and the studies of significant problems in this professional field, the Department has contributed materially to the development of the modern philosophy in vocational education. Nursing Education: T h e Department of Nursing Education was founded in 1935 following a proposal by the Pennsylvania State

SCHOOL

OF

EDUCATION

77

Nurses' Association that the University of Pennsylvania create a department of nursing education. T h e move was the natural result of the higher standards in the schools of nursing, the increasing importance of the public health nurse, and the desire of the nurses themselves for a higher degree of professionalization. With the aid of a permanent advisory committee composed of the Dean of the School of Education, the President of the Pennsylvania State Nurses' Association, and administrators chosen from a school of nursing, a hospital, and public health nursing, Miss Katharine T u c k e r , the Director of the Department, w h o formerly had been Director of the National Organization for Public Health Nursing, organized curricula designed to prepare students to become teachers, supervisors, and administrators in schools and hospitals, and for positions in public health nursing. T h e courses in these curricula lead to the B.S. or M.S. in Education and are given both on the Campus and at extension centers. Starting w i t h a faculty of two full-time professors and one special lecturer and an enrollment of 176 students, mainly from the Philadelphia area, the Department had grown by 1939 to a faculty of two professors, two assistant professors, and seven lecturers. Likewise, the enrollment had j u m p e d to 560, and an increasing number of students were coming from other states than Pennsylvania. The Illman-Carter Unit: Approximately seventy children from four to twelve years old are now a part of the University of Pennsylvania. T h e connection, it must be admitted, is somewhat tenuous, for they are in the Illman School for Children, which is a part of the IllmanCarter U n i t for Kindergarten and Primary Teachers, which is a division of the School of Education. T h e School for Children serves as a demonstration school for more than one hundred students registered for a four-year course in kindergarten and primary training. T h e academic courses are given in the various departments of the University; the professional courses at the headquarters of the Unit, at 4000 Pine Street, and at the A n n e x , 4112 Spruce Street. T h e building at 4000 Pine Street is a remodeled residence with a modern, three-story addition at the rear. In it are offices, classrooms, a large kindergarten, and a dormitory for the training students, w h o come from a wide area. T h e A n n e x contains more classrooms and the Primary Department. T h e Illman-Carter Unit is an outgrowth of the school established in 1904 by Miss Alice Carter of Philadelphia as a result of her

78

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

interest in kindergarten w o r k a n d her realization of the v a l u e of two mission kindergartens which she had organized in the poorer sections of the City. Miss C a r o l i n e M. H a r t , one of the well-known educators of the time, was a p p o i n t e d Director, a n d the school bore her name. Until 1 9 1 2 the school was located in the central part of the city, but in that year increased enrollment forced it to move to 3600 W a l n u t Street. A f t e r the death of Miss H a r t in 1 9 1 8 , Miss A d e l a i d e T . I l l m a n became Director, and in 1920, f o l l o w i n g the extension of the work of the school to the p r i m a r y grades, the n a m e was changed to Miss Illman's School for K i n d e r g a r t e n a n d P r i m a r y T e a c h e r s . I n 1921 a f u r t h e r increase in e n r o l l m e n t m a d e necessary the purchase of the b u i l d i n g at 4000 Pine Street, and in 1927 an addition was erected. A n affiliation with the University of P e n n s y l v a n i a was established in 1932 by which f u l l credit toward the B.S. in E d u c a t i o n was granted to graduates, a n d this relationship naturally led in 1936 to the School's becoming an integral part of the University. Schoolmen's Week: I n the spring of every year some five thousand teachers, school officials, a n d professors throng the C a m p u s a n d various large lecture rooms in Bennett H a l l a n d other buildings, where they attend nearly a h u n d r e d meetings. T h e occasion is k n o w n as Schoolmen's W e e k and serves as a T e a c h e r s ' Institute f o r the schools of P h i l a d e l p h i a a n d various s u b u r b a n school districts a n d as a general educational conference f o r the Southeastern Convention District of the P e n n s y l v a n i a State E d u c a t i o n Association. W h a t takes place in the meetings and conferences is later published as The Proceedings of Schoolmen's Week, a v o l u m e that is kept d o w n to something like six h u n d r e d pages only w i t h considerable difficulty. T h e conference, w h i c h was first instituted in 1 9 1 4 , is sponsored by the School of E d u c a t i o n , with w h i c h D r e x c l Institute cooperates both financially and in p r o v i d i n g facilities. T h e P h i l a d e l p h i a T e a c h e r s ' Association a n d the s u b u r b a n school districts also contribute financially, a n d representatives of all these groups plan the program. T h e purpose of Schoolmen's W e e k is to provide free discussion of vital topics in education, to promote w o r t h w h i l e research, and to demonstrate progressive school practices. The Cultural Olympics: T h e C u l t u r a l Olympics is an activity designed to stimulate interest in the fine arts as leisure time activities. It was conceived by M r . S a m u e l Fleisher, f o u n d e r of the G r a p h i c

SUMMER

SCHOOL

79

Sketch Club, and was established in 1936, largely through the interest of Mr. George H. Johnson, a prominent Philadelphia merchant. Festivals in music, dancing, speech, dramatics, and literature are held both on and oil the Campus, and a number of art exhibitions are shown at the Cultural Olympics Gallery, 3425 Woodland Avenue. T h e office of the Director is in Bennett Hall. Considered a part of the School of Education, the Cultural Olympics arranges conferences and demonstrations for teachers. Although none of the activities is competitive, high standards of excellence are maintained by a group of judges who analyze each performance and recognize outstanding ability by granting certificates of merit. T h e Cultural Olympics does not award scholarships, but it has been influential in placing especially qualified young people on free scholarships in prominent schools of art, music, and dance. Each year the activities on the Campus attract approximately six thousand participants and an audience of well over one hundred thousand. T H E SUMMER SCHOOL Although it is administered as a division of the College, the Summer School has its offices in Bennett Hall. T h e reason is not merely that College Hall is crowded, but that there may be closer contact with the School of Education and the Graduate School, for courses in education and graduate work generally are a major part of the work of the Summer School. It was not always so. T h e first official summer session, held in 1904, offered sixty-one courses, virtually all of which were for undergraduates, and no course in education was included until 1906. T h e purpose was primarily to give flunkees a chance to make up deficiencies, but the fact that the School afforded faculty members some additional income was also a consideration. For at least some of the faculty, however, the additional income was not overwhelming, for they were paid according to the number of students they taught, rather than on a salary basis, and the fees of the 137 students enrolled were split among twenty-nine members of the staff for an average of considerably under one hundred dollars. Conditions from a faculty standpoint were probably even less satisfactory in the earlier, unofficial summer sessions. As early as 1889 summer classes in certain subjects had been conducted on the Campus under various auspices, including those of the American Institute of Biblical Literature, the State Department of Education,

8o

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

a n d the faculty members themselves. T h e s e i n v o l v e d official permission for the use of University rooms, but were otherwise private enterprises. Most interesting was the summer school of chemistry c o n d u c t e d in 1894 by the late Edgar Fahs S m i t h a n d several assistants. A l t h o u g h D r . Smith refused compensation, the meager tuition fees ($25.00 per student for f o u r courses) w h e n divided a m o n g the assistants a m o u n t e d to very little. A survivor recalls that he received $30.00 for teaching six weeks. A n d in 1895 Dr. Smith took his vacation a n d the assistants did all the teaching. F o l l o w i n g the establishment of the School of Education in 1914, the f u n c t i o n of the S u m m e r School as an advanced training school for teachers b e g a n to d e v e l o p rapidly. W i t h the increasing complexity of the e d u c a t i o n a l system and the progressive heightening of the requirements f o r teachers, it has become more a n d more necessary for the latter to seek advancement a n d stimulation t h r o u g h s u m m e r study. F r o m 1914 to 1926 this tendency was felt at the u n d e r g r a d u a t e level, since most in-service teachers did n o t have college degrees, b u t were b e i n g forced to meet new a n d higher standards of certification or lose their positions. U n d e r g r a d u a t e attendance reached its peak in 1926, w h e n the School h a d 2,510 students. N o w , however, most teachers must take their degrees before b e g i n n i n g to teach, a n d after e m p l o y m e n t they are encouraged to pursue h i g h e r studies a n d in many cases to attain the Master's degree. O f the nearly 1,900 students in the 1939 Summer School, a b o u t forty-four per cent were graduates, as compared w i t h twenty-five per cent in 1926, a n d about sixty-five per cent were teachers or prospective teachers. In 1939 there was a faculty of 118, i n c l u d i n g twenty professors, seventeen associate professors, thirty-seven assistant professors, twenty-six instructors, a n d eighteen visiting lecturers. T h e y offered 252 courses, 170 of w h i c h carried graduate credit. In addition, the catalogue listed 182 courses as "omitted in 1 9 3 9 " — a d v a n c e d courses g i v e n in cycles. A few students were m a k i n g u p conditions or were seeking to shorten the time required to earn the Bachelor's degree, but the great m a j o r i t y were present or f u t u r e t e a c h e r s — m e n a n d w o m e n whose influence w i l l largely determine w h a t o u r f u t u r e u n d e r g r a d u a t e students w i l l be like. THE

GRADUATE

SCHOOL

I n 1882, w h e n the G r a d u a t e School was founded, most of the schools of the University of Pennsylvania were still k n o w n as depart-

GRADUATE

SCHOOL

81

ments, and the present departments were merely chairs devoted to the various subjects of instruction. A n d so the Graduate School was called the Department of Philosophy, a name which remained until 1907. T h e first students, four in number, were enrolled in 1885, when there were but fifteen members in the faculty, and all supposedly were working for their doctorate, for no arrangement was made for part-time study, and until 1892 the M . A . and M.S. continued to be given in the College. T h e first Ph.D. was granted in 1889, to Arthur W. Goodspeed, later Professor of Physics and Director of the R a n d a l Morgan Laboratory. Dr. Goodspeed, however, was not the first to receive the Ph.D. from the University, for the A u x i l i a r y Faculty of Medicine, created in 1865 to enlarge and improve medical training, granted that degree from 1871 to 1879 to holders of the M.D. Not all of the Masters' degrees are now given in the Graduate School. In 1930 the School of Education established a course leading to the M.S. in Education; in 1932 the Graduate Course in Business Administration, which had been offered in the Graduate School since 1 9 2 1 , was transferred to the Wharton School along with the authority to grant the degree of M.B.A.; and since 1936, when the D.Sc. was abolished, the M.S. in the various branches of engineering except chemical engineering has been conferred by the engineering schools. But in spite of the consequent transfer of a considerable number of students to other schools, the enrollment at present is but slightly less than it was in the peak year 1931-32, when there were 2,025 students. In 1938-39 there were 1,597, w h o m 53 received the Ph.D. and 152 the M.A. or M.S. Until 1896 all examinations for degrees were oral and public, and all the members of the faculty of whatever department were privileged to question the candidates. Whether in the spirit of f u n or with an earnest desire to maintain educational standards, some of the professors badgered the candidates unmercifully. T h e story is told of one who asked, " W h o wrote the Areopagitica?" W h e n the candidate confessed ignorance, the professor said, " M y second question will be, What else did he write?" Several years of discussion ultimately led to the decision that each department might examine its own students privately and by means of written examinations if it saw fit. However, to insure the maintenance of high standards by making public the work of each student, the ceremonial of presentation and the requirement that the dissertation be published were put into effect in 1900. T h e graduate faculty, which now numbers 3 1 1 , has usually con-

82

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

sisted of professors f r o m all other faculties, b u t there are exceptions to this: the Professor of C o m p a r a t i v e P h i l o l o g y , w h o is c h a i r m a n of the D e p a r t m e n t of I n d o - E u r o p e a n P h i l o l o g y , a n d the entire staff of the D e p a r t m e n t of O r i e n t a l Studies. T h e s e two d e p a r t m e n t s and a third, the D e p a r t m e n t of History of R e l i g i o n , are a part of the G r a d u a t e School organization for the reason that their w o r k is p r i m a r i l y g r a d u a t e in nature. T h e y offer certain courses, however, in the u n d e r g r a d u a t e schools. T h e administrative organization of the G r a d u a t e School r e m a i n e d practically u n c h a n g e d u n t i l the S p r i n g of 1936, w h e n the faculty was separated into f o u r divisions: the B i o l o g i c a l Sciences, the H u m a n i t i e s , the Physical Sciences, a n d the Social Sciences. E a c h division elects its o w n c h a i r m a n a n d its o w n e x e c u t i v e committee, a n d also appoints three members of the C o u n c i l of the G r a d u a t e School, w h i c h is presided over by the D e a n . T h e chief advantage of this new o r g a n i z a t i o n is the provision f o r specialized executive committees w h i c h are more efficient than a single e x e c u t i v e committee such as existed previously. O n e of the concerns of the e x e c u t i v e c o m m i t t e e s a n d the C o u n c i l is the q u a l i t y a n d extent of the research carried o n by b o t h faculty and students. T w o o t h e r organizations in the U n i v e r s i t y are entirely concerned w i t h research and w i t h the p u b l i c a t i o n of its results. O n e of these is the B o a r d of G r a d u a t e E d u c a t i o n a n d Research, w h i c h was established in 1931 w i t h jurisdiction o v e r all research activities t h r o u g h o u t the University. A n o t h e r is the F a c u l t y R e s e a r c h C o m mittee. By a l l o t t i n g funds, a r r a n g i n g t e a c h i n g schedules more conveniently, a n d in many other ways, both of these h a v e been effective in s t i m u l a t i n g research. Fellowships a n d scholarships are a necessity in the w o r k of any g r a d u a t e school. T h i s was recognized by Provost C h a r l e s C . Harrison, and in 1895, o n e year after he had assumed office, he gave the University its first large e n d o w m e n t for f e l l o w s h i p s a n d scholarships in the G r a d u a t e School by setting u p the G e o r g e L e i b H a r r i s o n F u n d . Since then the e n d o w m e n t s for this p u r p o s e h a v e been increased, a n d in a d d i t i o n the University a w a r d s thirty or more scholarships w h i c h p r o v i d e free tuition. B u t the s u p p l y is considerably short of the d e m a n d , for each year nearly five h u n d r e d a p p l i c a t i o n s are received. Indo-European Philology: T h e o r d i n a r y P h . D . is r e q u i r e d to h a v e a sight-reading k n o w l e d g e of F r e n c h a n d G e r m a n , a n d if he k n o w s other m o d e r n languages a n d Greek a n d L a t i n besides, he is n o or-

GRADUATE

SCHOOL

83

dinary Ph.D. But even the latter linguistic accomplishments are mere preliminaries to professors of Indo-European philology, who are concerned with Sanskrit and the later Indian dialects, Iranian, and perhaps Hittite, in addition to most of the European languages in their ancient and modern forms. Indeed, the list includes languages which exist only as hypotheses, for instance, primitive Germanic and the original Indo-European itself. T h e founder of the Department of Indo-European Philology was Morton W. Easton, A.B., Yale, 1863; M.D., Columbia, 1867; Ph.D., Yale, 1 8 7 1 . T h e last degree was taken in Sanskrit, to which he had turned as a result of his interest in linguistics as a branch of physiology. Dr. Easton's philology, no doubt, would be considerably revised today, for he died in 1917, but it is certain that he was a man of unusual learning. His teaching included Sanskrit, general comparative philology, the linguistics of Greek and Latin, phonetics, and Old and Middle English. A n inspiring teacher, he revealed an astounding range of exact knowledge, which embraced such remote subjects as botany and heraldry. It is said that on occasion he substituted with notable eclat as a teacher of calculus. T h e r e is some uncertainty concerning the proper date to assign for the founding of the department which Dr. Easton headed. H e had been appointed Instructor in French and Elocution in the College in 1880, and Professor of Comparative Philology in the Graduate School in 1883, continuing for some years to teach French and Elocution. Perhaps, then, the Department was founded in 1883, but neither the Graduate School nor Dr. Easton as Professor of Comparative Philology had any students until 1885. In that year twelve intellectually robust undergraduates requested a course in Sanskrit, and the date of founding might therefore be assigned to the year in which the Department began to function. Indeed, from 1869 to 1880 Samuel S. Haldeman bore the title of Professor of Comparative Philology, but there is no evidence that he did any teaching or even ventured more than occasionally from his home near Columbia, Pennsylvania. Because of the importance of Sanskrit in Dr. Easton's work, the Department was known as the Department of Comparative Philology and Sanskrit until 1897. I n year the name changed to Indo-European Philology, in 1914 to Indo-European Philology and Sanskrit, and in 1931 to Indo-European Philology again. T h e last change resulted from the organization of a new Department of Oriental Studies, with which the Professor of Sanskrit has since

84

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

been connected, though the linguistic courses in Sanskrit c o n t i n u e d to be an essential part of the w o r k of the D e p a r t m e n t of IndoE u r o p e a n Philology. A t the same time the D e p a r t m e n t was reorganized to include all the linguistic courses of g r a d u a t e r a n k g i v e n in the D e p a r t m e n t s of English, R o m a n i c , a n d G e r m a n i c languages, as well as the linguistic courses in other I n d o - E u r o p e a n languages, i n c l u d i n g Balto-Slavonic, G r e e k a n d L a t i n , a n d I n d o - I r a n i a n . As a result the D e p a r t m e n t has a faculty of n i n e r e c r u i t e d m a i n l y f r o m various departments u n d e r the c h a i r m a n s h i p of D r . R o l a n d G r u b b Kent. Dr. K e n t was a p p o i n t e d Instructor in G r e e k a n d L a t i n i n 1904. In 1909 he became Assistant Professor of C o m p a r a t i v e P h i l o l o g y , o f f e r i n g courses in L a t i n and G r e e k linguistics, I t a l i c a n d G r e e k dialects, Sanskrit, O l d Persian a n d A v e s t a n , a n d later in L i t h u a n i a n . I n i g i 6 he succeeded Dr. Easton, w h o h a d retired in 1 9 1 3 , as Professor of C o m p a r a t i v e Philology. A v o l u m i n o u s w r i t e r a n d past president of the A m e r i c a n Oriental Society, D r . K e n t has been conspicuously active in the L i n g u i s t i c Society of A m e r i c a since its f o u n d i n g in 1924. Oriental Studies: T h e first evidence of interest i n O r i e n t a l studies at the University of Pennsylvania was entirely extra-curricular. It consisted of the publication in 1858 by three u n d e r g r a d u a t e s of a Report of the Committee Appointed by the Philomathean Society of the University of Pennsylvania to Translate the Inscription on the Rosetta Stone. Based on C h a m p o l l i o n ' s p u b l i c a t i o n of the key to the ancient E g y p t i a n , the w o r k was a chef-d'oeuvre, w i t h its original Chromolithographie plates and its p h i l o l o g i c a l e x p o s i t i o n of the ancient languages on the R o s e t t a Stone. B u t the f o r m a l entrance of the U n i v e r s i t y i n t o the field of Oriental studies came in 1885, w i t h the a p p o i n t m e n t of D r . J . P. Peters as Professor of H e b r e w , a n d Morris J a s t r o w as L e c t u r e r in A r a b i c a n d R a b b i n i c a l L i t e r a t u r e , later Professor of Semitic L a n g u a g e s a n d L i b r a r i a n of the University. A still m o r e a m b i t i o u s project was the University's excavations, u n d e r the d i r e c t i o n of D r . Peters, at N i p p u r f r o m 1888 to 1 8 9 1 . T h e s e excavations w e r e c a r r i e d o n by the first A m e r i c a n expedition of the k i n d in the O r i e n t . W i t h D r . Peters was associated Dr. Η . V. Hilprecht, the first o c c u p a n t of the U n i versity's chair of Assyriology, e n d o w e d by M r . E . W . C l a r k , the patron of the e x p e d i t i o n s — t h e first chair of this title in the w o r l d . T h e s e beginnings c u l m i n a t e d in the f o u n d i n g of the U n i v e r s i t y M u s e u m by Provost W i l l i a m P e p p e r . U n t i l the p u b l i c a t i o n of the

GRADUATE

SCHOOL

85

series of volumes on the expeditions to Nippur, the University was little known abroad except for its Medical and Dental Schools. With these masters and the rich treasures of the Museum, there was an immediate blossoming of Oriental studies in the University. It at once took leadership in the fresh science of Assyriology, producing such scholars as A. T . Clay, who later established the study of Assyriology at Yale, and D. D. Luckenbill and Edward Chiera, both of whom later joined the newly founded Oriental Institute at Chicago. A number of brilliant foreign students were also brought to the University: in Egyptology W. M. Müller, Hermann Ranke, later Professor at Heidelberg and now at Pennsylvania once more as Professor of Egyptology and Curator in the Museum, and B. G. Gunn, later Professor at Cambridge; in Semitics S. H. Langdon, later Professor at Cambridge, A. F. Ungnad, later Professor at Göttingen and Berlin, C. L. Woolley, and Leon Legrain, the present occupant of the Clark chair of Assyriology. Both in the University Museum and in the Graduate School, studies relating to the Middle East and Far East were developed. The first classes in Sanskrit were given by Dr. M. W. Easton. Later Dr. Franklin Edgerton served as Professor of Sanskrit, subsequently joining the Yale faculty. In the meantime Dr. Jastrow had become an Orientalist of recognized distinction, with great interest in biblical studies, and later Dr. G. A. Barton, now Professor Emeritus of Semitic Languages, and Dr. J . A. Montgomery, now Professor Emeritus of Hebrew, had become ranking officers of the American School of Oriental Research and had served as directors of the School in Jerusalem. Carrying on Peters' and Jastrow's interest in biblical studies, these two members of the Department have each contributed a volume to the International Critical Commentary (on Ecclesiastes and Daniel), with another volume in preparation by Dr. Montgomery. These and a volume on Ezra-Nehemiah by an alumnus make the University's contribution to that important series the largest among American institutions. The University has now the most inclusive group devoted to Oriental studies to be found in the country. All of the members of the present staff have had notable experience in their several foreign fields—in Palestine, Egypt, Iraq, India, and China. Three members of the Department have worked in India, Palestine, and Iraq as Guggenheim fellows, and these and others have made various visits to the Orient for archaeological and literary research. Dr. W. N. Brown, chairman of the Department and Professor of Sanskrit, is President of the American School of Indie Studies, and Dr. E. A.

86

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Speiser, Professor of Semitics, is a director of the American School of Oriental Research in Baghdad. T h e latter has conducted several expeditions in Iraq in partnership with the University Museum and the School of Baghdad, the results having been published in several notable volumes. A t present all of the editors of the American Oriental Journal are University men. History of Religion: It was in 1893-94 that a special grouping of courses under the title "History of Religions" first appeared in the curriculum. T h e s e courses were offered in the Graduate School by some of the most prominent scholars of that period, Professors Hilprecht, Jastrow, Brinton, and Easton. Not until 1 9 1 0 was an independent department organized under the leadership of Professor Morris Jastrow, who taught and wrote extensively on Semitic religions, languages, and literatures, and served as Professor of Semitic Languages from 1892 until his death in 1 9 2 1 . Another eminent contributor to the study of the history of religion was Dr. George A. Barton, who also served as chairman of the Department for a number of years and is now Professor Emeritus of Semitic Languages. T h e primary impetus to the study of the history of religion has come from scholars who have dealt with Oriental history and culture, for all the major religions of the modern world have originated in the N e a r East or the F a r East, but equally important contributions have been made by specialists in other fields. T h e study of religion, in fact, demands a rich equipment in many branches of learning—linguistics, art and archaeology, ethnology, philosophy, psychology—and a historical perspective which ranges from the fragmentary data on the worship of prehistoric races and the better documented beliefs of contemporary aboriginal peoples to the refinements of J e w i s h or Christian theology. T h e range is so extensive that the thirty graduate courses now offered by the Department of History of Religion are given by members of seven other departments: Anthropology, Germanic Languages, Greek, History, L a t i n , Oriental Studies, and Philosophy. A n eighth department, English, cooperates in the courses given to undergraduates who study the Bible in English. B u t it should not be inferred that the history of religion is a subject composed merely of elements of other branches of learning. For many decades it has been regarded as an independent field of research, occupying a prominent position in many institutions of higher learning both here and abroad. N o chair devoted exclusively

UNIVERSITY

LIBRARY

87

to the history of religion, however, has yet been established at the University.

THE

UNIVERSITY

LIBRARY

"A fair Librarie is not onely an ornament and credit to the place where it is, but an useful commoditie by itself to the publick." So wrote an English librarian three hundred years ago. Successive generations have made the Library of the University of Pennsylvania a credit to the institution, even though the ornamental value of the building it occupies is questionable; and year by year it is becoming a more useful "commoditie" to the University, to Philadelphia, and to visiting scholars. T h e Library stands on Thirty-fourth Street, facing College Hall and flanked on the south by Irvine Auditorium. T h e main part of the building was erected in 1890, from plans drawn after consultation with the most eminent librarians of the day. It was a day when grotesque ornamentation was considered art, and the chief requirement for interior plans for a library was to give readers no easier access to the books than was necessary. T h e building has been frequently enlarged, to provide space for the constantly increasing collection of books and a vastly increased body of readers, and today it contains nearly 750,000 volumes—more than double the original maximum capacity—and serves a student population nearly ten times that of 1890. Daily between 8:15 in the morning and 10:00 at night some three thousand persons visit the Library, withdrawing approximately one thousand books. Most of these go to the circulation, reference, and periodical desks, which are in the reading rooms on the first floor. Lesser numbers visit the special reference rooms and seminar rooms on the second and third floors; and only graduate students and faculty are permitted in the stacks, which are at the southern end of the building. But the basement, seen by but few of the visitors, is perhaps as busy a place as any in the Library. Here are extensive offices where members of the staff order and catalogue new books, and here also is the union catalogue, which lists books in the Library of Congress and the important university and college libraries. It is indispensable, for a modern library must be able to inform readers where books may be borrowed and must arrange for inter-library loans. A m o n g the books now crowding the shelves of the old building and its additions are many valuable collections, some of which in themselves constitute libraries of considerable size. A great library

88

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

for research cannot be built up in a day, and ours has been forming since 1750, when a committee of the Trustees was authorized to spend " a Sum not exceeding one hundred pounds Sterling to be disposed of in Latin and Greek Authors, Maps, Drafts and Instruments for the Use of the Academy." One member of this committee was Benjamin Franklin, that bibliophile of the most practical sort, who loved books chiefly as sources of useful information and stimulators of thought. Among the memorials of the early days still preserved in the Library are several volumes presented by Franklin and others selected for the Academy by him. T w o of these are the first edition, then new, of Johnson's Dictionary, and another bestseller of the time, a Chronology and History of the World, from the Creation to the Year of Christ, 1753. On the right of the main entrance as one approaches the building, is a "Shakespeare Garden," directly beneath the windows of the Furness Memorial Library of books relating to Shakespeare. This memorial occupies the most recent addition to the building, erected in 1930. In the Garden are cultivated as many as possible of the flowers and plants mentioned in Shakespeare's plays. As one enters the building, the door on the right immediately inside the entrance opens into this Furness Memorial, which contains some twelve thousand volumes of Shakespearean and other Elizabethan dramatic literature, acquired by Horace Howard Furness and by his son in connection with their editing of the Variorum edition of Shakespeare's plays. T h e library which they accumulated came to the University as a bequest from the younger Dr. Furness and his wife. T h e interior of the Furness Library is patterned closely after the interior of Merton College, at Oxford University. Here are copies of all the Folios and of many of the Quartos, and many contemporary books containing mention of Shakespeare or the sources from which he drew in writing his plays. Here, too, are a number of interesting Shakespearean relics: among them a pair of gloves worn by Shakespeare, the dirk of Macbeth used by Edwin Booth as Macbeth, and the cloak worn by Sir Henry Irving as Shylock. A small room off the Furness Library contains a piece of equipment now an essential to any library devoted to literary and historical research. T h i s is a projection apparatus for the use of microfilm reproductions of rare books. Directly opposite the entrance to the building is the outer reading room, in which are the circulation desk, where books may be obtained for borrowing or for use in the building, and the card cata-

UNIVERSITY

LIBRARY

»9

logue of the books contained not only in the main library building but in the various departmental libraries located elsewhere. In this room are a number of cases in which are displayed volumes acquired by the Library in its earliest days and various other works illustrative of different phases of the University's history. At the rear of this room, opposite the entrance, is another of the choice collections by which the Library has been enriched, as valuable in its field as is the Furness Library to Shakespearean scholars. This is the Henry Charles Lea Library of Medieval History, containing approximately twelve thousand volumes and a large number of manuscripts. T h e collection was acquired over a long period of years by Mr. Lea while preparing his books on the Spanish inquisition, on witchcraft, and on various aspects of ecclesiastical history. Included are more than one hundred volumes of incunabula. T h e Library was bequeathed to the University by Mr. Lea, and through the generosity of his children an addition to the building was erected in 1924 to give it suitable accommodation. T h e room in which the famous scholar's library now has its permanent home is in effect the actual room in which he did his work, for it is an almost exact reproduction of that room, and the bookcases, fittings, ceiling, and all woodwork were removed from his house and reassembled here. Beyond the outer reading room (on the left as one enters) is the main reference room, constructed on the once popular plan of semicircular outline and dark alcoves. Here the "solitary student" was once pictured, "as secluded as though he were in a rock-hewn cell of the Valley of Engedi." T h e semicircle and the alcoves remain, but the students have banished solitude and seclusion. In one of the alcoves of the reference room is now shelved a notable collection of eighteenth-century English fiction, which includes first editions of most of the major novels of that century and more than fifteen hundred volumes by minor novelists. It is known as the Godfrey F. Singer Memorial. T h e collection was formed by the late Dr. Singer while a graduate student and later an instructor in English at the University. After his death in 1934 it was presented to the Library by his parents. Opening from the rear of the outer reading room and adjoining a large periodical room is the Librarian's office, in which are cases containing the Curtis Collection of Franklin Imprints—placed here until a new building shall make possible its more suitable display. This collection, a gift from the Curtis Publishing Company in 1920, has few rivals as an exceptionally large collection of books printed

9°

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

by B e n j a m i n Franklin. Some of the choice treasures of the collection are on view in the e x h i b i t i o n cases in the r e a d i n g room, among them the Proposals Relating to the Education of Youth in Pensilvania, written, printed, and distributed by F r a n k l i n , a n d an important milestone in the history of the University. Space does not permit a description of o t h e r special collections and treasures, r a n g i n g f r o m Sanskrit manuscripts to early A m e r i c a n fiction and drama, and i n c l u d i n g Spanish a n d Italian literature, the classics of Greece and R o m e (particularly a notable collection of Aristotle, i n c l u d i n g early editions of his writings a n d important translations and commentaries, w h i c h has been a c q u i r e d in recent years through the generosity of Dr. C h a r l e s W . Burr) a n d many other fields. M e n t i o n must be made, however, of o n e r o o m of historical interest, the Founders' R o o m . T h i s is o n the second floor, o n the first l a n d i n g of the stairway ascending f r o m the entrance hall. In this r o o m have been assembled all of the books a c q u i r e d by the Library before 1820, w h e n the first printed catalogue was published, w h i c h are still in our possession, a n d a n u m b e r of interesting relics. T h e books include ninety-two volumes w h i c h r e m a i n f r o m a collection of one hundred volumes presented by L o u i s X V I of France in 1784. A m o n g the relics two that are most h i g h l y prized are a desk a n d a chair that belonged to B e n j a m i n F r a n k l i n .

THE

UNIVERSITY

PRESS

T h e University of Pennsylvania buys books for its L i b r a r y , a n d like many modern universities it also publishes t h e m — t h r o u g h the University of Pennsylvania Press. A l t h o u g h " T h e University Press C o m p a n y " was chartered in 1869 to publish The Penn Monthly, a n d the title-page of a University M u s e u m report of 1890 bears the i m p r i n t of the " U n i v e r s i t y Press," the first organized program for University p u b l i s h i n g b e g a n w h e n T h e Press of the University of Pennsylvania was incorporated in 1920. It published three books, u n d e r the supervision of the Secretary of the University, but it d i d not c o m m e n c e active o p e r a t i o n until 1927. Shortly thereafter the corporation was dissolved, a n d the University of Pennsylvania Press became a d e p a r t m e n t of the University. From M a y 1927 to D e c e m b e r 1931 the office of the University Press was in what had been the d i n i n g r o o m and k i t c h e n of an old residence at 3438 W a l n u t Street. It then m o v e d to its present quarters at 3622 Locust Street. T h e b u i l d i n g , a two-and-a-half-story brick

UNIVERSITY

MUSEUM

91

cottage, is the sole survivor of a row of four two-family dwellings built when this section of West Philadelphia was known as Hamilton Village, many years before the University moved out from Ninth Street. The University Press issues about twenty books a year. Its list is a general one, with a natural emphasis on Pennsylvania source material and the work of University authors. It has also published books by faculty members of these neighboring institutions: Bryn Mawr, Swarthmore, Haverford, Lafayette, Pennsylvania State, Delaware, Bucknell, Rutgers, Temple, and Ursinus. Several important series, covering many fields of learning, make up a vital part of the publication program. They include: the Industrial Research Studies of the Wharton School of Finance and Commerce, the History of the Philadelphia Theatre, the Eldridge Reeves Johnson Foundation for Medical Physics, the A. S. W. Rosenbach Fellowship in Bibliography, the George Dana Boardman Lectureship in Christian Ethics, the University's series in Romance Languages and Literature, the Morris Arboretum Monographs, Publications of the Philadelphia Anthropological Society, and Pennsylvania Lives. The University Press acts as publisher for the University Museum, the Cooper Foundation of Swarthmore College, the Edward Eugene Loomis Memorial Foundation of Lafayette College, the American Schools of Oriental Research, and as American publisher of Studies and Documents, edited by Kirsopp and Silva Lake. Journals appearing under its imprint include the Hispanic Review and Pennsylvania History. T h e Oxford University Press is the London agent and co-publisher of the University Press for Great Britain and its dominions. All books issued by the Press carry the approval of the Committee on Publications, which consists of nine members appointed from the faculty and the administrative officers, each member serving a three-year term.

THE UNIVERSITY

MUSEUM

The University Museum is one of the most widely known divisions of the University of Pennsylvania and the occupant of what is perhaps the University's most beautiful building. This stands on a tract of twelve acres south of Spruce Street and east of Thirty-fourth granted to the University by the City of Philadelphia in 1894. On the corner, facing north over the Campus, is a statue by Carl Bitter

9*

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

of the late Provost William Pepper, founder of the Museum and of many other departments of the University. T h e Museum building, designed in a style inspired by the roundarched brick architecture that prevailed in northern Italy from the twelfth to the fourteenth century, is of brick, limestone, and marble. T h e principal entrance is through an ornamental iron gateway on Spruce Street, past a reflecting pool flanked by wings of the Museum. Farther to the east two impressive gateways surmounted by marble figures guard a carriage entrance, but most of the Museum's hundred thousand visitors a year walk in past the pool and up a flight of steps to a huge oak doorway. Inside the doorway are marble staircases leading down to a lower level of exhibition rooms and up to an entrance hall off which branch exhibition rooms and, at the rear, the Charles Custis Harrison Hall. T h e latter is a rotunda ninety feet in diameter and ninety feet in height lighted by a series of windows high up under the arches that support the dome. On the floor level below the rotunda is a circular auditorium of perfect acoustics seating 750 people. T h e Museum as it exists at present was built in four stages. T h e original section, which was completed in 1899, is in the shape of a U surrounding the reflecting pool. Its construction was made possible by a grant from the Pennsylvania Legislature and funds raised through the efforts of Provost Pepper and Mrs. Cornelius Stevenson, Secretary of the Department of Archaeology, as the Museum was originally known, which then as now had its own Board of Managers. Provost Pepper himself was a principal donor; others were William L. Elkins, P. A. B. Widener, Bernard N. Farren, Daniel Baugh, and the heirs of Edwin H. Fitler, all prominent Philadelphians, in whose honor various rooms and halls of the original building have been named. O n the first floor of this section of the Museum are exhibited the archaeological and ethnological collections from North, Central, and South America. On the second floor are the Babylonian (the most comprehensive in the country), early Islamic, and later Islamic collections. Here also are administrative offices and the library of fifteen thousand volumes on archaeology, anthropology, and allied subjects, including the Brinton Library, which contains the Berendt manuscripts and many important examples of aboriginal literature. T h e second section to be completed (in 1915) is the tower that contains Harrison Hall and the auditorium. T h e Hall is named for the late Provost Harrison, who served as President of the Museum

UNIVERSITY

MUSEUM.

93

from 1917 until 1929, a period during which, largely because of his own generosity and support, the Museum enjoyed perhaps its most extraordinary growth. The Hall contains the finest collection of Chinese sculpture in the world. The auditorium is used chiefly for public lectures, given on Saturday afternoons by distinguished archaeologists and travelers. Begun in 1900 as a part of the Museum's educational program, these lectures were later endowed by the children of Dr. Harrison. Adjoining the tower to the east is the Coxe Memorial Wing, which was completed in 1926. This wing was named for the late Eckley B. Coxe, Jr., President of the Museum from 1910 to 1916 and a munificent donor. On the first floor are some of the most striking exhibits in the Museum. One of these consists of great columns and doorways from the palace of Merenptah (the Pharaoh of the Exodus) at Memphis, obtained by the Coxe expeditions to Egypt. Another is the tomb of Ra-ka-pou, which was presented by the late John Wanamaker. This floor also contains Arabic and Palestinian collections, the latter obtained by the Museum's own expeditions at Beth-Shan, and an exhibit of the art of India. The second floor of the Coxe wing consists mainly of an impressive hall, 75 feet high and 136 feet long, devoted to Egyptian sculpture. A statue of Rameses II uncovered at Ahnas-el-Medine dominates the exhibit. Smaller galleries on this floor also contain Egyptian sculptures and objects of daily use, and in one room is an archaeological collection recovered by the four Coxe expeditions to Nubia. Unequaled save by the collections in the Cairo Museum, the latter exhibit is especially interesting because little investigation has taken place in Nubia and because the finds are a link between the culture of Egypt and the peoples to the south. The last wing of the Museum completed thus far extends east from the base of the U that forms the original section of the Museum. It was completed in 1929. The first floor of this wing houses the Educational Department, which conducts classes and gallery talks attended by thirty thousand school children each year from Philadelphia and its vicinity. The second floor contains the ethnological exhibits from Africa and the islands of the Pacific. The many bizarre African figures, forming one of the finest collections in existence, attract numerous art students. Especially notable are the bronzes and ivory carvings of the Negroes of Benin in West Africa. T h e third floor, known as the Sharpe Gallery because it was presented and endowed by the children of Mr. and Mrs. Richard

94

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Sharpe, contains the M u s e u m ' s great collections f r o m Greece, Italy, a n d the islands of the M e d i t e r r a n e a n . N o t all of the M u s e u m is seen by the general p u b l i c . A special room, a v a i l a b l e to visiting scholars, houses the u n r i v a l e d T a b l e t Library w i t h its more than twenty thousand c u n e i f o r m documents f r o m N i p p u r , Ur, a n d other i m p o r t a n t B a b y l o n i a n cities. T h e r e are also laboratories f o r p h o t o g r a p h y , f o r m o d e l i n g a n d the maintenance a n d r e p a i r of exhibits, a n d n u m e r o u s storage rooms for material w a i t i n g to be exhibited. O n e storage r o o m contains films recording the progress of expeditions, the methods of e x c a v a t i o n and restoration, a n d the manners a n d customs of p r i m i t i v e tribes. T h e latter type of film will be of u n u s u a l scientific v a l u e in later years, when civilization may have m a d e an e n d of either the tribe o r its customs. M a n y of the exhibits in the M u s e u m h a v e b e e n a c q u i r e d by purchase or by g i f t , but expeditions are responsible f o r most of the acquisitions. A complete list of these cannot be g i v e n , b u t beginning w i t h the f a m e d e x p e d i t i o n u n d e r Peters a n d H i l p r e c h t to N i p p u r , w h i c h was f o l l o w e d by the even more n o t a b l e e x p e d i t i o n (jointly w i t h the British M u s e u m ) to U r , the M u s e u m has carried o n almost continuous w o r k in M e s o p o t a m i a , o t h e r sites b e i n g at F a r a K h a f a j e , T e p e G a w r a (with the B a g h d a d School of Oriental Research), a n d T e l l B i l l a h . I n I r a n , w h e r e w o r k has been done at T e p e Hissar a n d R a y y , an interesting project was the M u s e u m ' s archaeological air survey of ancient Persia. In E u r o p e excavations have been m a d e in Crete, C y p r u s , Italy, F r a n c e , C e n t r a l E u r o p e , and the C r i m e a . I n A f r i c a , n u m e r o u s expeditions have been sent to E g y p t a n d N u b i a a n d others to regions f a r t h e r south. T h e most remote e x p e d i t i o n s h a v e visited C h i n a , K o r e a , J a p a n , B o r n e o , S u m a t r a , a n d the L u c h u Islands; a n d nearer home the three A m e r i c a s — N o r t h , C e n t r a l , a n d S o u t h — h a v e received plenty of attention. T h e s e e x p e d i t i o n s h a v e e x t e n d e d f r o m A l a s k a a n d m a n y other regions in N o r t h A m e r i c a , t h r o u g h G u a t e m a l a , to the A m a z o n area, southern C o l o m b i a , a n d Peru. I n recent years an i m p o r t a n t phase of the M u s e u m ' s w o r k , carried on i n cooperation w i t h the A c a d e m y of N a t u r a l Sciences, has b e e n the investigation of the origin of m a n in A m e r i c a . Obviously the M u s e u m does not exist merely f o r the purpose of a c q u i r i n g a n d e x h i b i t i n g archaeological a n d ethnological objects. Since 1888, w h e n the D e p a r t m e n t of A r c h a e o l o g y was established, the first in any A m e r i c a n university, research has been the p r i n c i p a l purpose. F a m e d scholars have been a n d c o n t i n u e to be on the staff,

UNIVERSITY

MUSEUM

95

the results of their work being published in the Museum's Bulletin and Journal and in numerous separate publications from time to time. T h e Museum cooperates closely with such divisions of the University as the School of Fine Arts and the Departments of Anthropology, History, Greek, and Latin, and in some instances, notably the Department of Oriental Studies, members of the staff serve as professors.

THE STUDY OF LAW

The Law School Building THE Law School building, which is at Thirty-fourth and Chestnut streets, is a brick and limestone structure designed in English Renaissance style of the time of W i l l i a m and Mary. It was dedicated in February 1900. T h e exterior is impressive, as is also the entrance hall with its vaulted ceiling and the broad marble staircase leading to the second floor. O n the first floor are faculty and administrative offices, with those of the Dean to the left of the entrance. A small suite on the west side houses the main office of the American L a w Institute, an organization founded in 1923 under the leadership of the late Elihu Root for the purpose of restating the common law. A Code of Criminal Procedure, consisting of a series of model statutes intended to serve as a basis for the reform of adjective criminal law, has already been published by the Institute and has been adopted by a number of states. T h e classrooms of the L a w School are also on the first floor. T h e y are adequate to care for a student body of nearly five hundred. T w o of the rooms bear famous names. O n e of them is W h a r t o n Hall, maintenance of which is provided for by a gift from the family of George M. Wharton. T h e other is Price Hall, named for the wellknown Philadelphia lawyer and friend of the University, Eli Kirk Price. T h e arrangement of seats in Price Hall is similar to that of the House of Lords. T h e room is larger than is required for ordinary classroom purposes, but it is invaluable for meetings of greater portions of the student body than the ordinary class unit. T h e second floor is devoted almost exclusively to the Biddle L a w Library and its three principal reading rooms, McMurtrie, McKean, and Sharswood Halls. A t the head of the staircase in the central part of the building is the stack room, which contains most of the 102,000 volumes of the Biddle Library. Behind the stack room and overlooking Thirty-fourth Street is McMurtrie Hall, named for Richard C. McMurtrie, a prominent Philadelphia lawyer whose portrait hangs in the room. A d j o i n i n g is the office of the Librarian. 97

98

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

O n a mezzanine floor off M c M u r t r i e H a l l are t w o handsomely furnished rooms p r o v i d e d by H e n r y R e e d H a t f i e l d to house the growing collection of p u b l i c a n d private international law. In another r o o m o p e n i n g off M c M u r t r i e H a l l , the A m e r i c a n L a w Institute has deposited for safe preservation but not for loan its valuable set of drafts of each restatement, s h o w i n g the successive stages through w h i c h these passed. Here, in other bookcases, available for circulation, is the L a w School's o w n large collection of the p u b l i s h e d restatements w i t h all state annotations, the published tentative and final drafts, a n d proceedings of the Institute, all of these echoing the great voices of the L a w S c h o o l — G e o r g e W . Wickersham, G e o r g e W h a r t o n Pepper, Justice O w e n J. Roberts, W i l l i a m D r a p e r Lewis, H e r b e r t F. G o o d r i c h , Francis H . Bohlen, W i l l i a m E. M i k e l l , E d w i n R . Keedy, a n d still others of the faculty w h o have contributed to the c l a r i f y i n g of the c o m m o n law. A n o t h e r r o o m is devoted exclusively to the briefs of the Supreme a n d Superior C o u r t s of Pennsylvania, to w h i c h , it is hoped, will be added microfilm r e p r o d u c t i o n s of the briefs of the U n i t e d States Supreme C o u r t . Beside the Brief r o o m is the Periodical r o o m , w h i c h contains A m e r i c a n , English, English C o l o n i a l , a n d f o r e i g n legal periodicals, nearly two h u n d r e d in all. M c K e a n H a l l , n a m e d for T h o m a s M c K e a n , T r u s t e e of the University and C h i e f Justice a n d G o v e r n o r of Pennsylvania, a n d Sharsw o o d Hall, n a m e d f o r J u d g e G e o r g e Sharswood, famous jurist and former Dean of the School, are large r e a d i n g rooms e x t e n d i n g the w i d t h of the n o r t h a n d south ends, respectively, of the second floor. M c K e a n H a l l is used by first-year students, each of w h o m is assigned his o w n desk. Sharswood H a l l is for general use. I n 1938 Sharswood H a l l was transformed into an open-shelf r e a d i n g r o o m w i t h alcoves h o l d i n g eight thousand volumes, w h i c h before the end of the student's first year have dispelled some of the mystery attaching to reports official a n d unofficial, citations, encyclopedias, digests, key numbers, c o m p i l e d statutes, a n n o t a t e d cases, a n d periodical literature. THE LAW

SCHOOL

Instruction in the law has been given by the U n i v e r s i t y of Pennsylvania in the o l d A c a d e m y buildings at F o u r t h a n d A r c h Streets, in the "Presidential M a n s i o n " and then C o l l e g e H a l l o n N i n t h Street, in the present C o l l e g e Hall, in a d o w n t o w n office b u i l d i n g , a n d in Congress H a l l o n I n d e p e n d e n c e Square. B u t more signifi-

STUDY

OF LAW

99

cant than these changes of location, except as improved facilities have made possible improved teaching, are the changes in point of view which have come during the 150 years since lectures on law were first given in the University. At present the Law School does most of its teaching through a faculty which gives its full time to the study and teaching of the law and to students who with but few exceptions give their full time to their studies. T h e beginning of legal education in Philadelphia was quite different. In 1790, long before the LL.B. and LL.M. now conferred were thought of, the famous James Wilson gave a series of law lectures in the College to a fashionable and educated audience, including George Washington and some of the members of his cabinet. A similar series was given in 1817 by Charles Willing Hare, a lawyer of distinguished ability. But such lectures were on public law and government and were designed for a thoughtful public, both lay and legal, and were not intended to provide instruction in the technique of professional practice. When the Law Department of the University was reorganized in 1850, Judge George Sharswood, a distinguished Philadelphia lawyer, gave the first series of lectures. A law faculty was established in 1852, with Peter McCall and E. Spencer Miller, both highly successful practitioners, as Judge Sharswood's assistants. In this period, however, the teaching was done by gentlemen who had already made names for themselves upon the bench or at the bar, and the teaching continued to be incidental to their other work. Indeed, it was not until the latter part of the nineteenth century that the concept of law teaching as a separate branch of the legal profession became established. At Pennsylvania the change came with the appointment of Dr. William Draper Lewis as Dean of the School. His agreement with the University was that he should devote full time to the work of the School. The School still has on its faculty men engaged in active practice, and their contact with the law in action is valuable to both their colleagues and students, but the School depends on its full-time teachers for the bulk of its instruction and scholarly work. During the earlier period the student's work in the School was likely to be subordinate to regular employment in the office of a practitioner, where he learned the routine of his profession. Today, when increasing government activities with their effects upon the life of the citizen point, perhaps, to a four-year instead of a threeyear course, the student who will benefit most from his course has little time but for work in the classroom, the library, and in two

100

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

other important activities that are a part of the study of law at the University. One of these activities is the extra-curricular study of the law carried on in the ten student law clubs, of which the majority of the students are members. Formed primarily for professional work, the clubs have quarters of their own on the ground floor of the Law School building, where they conduct a series of arguments on legal points for their first-year members, in which upper-classmen or graduates sit as judges. D u r i n g the fall and winter the clubs compete in arguing legal questions before moot courts composed of judges of the Federal and State courts and practising attorneys. In recent years the final argument has been held in the Courtroom of the Supreme Court of Pennsylvania, with the Bench composed of justices of the Court. T h e other activity is the exacting professional job of editing the School's legal periodical, the University of Pennsylvania Law Review. T h e Review is a successor to the American Law Register, and the two combined have the longest continuous history of any legal publication in the country. T h e management and editorial work of the Review is done by student editors, w h o are selected after competitive trials from the top fifth of the second- and third-year classes. T h e faculty participate in the work of the Review as advisers and through contributed articles, which are, of course, but a small part of the annual list of the publications of the faculty. Some of these are contributions to various legal magazines; some are books for student use in this and other institutions; others are legal treatises for the general use of the profession. Many of the faculty have assisted in the work of the American L a w Institute in restatin? Ο the common law, and two were responsible for the Institute's Model Code of Criminal Procedure. The Biddle

Law

Library

T h e tragic misfortune of one of the most distinguished of Philadelphia's legal families became the occasion for the founding of the L a w School Library over half a century ago. W i t h i n the decade 1886 to 1897, George, Algernon Sydney, and Arthur Biddle, the three talented sons of George Washington Biddle, died, and their father's death followed a month after that of Arthur. In 1886, in memory first of George and later of all three sons, the Library was founded by this family by a gift of about five thousand volumes. Additional gifts followed from the Biddle family, including the endowment of the Algernon Sydney Biddle Professorship of Law. In

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY:

X-RAY TREATMENT:

S C H O O L OF MEDICINE

VETERINARY

HOSPITAL

STUDY OF LAW

101

recognition of these benefactions the Trustees of the University in 1893 agreed to allot in perpetuity one-twelfth of the gross receipts of the Law School to support the Library. No longer were students obliged to pay a $3 fee to the Law Association of Philadelphia for the use of its library. Among the precious possessions of the Library is an original of Statham, the first printed abridgment of the common law of the Year Books, supposed to have been published in 1488. This was translated and annotated in 1915 by Margaret Center Klingelsmith, whose long term of service as Librarian coincided with the transition of the Law School from the old type to the modern university educational and research center. Aided by her scholarly attainments, she built up the English, English Colonial, and American collections to a level equaled today by few libraries. When it came time to expand into the foreign field, collections were begun of the law of the Latin-American republics through the help of Dr. Leo S. Rowe (Class of 1897), now Director-General of the Pan-American Union. T h e Roman, Canonical, and modern European Continental field has since been greatly enriched. In 1928 large-scale special acquisitions were made possible by a bequest under the will of Ellis D. Williams. Among these additions should be mentioned the purchase of an exceptionally rich library of comparative criminal law and procedure. More recent purchases from this fund have been the original laws of New Jersey from 1780 to 1799 and a complete set of reprints of the rare session laws of Rhode Island from 1748 to 1800.

TEACHING AND RESEARCH IN MEDICINE

THE MEDICAL

LABORATORIES

SCHOOL

OF

AND

THE

MEDICINE

The Medical Laboratories THE School of Medicine is situated in the extensive structure of brick and limestone, known as the Medical Laboratory, which lies along the south side of Hamilton Walk just west of Thirtysixth Street. The building contains two amphitheatres seating 150 students each, where are given formal demonstrations in the six preclinical subjects—pathology, pharmacology, physiology, bacteriology, anatomy, and physiological chemistry; three lecture rooms in the basement for formal lectures in these subjects; and the medical library of seventeen thousand volumes. It contains as well the offices and laboratories of the departments teaching the preclinical subjects, and museums of anatomy and pathology. On the second floor of the tower over the front entrance are the offices of the VicePresident in Charge of Medical Affairs, the Dean of the School of Medicine, and the Dean of the Graduate School of Medicine. In a broad sense, medical teaching is carried on not only in the laboratories just mentioned, but also in the Laboratory of Public Health and Preventive Medicine; the University Hospital and its various medical and surgical clinics and laboratories; the Graduate Hospital; the Henry Phipps Institute for the Study, Treatment, and Prevention of Tuberculosis; the Evans Institute (Dental School); the Veterinary School and Hospital, and the School of Animal Pathology, to mention only those which are directly a part of the University. The Wistar Institute of Anatomy and Biology, which adjoins the Campus, is an affiliated organization, and its staff carries on biological and anatomical research in close cooperation with the medical faculty of the University. In addition most of Philadelphia's 103

104

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

other hospitals and medical institutions (medical schools excepted) cooperate with the School of Medicine and the Graduate School of Medicine, making a total of nearly sixty medical organizations which contribute to and benefit from the instruction and research in medicine carried on by the University of Pennsylvania. So extensive is the work in medicine that in 1931 the Trustees of the University created the office of Vice-President in Charge of Medical Affairs, to which was named Dr. Alfred Stengel, of the class of 1889 Medicine. Until his death in 1939, Dr. Stengel administered an organization with physical assets valued at nearly $11,000,000, endowments amounting to approximately $12,500,000, and a total annual budget of over $2,000,000. T h e Medical Laboratories, the heart of this organization, comprise the largest single building of the University, exceeded in size only by the University Hospital group, the dormitories, and the combined Palestra and Hutchinson Gymnasium. T h e Laboratories as they now stand are the result of two building operations, one completed in 1904, the other in 1928. Construction of the original unit, then known as " T h e New Medical Laboratory," was made possible through the generosity and energy of Provost C. C. Harrison. It is two stories high and is in the shape of a B, the inner courts providing necessary light, usually from the north, to the large laboratory rooms. T h e architectural design is an English collegiate style of the mid-seventeenth century, which harmonizes with the dormitories stretching along the north side of Hamilton Walk. T h e library, a marble-wainscoted room hung with oil portraits, is directly opposite the front entrance and up a half flight of marble stairs. Over the door is the famous painting by Eakins of Dr. D. Hayes Agnew in his clinic. Before 1928 the library had scanty quarters on the west side of the second floor, and its present room was the upper part of two adjacent amphitheatres each holding three hundred students, a number in excess of that which the rigid restriction of the size of the entering class made necessary. T h e steep pitch of the amphitheatres was therefore lowered and a floor was constructed across the upper half of the original space. T h e result was the reading room of the library and lecture rooms " A " and " B " in the basement, each seating 213. Four departments use most of the space in the original building. T h e Departments of Physiology and Pharmacology occupy the first floor and basement, while the laboratories and museum of the Department of Pathology are on the second floor, along with the

SCHOOL OF MEDICINE

105

Department of Bacteriology. In addition to these, other departments now occupy parts of the New Medical Laboratory. In the basement are the museum of anatomy and numerous small research laboratories allotted from time to time to various departments. On the first floor is the Laboratory for Dermatological Research, established by Dr. Milton J . Hartzell, a machine shop, a photographic darkroom, and a room where a skilled glassblower fashions intricate research apparatus for workers in the School of Medicine and other departments of the University. On the second floor considerable space is occupied by the Department of Research Surgery, which also extends into the newer wing of the building shortly to be described. Although the architects were responsible for the appearance of the New Medical Laboratory and the soundness of its construction, it was designed by the three professors who were then in charge of the work in pathology, physiology, and pharmacology—Simon Flexner, Ε. T . Reichert, and Horatio C. Wood. Anticipating the inevitable growth of their subjects, they provided about a quarter of a million square feet of laboratory floor space, much of which was subdivided into small research laboratories, now considered commonplace but in that day a radical departure from the usual design of medical school buildings. N o place had been reserved in the New Medical Laboratory for anatomy and chemistry. Until 1928 the dissecting room remained on the fourth floor of the Hare Building, with storage equipment in the basement; and chemistry for medical, dental, and veterinary students continued to be taught on the first three floors of that building. Plans for modern laboratories for anatomy and chemistry were realized in 1928, when these departments were given a new home in an addition to the laboratories built in 1904. Half the cost of constructing and equipping the addition was provided by the Rockefeller Foundation and the General Education Board. T h e new laboratories, which join the rear of the original building at the west end and the center, are in the shape of a Y, the longer element of which extends for 264 feet along the "Blockley" wall. T h e y are four stories high (one wing is five stories) over a basement and sub-basement. Space in the building is divided fairly evenly between the Departments of Anatomy and Physiological Chemistry. T h e sub-basement, basement, and the two lower floors are devoted to anatomy, a total of more than sixty thousand feet of floor space, while the two upper floors and storage loft provide more than fifty thousand feet of space for physiological chemistry.

ιο6

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

T H E SCHOOL OF

MEDICINE

T h e r e are two conspicuous features in the limestone carvings on the entrance to the Medical Laboratories. O n e of these is the thistle, w h i c h also forms the o r n a m e n t a l border of the elaborate chart of the professors of the M e d i c a l School w h i c h hangs o n the second floor near the Dean's office; the other is the two medallions w h i c h bear the names of M o r g a n , Shippen, K u h n , and R u s h . T h e thistle a n d the names are closely related. T h e f o r m e r symbolizes the University of E d i n b u r g h , f r o m w h i c h J o h n M o r g a n , W i l l i a m Shippen, Jr., A d a m K u h n , a n d B e n j a m i n R u s h , the first f o u r professors o n the medical faculty, received their degrees of Doctor of Medicine. T h e School established in 1765, the first in A m e r i c a , seems puny in comparison w i t h that of today; there were but two professors, a m i n i m u m of five courses was required, a n d at the first commencement, held June 21, 1768, ten graduates received degrees. B u t considering the state of medicine a n d the small p o p u l a t i o n of Philadelphia in 1765, the significance of the school can hardly be overlooked. T o d a y the course of study seems sufficiently impressive to the 120 y o u n g men and w o m e n (women were first a d m i t t e d in 1914) w h o are accepted each year. T h e catalogue of the School of M e d i c i n e describes the work of the first two years as b e i n g arranged according to " a modification of the concentration system," w h e r e b y the student concentrates on and masters a few subjects before progressing to others. For f o u r years the students spend an average of thirtyfive hours each week in lecture rooms, laboratories, a n d clinics, not to mention the hours spent over textbooks in their rooms. R i g i d l y selected t h o u g h they are f r o m the top ranks of college graduates, m a n y feel that they have just b e g u n to study w h e n they first make the acquaintance of the nearly five h u n d r e d professors, associate professors, assistant professors, a n d others w h o comprise the various departments of the School of Medicine. In the main, the first two years are devoted to the six preclinical subjects, taught in the Medical Laboratories, b u t some time is spent in hospital clinics in order to demonstrate the d e p e n d e n c e of medicine and surgery on the f u n d a m e n t a l sciences. F o l l o w i n g the o p e n i n g of the N e w Medical Laboratories in 1904, w h e n especially extensive laboratory facilities were provided, most of the work of the first

SCHOOL

OF

MEDICINE

107

two years has been practical, so that the greater part of the student's time is spent in laboratories and not in lecture rooms. During the last two years the student does most of his work in the University Hospital and other cooperating hospitals, studying the so-called clinical subjects—medicine, surgery, obstetrics—and the specialties. T h e primary aim of the course is to graduate doctors who are prepared for the practice of general medicine, but an elective trimester is offered in the fourth year to give the student an understanding of the training needed for specialization and to pave the way for advanced study after graduation. In addition, encouragement is given to students capable and willing to engage in investigative or advanced work, whereby they may gain an insight into the opportunities for research and the need for trained investigators and teachers in the medical sciences. D E P A R T M E N T S IN T H E M E D I C A L LABORATORIES

Anatomy: T h e Department of Anatomy stands first in the Medical School catalogue because it is with anatomy that the student commences his medical course proper. First place might have been granted this department because it occupies more space in the Medical Laboratories than any other department and the students give more time to the triple phases of anatomy—gross and microscopic anatomy and neurology (a total of 695 hours in the first three years)—than to any other laboratory subject. T o the historically minded a reason might be that the Department of Anatomy can be said to be older than the Medical School, for in 1762 Dr. Shippen, the first professor, started teaching anatomy to twelve students in the rear of his father's house on Fourth Street. Indeed, Shippen's even more famous successor, Dr. Caspar Wistar, author of the first book of anatomy published in America, once claimed that this was the origin of the Medical School. T h e present staff and facilities of the Department represent an advance over the conditions of 1762 that need not be figured in percentages. T h e laboratories can accommodate at least 500 students and research workers at one time. Approximately 400 students are taken care of each year, of w h o m 120 are medical students, an equal number are dental students, and 160 are students in the Graduate School of Medicine. T h e present staff of fifteen more than adequately carries on the traditions of teaching and discovery set by Shippen, Dorsey, Physick, Horner, Leidy, and Piersol. T h e laboratory of gross anatomy, the largest room used by the department, is on the first floor, and in it 120 medical students,

ιο8

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

working in groups of four, spend the major part of the 436 hours devoted to gross anatomy during their first year. T h e adjoining histology laboratory accommodates a maximum of 148 at one time and is used by medical, dental, and graduate students. On the floor below there are a large dissecting laboratory and several smaller ones for students in the Dental School and in the Graduate School of Medicine. These large laboratories comprise less than a third of the space used by the Department. In addition there is an animal house with double, odor-proof doors, an aquarium, a room equipped for motion picture photography, an artist's studio, and the Piersol Library of Anatomy, the gift of the late Dr. Piersol, whose Human Anatomy is a classic of medical literature; and there are rooms for x-ray, used in teaching living anatomy, for gross photography, for photo-micrography, and for embalming. T h e museum of anatomy is in the basement of the older part of the Medical Laboratories, off one of the lecture rooms, in which its wax models and preserved specimens are used, but more important in the instruction, which is given mainly in the laboratories and conference rooms, is the reference specimen room near the laboratory of gross anatomy. In the "humidor" tables of this room are kept moist specimens, replenished each year from the dissections made by the medical students, which may be handled directly by any student or physician wishing to study or review anatomical structures. T h e thirty-nine small research laboratories which, singly and in suites, are used by members of the staff and advanced students are largely responsible for a steady stream of published articles. Possibly the most important single item of research now in progress is the systematic investigation of the growth and behavior of living structures studied with the aid of a new technique developed in this laboratory. T h e method consists of the installation of a doublewalled transparent chamber in the rabbit's ear, in which individual living cells and groups of cells can be watched under high-powered microscopes. Not only can the normal tissues such as blood and lymphatic vessels be studied minutely, but also cells transplanted from other parts of the animal's body. Current work by the staff includes study of the growth of blood vessels, of regulation of the flow of blood through the small vessels, of new growth and activity of lymphatic vessels, of living endothelium, connective tissue, and wandering cells; of the growth of bone and of transplanted thyroid follicles, of the anaphylactic reaction,

SCHOOL

OF

MEDICINE

109

of certain phases of the silicosis problem, and of the effects of various chemicals, including carcinogenic substances, upon the growth and behavior of tissues. Physiological Chemistry: T h e Department of Physiological Chemistry occupies the third and fourth floors of the new wing of the Medical Laboratories. Here the first-year medical students devote 116 hours to the subject, becoming pretty thoroughly acquainted with the chemistry of proteins, fats, carbohydrates, enzymes, blood, urine, bone—in fact with most of what the body is made of, consumes, or excretes. In addition to the 120 medical students, 150 dental students, and 50 veterinary students, about 20 graduate physicians and a varying number of candidates for the M.A. and Ph.D. degrees work under the direction of the ten members of the Department. Most of the class instruction is carried on on the fourth floor, in the large laboratory at the west end of the building. This laboratory, which has seven thousand square feet of floor space, will accommodate 154 students and is used by medical, dental, veterinary, and graduate students. O n this floor also are balance rooms, animal rooms, a large recitation room, and a large store room, fifty by eighty feet, such as is needed in every chemistry laboratory. On the floor below are the offices and research laboratories of the members of the staff. In addition to a warm room and a cold room, there are constant-temperature rooms, animal rooms, and a seminar room. Indeed there is everything that a thoroughly modern department of physiological chemistry ought to have, including an excellent departmental library. T h e first man to occupy an independent chair of chemistry in America was Benjamin Rush, Professor of Chemistry in the University, although Dr. John Morgan and the first Provost, William Smith, had taught chemistry before him. A voluminous writer on all subjects, Rush was the first of a long line of investigators, some of them physicians like himself, who gained distinction for themselves and for the University by their research in chemistry. T h e Director of the Laboratory also holds the Benjamin Rush Professorship of Physiological Chemistry, a chair created by the Trustees in 1922. Under his direction a great amount of research activity is carried on in the laboratory, some of it in cooperation with other departments of the Medical School. Chemistry, especially in recent years, has invaded most of the divisions of medicine, and such joint effort is to be expected. T h e Department is also cooperating with the University Museum in its study of the chemistry of old pottery.

110

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

A joint project with the Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology devoted to the study of the gonadotropic hormone of pregnancy urine (the hormone involved in the "rabbit test'') led to the announcement in 1939 of the isolation and purification of that hormone. Other work, is concerned with nutrition, especially as it applies to tetany and rickets, with the action of enzymes and the chemistry of compounds containing nitrogen. O n e member of the staff is prosecuting fundamental investigations of the spectrophotometry of hemoglobin and its derivatives. Physiology: W h e n the Medical School was inaugurated in 1765, Dr. John Morgan was appointed Professor of the T h e o r y and Practice of Physick. T h e " T h e o r y , " no doubt, covered what little was known of the underlying sciences of the art of medicine. In 1789 the Trustees of the College appointed Dr. Caspar Wistar to the chair of the Institutes of Medicine, as physiology was then known. W i t h the merging of the College of Philadelphia with the University of the State of Pennsylvania in 1791, Dr. B e n j a m i n R u s h succeeded Dr. Wistar. In 1877 the name of the Department was changed to Physiology, and a year later the comparative anatomist Dr. Harrison Allen was appointed. T h e latter was succeeded in 1893 by Dr. Edward T . Reichert, who served until his retirement in 1921. Including Dr. Morgan, there have been only ten incumbents of the chair. In 1904, with the construction of the Medical Laboratories on Hamilton W a l k , the Department was transferred from the Hare Building and has since been assigned the major part of the first floor and part of the basement. O n e of the rooms is a large laboratory accommodating 132 students. T h e others are offices of the eight members of the staff, private laboratories, preparation rooms, a glassblowing room, and a machine shop. Practical laboratory instruction was not given until 1900, under Dr. Reichert and his assistant, Dr. Ed^vard Lodholz. As a result of the efforts of these two men, the teaching laboratory was completely equipped with apparatus, and probably excelled any teaching laboratory then in existence. Since 1921 the practical instruction has been greatly changed. T h e older method of using lower forms of animal life for experimentation has been greatly abridged, and the majority of experiments are now performed upon mammals. Even the students are the subjects of carefully supervised experiments. In addition to the medical students, approximately 120 dental students receive instruction for four months of the year.

SCHOOL

OF

MEDICINE

11 1

At present a group in the Department is carrying out extensive investigations of circulatory and cardiac changes under varying conditions of climate, a project that is being supported by the J o h n and Mary R . Markle Foundation. Other current researches are on permeability, secretion, exchange of gases through the skin, reactive hyperemia, anesthetics, spinal reflexes, the brain temperature during transcerebral diathermy, skin temperatures, galvanic currents between dental fillings of different constituents, and the osmotic pressure of the blood under varying temperatures. One little-known fact concerning the Department is the publication in 1803 of a thesis entitled An Experimental Inquiry into the Principles of Nutrition and the Digestive Process, by Dr. J o h n R . Young, who was graduated in that year and unfortunately died the next. Dr. Garrison in his History of Medicine says, "[Young] showed that the solvent principle of the gastric juice is an acid, turning litmus paper red and softening bones into a pulp, [and that] this acid is a part of the normal gastric secretion." In a day when analytical chemistry was not so accurate as at present, Dr. Young wrongly inferred that the acid principle was phosphoric acid. Nevertheless his pioneer investigation demonstrates the high standard of work done during the incumbency of Dr. Rush. Over a hundred years later, another student demonstrated an accurate method for determining the capillary blood pressure, one of the classical experiments of physiological research. Pharmacology: Under different names and with a varying emphasis that has reflected the progress of medical practice, what we now know as pharmacology has been taught at the University since the founding of the School of Medicine in 1765. Dr. J o h n Morgan first paid attention to it as Professor of T h e o r y and Practice of Physick. T h e n in 1768 Dr. A d a m K u h n was appointed Professor of Materia Medica and Botany, teaching the latter subject, apparently, only as it had a direct bearing on drugs. W i t h the appointment in 1789 of Dr. Samuel Powell Griffitts, who later was primarily responsible for the founding of the United States Pharmacopoeia, the title of the chair was changed to Materia Medica and Pharmacy, and it was changed to Materia Medica and Therapeutics in 1850, when Dr. Joseph Carson, the historian of the first hundred years of medicine at the University, was appointed. Dr. Carson's successor, Dr. Horatio C. Wood, bore the cumbersome title of Professor of Materia Medica, Pharmacy, and General Therapeutics, but this was shortened to Professor of Therapeutics and Pharmacology during the

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

tenure of D r . W o o d ' s successor, Dr. D a v i d L . Edsall; and finally in 1910, w h e n the present i n c u m b e n t was a p p o i n t e d , the title became simply Professor of Pharmacology. T h e n a m e " p h a r m a c o l o g y " means simply the science of drugs, b u t ever since the subject was first established as an independent b r a n c h of medical science, i n Strasbourg in 1871, its aims have tended more a n d more away f r o m the study of the drugs themselves a n d toward the study of the influence w h i c h they exert u p o n the body. T h e s e aims n o w find expression in activities of three main types. O n e is to o b t a i n a better understanding of the ways in w h i c h chemical substances can influence the functions of the body; this type of investigation has not only e n a b l e d the practitioner to use his drugs to better advantage, but it has also added significantly to k n o w l e d g e c o n c e r n i n g body functions. A n o t h e r aim is to discover new a n d i m p r o v e d remedies, and efforts a l o n g these lines have been conspicuously successful, especially in recent years. Finally, it attempts to ascertain the h a r m f u l potentialities, not only of substances n o w used or suggested as remedial agents, but also of materials a n d agents used in i n d u s t r y — a field of interest of constantly g r o w i n g i m p o r t a n c e a n d o n e in w h i c h pharmacology is able to c o n t r i b u t e methods of established value as well as an understanding (often d e n i e d the chemist a n d industrialist) that it is m u c h easier to make a substance than it is to test its actions adequately. T h i s then is the subject taught in the D e p a r t m e n t of Pharmacology's extensive laboratories in the basement a n d on the first floor of the M e d i c a l Laboratories. Most of the instruction is devoted to the systematic exposition of the actions of useful drugs a n d to experiments, c o n d u c t e d in small groups u n d e r adequate supervision, w h i c h demonstrate a n d clarify the effects of drugs u p o n the heart, the blood-vessels, the gastro intestinal tract, the respiration, the kidneys, and other physiological systems. Since the course comes at the e n d of the second year, w h e n the students have already received instruction in anatomy, biochemistry, bacteriology, and pathology, a n d since the action of chemical substances o n l i v i n g tissues is now a matter of great interest to all these subjects, it has become possible f o r p h a r m a c o l o g y to assume the task of correlating and coordinati n g the preclinical sciences a n d not to limit its instruction to items related directly to the actions of drugs. T h i s attitude toward the subject is c o n t i n u e d in a course in clinical pharmacology w h i c h is c o n d u c t e d d u r i n g the third year in the wards of the University H o s p i t a l a n d in w h i c h a n attempt is made to correlate the findings of the laboratory w i t h observations made at the bedside. T h e older

SCHOOL OF

MEDICINE

aspects of pharmacology, namely materia medica and pharmacy, which comprise the origin, nature, manufacture, and preparation for use of drugs, are covered by suitable lectures and laboratory exercises, but the emphasis in the course at all times is on the physiological rather than the chemical or botanical aspects of the subject. Since the course in pharmacology attempts to correlate the preclinical sciences, an instructorship in this branch has proved attractive to young physicians who contemplate a career in scientific medicine, and one of the useful services performed by the Department has been, and continues to be, the training of a group of such men, some of whom retain their connection with the Department by assisting in the course in clinical pharmacology. T h e staff of the Department has also been active in research along various lines, notably the function of the kidney, the actions and uses of ephedrine and related substances such as benzedrine (both of which had their first use in this country in this laboratory), the nature and mechanism of addiction to morphine in man and animals, the action of various drugs on respiration, the cerebral circulation and its adjustments, reflexes from the carotid sinuses and from the carotid and aortic bodies, and a series of systematic quantitative studies—the first of the kind ever made—of the action of commonly used drugs upon various functions in normal and diseased human beings. Department members also collaborate with the staff of the Johnson Foundation in studies of the action of drugs on the nervous system. T h i s research program has been aided by substantial grants from the Commonwealth Fund, from the Northern Masonic Jurisdiction of the Scottish Rite Masons, and from other donors who prefer to remain anonymous. Pathology: Pathology, which is the study of disease in all its relations, especially of the structural and functional changes that it produces, naturally plays an important part in medical research and in the instruction of future physicians. It was not recognized as an independent discipline, however, until the nineteenth century. T h e first incumbent of an independent chair at the University of Pennsylvania was James Tyson, who was one of the earliest apostles in this country of Virchow's theory of cellular pathology. For many years the Department has occupied most of the second floor of the Medical Laboratories. Here are located the laboratories of gross morbid anatomy, experimental pathology, and histological pathology, the museum of pathology, the numerous research labora-

ii4

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

tories used by the staff and advanced students, and the valuable departmental library of five thousand volumes, which are also catalogued in the main medical library and so are generally available. T h e equipment of the laboratories includes apparatus needed for the routine study of pathological processes both in gross and microscopic specimens, and also for advanced study and research by physiological, chemical, bacteriological, biophysical, or any other suitable methods. A n d if not a part of the equipment of the Department, at least a part of its facilities are the autopsy rooms of the University Hospital and the Philadelphia General Hospital, where the Department is responsible each year for more than two hundred and twelve hundred autopsies, respectively. As with other medical subjects, the teaching of pathology has greatly changed since the early days, when an assistant, attached probably to the Department of Medicine, gave a few lectures augmented by some poorly prepared slides and faded gross specimens, with rare autopsies that were usually beyond the comprehension of the undergraduate. Changed also is the teaching of a somewhat later time, when the conscientious professor, his course attended toward the end by only a few stalwarts, argued pathological problems through some two hundred lectures and even then perhaps failed to cover all the chief systems of the body; when slides were often studied without previous mention of the disease condition, and the gross specimens illustrating the condition were not seen until a year later; when autopsies were observed, like surgical operations, in the dim distance only, and the dynamic functional aspects of the subject were never encountered. T h e present teaching aim is threefold: to give some training in evaluating knowledge acquired at first hand or from others, an understanding of the general concepts of disease, and a reasonable stock of pathological information in its correlation with clinical medicine. T o achieve this, the Department believes in fewer formal lectures and more actual observation of the effects of disease revealed by dead and living tissue. N o attempt is made, of course, to turn out professional pathologists. T h e pathological museum, containing about six thousand specimens, serves as a basis f o r the undergraduate and graduate teaching of that part of gross pathology that cannot be observed at autopsies. Started as a medical museum in the early nineteenth century by Caspar Wistar and carried on by Horner, Wistar's successor in the chair of anatomy, it has continued to receive additions of new specimens, notably those of the George B. Wood collection. T h e 1888 fire

SCHOOL OF

MEDICINE

in Medical Hall, occurring at a time when the medical sciences were rapidly developing, led to the foundation of the Wistar Institute and the housing there of the non-teaching part of the Wistar and Horner Museum. T h e remainder, which is constantly being added to, has continued to aid in pathological teaching and research. In his non-teaching time, each member of the Department's staff of thirty-one is engaged in research. One member has for many years devoted himself to the microscopic study of obscure types of tumors; another, after investigating phagocytosis and the semipermeability of animal cells, has greatly expanded our knowledge of malignant tumors in cold-blooded animals; another is concerned with the endocrines, especially the pituitary in its structural and functional relations with other glands; others have studied various phases of the chemotropism of leucocytes. Investigations are being carried out on infections and neoplasms in reptiles, on experimental anemia and nephritis, on vitamins and their relation to anemia, and on various problems of the blood-forming organs. T h e results of this constant research effort, some of it financed by grants from foundations, societies, and other sources, appear at intervals in Studies from the Department of Pathology, now in their sixth volume. Medical Bacteriology: T h e University of Pennsylvania was a pioneer in bacteriology in America, for it was in 1892, only six years after the founding of the Pasteur Institute in Paris, that the Laboratory of Hygiene (now the Laboratory of Public Health and Preventive Medicine) was opened. Medical bacteriology, however, was taught in the Department of Pathology until 1899, when it was transferred to the Laboratory of Hygiene, then under the direction of Dr. Alexander C. Abbott, author of one of the first textbooks of bacteriology and a founder of the Society of American Bacteriologists. Dr. Abbott's successor in 1928 was Dr. David H. Bergey, who was known throughout the world as an authority on systematic bacteriology. His Manual of Determinative Bacteriology has passed into its fifth edition. Upon the retirement of Dr. Bergey in 1931, instruction in medical bacteriology was removed from the Laboratory of Hygiene to its present location on the second floor of the Medical Laboratories for the better correlation with other departments of the Medical School, especially pathology and research surgery. Here are located a large laboratory which is shared with the Department of Pathology, and thirteen research laboratories used constantly by the fifteen members

116

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

of the staff. Another laboratory is on the top floor of the tower, and in the basement is a large room where media and materials are prepared on almost a commercial scale. T h e new Department of Medical Bacteriology was formed around a nucleus of former students of Theobald Smith, Hans Zinsser, and F. G. Novy, three distinguished pioneer American bacteriologists, at least one of whom had received part of his knowledge directly from Pasteur and Koch, the founders of the science. T h e quality of the instruction offered in the Department each year to the secondyear class of about 1 1 0 medical students is attested by the fact that it has been adopted by other medical schools, either in part or practically in its entirety, and has also been voted one of the best organized courses by the medical students themselves. T h e Department is especially active in research. During the first eight years of its history, some eighty publications appeared. Medicine has profited from the researches on phagocytosis, air-borne infection, the uses of convalescent serum, and the preservation of biological products. Many additions have been made to the science of bacteriology and immunology as a result of the investigations of hemolytic streptococci, the cause of scarlet fever, child-bed fever, erysipelas, etc., and on the microorganisms causing diphtheria, whooping cough, and typhoid fever. Many contributions have been made to various fields of science in the perfection of such new techniques as improved serological diagnostic tests, the breaking up of microorganisms by the use of a ball mill or by sonic vibrations, phagocytosis, and the preservation of labile substances under high vacuum.

THE UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL AND THE CLINICAL DEPARTMENTS OF THE MEDICAL SCHOOL The University

Hospital

T h e University Hospital, which was opened in 1874, was the first in the United States directly connected with a medical school, and from the beginning the clinical members of the faculty of the School of Medicine have composed its staff. Although the Hospital is not immediately under the administration of the Trustees of the University, all but two of the twelve members of the Board of Managers are appointed by the Trustees. T h e two exceptions are representatives of the Board of Women Visitors.

SCHOOL OF

MEDICINE

117

Although in 1874 the ground on which stood the original building, designed by T h o m a s W. Richards, offered what seemed ample room for expansion, at present its various units crowd the two city blocks between Thirty-fourth, Thirty-sixth, Spruce, and Pine streets, and if a new unit is to be constructed, an obsolete one must first be torn down, as has happened thrice in the past. A few statistics from the report of the Managers for the year ending May 3 1 , 1939, give some idea of the Hospital's share in caring for the sick. T h e thirty-one out-patient departments and sub-divisions received 118,224 visits during the year, each at a cost to the Hospital of $ 1 . 1 1 ; of the 11,061 patients treated in its twenty wards and seventy-one private rooms, 3,244 paid but a part of the $5.62 per day which they cost the Hospital, and 2,933 received free care. Nearly 1,000 babies were born in the maternity division, and 16,584 persons received emergency treatment. T h e total budget for the year was approximately three-quarters of a million dollars. When the new construction, to be described below, is completed, the Hospital will have 94 private rooms, 40 semi-private rooms, and a minimum of 518 ward beds, providing a total of 652 beds for the care of inpatients. T h e Hospital is the largest aggregate of buildings in the University; most of them front on Spruce Street. At the corner of Thirtyfourth Street is the J . William White Surgical Pavilion, named for the distinguished Professor of Surgery, father of physical education at the University and an important benefactor. T h e ground floor of the White Pavilion houses the Department of Radiology. T h e third floor is devoted exclusively to gynecology. T h e remainder of the eight floors (except the sixth, which contains only machinery) serves the Department of Surgery primarily. T h e r e are two surgical wards for women, one for men, three surgical amphitheatres, laboratories for surgical and neurosurgical pathology, a surgical record room, a library, and various offices. Construction of the White Pavilion was begun in 1914, but increasing costs caused by the World W a r delayed its completion until 1922. South of the White Pavilion is the main building of the Nurses' Home, which accommodates 150 of the 253 student and graduate nurses connected with the Hospital. It was erected in 1886 in memory of Mrs. R i c h a r d D. Wood. T h i s building houses the School of Nursing, which was organized in 1886 and which graduates fifty nurses each year. In addition to the dormitory, there are classrooms and a well-equipped dietetic laboratory. O n the east side of Thirty-fourth Street an annex to the Nurses'

118

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Home provides much-needed additional space f o r seventy-two nurses. T h e Annex, title to which was acquired f r o m the City in 1910, continued to house the Children's Department of the Philadelphia General Hospital until 1928, when the modern buildings of that hospital were erected. T o the west of the White Pavilion on Spruce Street once stood the front of the D. Hayes Agnew Memorial Pavilion, a surgical building erected in 1897 in memory of the famous Professor of Surgery, and then considered the last word in hospital design. In February 1937 fire destroyed the Agnew Clinic in the front, but spared two public wards and a private floor to the rear. Construction of a new five-story unit which will replace the damaged part and add considerable additional space began in 1939. T h e unit is in two sections. T h e eastern section replaces the front of the D. Hayes Agnew Pavilion and will bear that name. T h e western section, which extends from the street to 166 feet south of the corridors stretching from end to end of the entire hospital group, will be known as the Crothers Dulles Memorial Hospital, in memory of William Crothers Dulles, whose mother and sister contributed funds for its erection. T h e design of the additions is such that the floors in front of the corridors will function as units, and likewise the floors to the rear. T h e new buildings represent a great addition to the University Hospital and will make possible important changes in the location of various departments. T h e ground floor of the front section will be shared by the Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology and the Department of Radiology, the latter department using also the ground floor of the rear section and part of the basement. T h e third floor of the front section will be used by the Department of Ophthalmology; on the fourth floor of this section, adjoining the operating floor of the White Pavilion, will be six operating suites," the fifth floor will contain laboratories for surgical research; the rest of the new building, front and rear, will be used by the Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology. Next to the Agnew-Dulles buildings is the original building of the Hospital, in which are the administrative offices, a students' ward, and private rooms; adjoining to the west is a modern building of Jacobean architecture. T h e lower floors of both these buildings house at present most of the out-patient departments of the Hospital. T h e newer of these central buildings is the modernized front of the Gibson Wing of the Hospital, which was erected in 1883 and

SCHOOL OF

MEDICINE

was named in honor of Henry C. Gibson. T h e Jacobean front was dedicated in 1909 and housed the Medical Out-Patient Department until the Maloney Clinic—the adjoining ten-story building on the corner—was completed in 1929. In addition to the out-patient departments, this section has a large amphitheatre and a complete laboratory where medical students learn to perform the various diagnostic tests. T h e older part of the Gibson Wing is devoted mainly to metabolic diseases and pediatrics. T o the rear of all these buildings are other important units of the Hospital. One of these is the Maternity Department, which occupies a group of connected buildings just south of the Maloney Clinic. T h e entrance is in a red brick building facing Hamilton Walk that was erected in 1897 through the efforts of the late Dr. Barton C. Hirst. Behind it is a small wing built in 1890 and now a dormitory for nurses. It was here that Dr. Hirst and Dr. Howard Kelley, later of Johns Hopkins, began the first actual bedside instruction in obstetrics in America, which previously had been taught only in lecture rooms with a dummy as the sole means of demonstration. T h e most modern part of the Maternity group is on Thirty-sixth Street facing the dormitories. It is a brick and limestone structure of Elizabethan style erected in 1916. T o the rear of this building is the Anna Dike Scott Memorial Amphitheatre, in which two hundred students can be seated. When the Agnew-Dulles unit is completed, the Maternity Department will vacate its present quarters and the Department of Neurology and the Neurological Institute will move in, but not before one or two floors connecting with the Maloney Clinic have been added. T h e other units of the Hospital which do not front on Spruce Street consist of a small isolation building for housing the few cases of contagious disease that develop after patients are admitted, a laundry, and an attractive, well-lighted shop for occupational therapy, which was presented to the Hospital by Mrs. Sabin W. Colton, Jr., in memory of her mother. The Martin Maloney Memorial

Clinic

T h e Maloney Clinic is the expression of a plan outlined in 1913 by Dr. Alfred Stengel for a medical out-patient department with a salaried staff, a comprehensive social service department, an efficient clerical force, and an elaborate physical equipment, including special laboratories and roentgenological apparatus. Sixteen years later, in 1929, the plan became a reality when the Maloney Clinic, a tenstory building at Thirty-sixth and Spruce streets named for the late

120

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Martin Maloney, w h o had contributed generously to its construction, was completed. T h e Maloney Clinic represented a unique development. It was not a new hospital or a new unit of a hospital with a single specific purpose, but rather a supplementary section of the Medical Clinic, having multiple functions all connected with the demands made upon the medical division of a modern teaching hospital. Some indication of the importance of the building is revealed by the activities which it houses. Much of the room is devoted to the Medical Out-Patient Department and its special sections for the study of cardiovascular disease, of gastro-intestinal disease, of allergy, of chest conditions, of diabetes, of glandular disease, and of blood diseases. It also includes the W i l l i a m Pepper Laboratory of Clinical Medicine, the John Herr Musser Department of Research Medicine, the Department of Physical Therapy, a morgue, a pharmacy, a library, a floor for animal research, twenty-three private rooms, and offices for certain members of the staff of the Department of Medicine. Carried on in the building is the work of the Robinette Foundation for research in circulatory disease, the Kinsey-Thomas Foundation for gastro-intestinal research, the C o x Medical Research Institute for the investigation of diabetes, and of various other funds which are used for research in internal medicine. T h e Maloney Clinic also houses the Johnson Foundation for Research in Medical Physics. T h e Maloney Clinic as a whole serves three important functions. O n e of these is the treatment of many patients who w o u l d otherwise receive ward care, whereby the Hospital is relieved of the expense of supplying board and lodging for such cases—a potential saving in the gastro-intestinal section alone estimated at about $10,000 annually. A n o t h e r is the training of young physicians, both for the practice of medicine and for a special kind of clinical investigation on ward and ambulant patients. A n d of course there is research. T h e annual report of the University Hospital lists the current publications of the members of the Hospital staff, the research for which was carried on primarily in the various divisions of the Hospital. T h e 1938 report gave 279 such publications, of which 58 were the result of work completed primarily in the medical division. For 1939 the figures were 179 and 70. D E P A R T M E N T S IN T H E M A L O N E Y C L I N I C

The Department of Medicine: Some of the offices of the staff of the Department of Medicine are in the Maloney Clinic; and there also

SCHOOL OF

MEDICINE

121

are the ten special sections of the Medical Out-Patient Department of the Hospital, many of them supported largely by endowments. But so varied are the activities of the Department—the teaching of the many branches of internal medicine, the diagnosis and treatment of patients, and research—that it is impossible to give the location of the Department more definitely than to say that it is in the University Hospital. Indeed, that statement is not strictly true, for in the clinical teaching of medicine, use is made of facilities in the Pennsylvania Hospital, the Philadelphia General Hospital, and, for special work in tuberculosis, the Phipps Institute. T h e teaching staff of the Department, which now numbers slightly less than a hundred, is the largest in the Medical School, and the student hours are among the highest. Morgan, K u h n , R u s h , G. B . Wood, William Pepper, Primus and Secundus, and A l f r e d Stengel have all occupied the principal chair of medicine. T h e s e men and many others have contributed to the evolution of the present course of study, in which clinical work has played an increasing part, especially since the opening of the University Hospital in 1874. Since the course in the School of Medicine is designed primarily to qualify students for the practice of general medicine, the Medical Clinic with its ten sections enters into the medical instruction with special importance. T h e Diagnostic Section, to which new patients come, is on the first floor of the Maloney Clinic; the others are on various floors of the building. Of these sections, only those that are supported by important endowments will be described. Gastro-Intestinal Section (Kinsey-Thomas Foundation) T h e Gastro-Intestinal Section of the Medical Clinic was organized in 1927. A t first it had no budget, no special quarters, and no nursing or technical assistants, but in time the hospital management rendered financial aid and a few small private donations were secured. When the Maloney Clinic was completed, special quarters were assigned on the third floor, the Hospital made a more generous annual contribution, and the private donations increased so that it became possible to have a small professional staff on a part-pay basis. In 1937, for the first time, some permanent funds became available through a bequest in memory of Miss Mary Kinsey and Mr. and Mrs. Augustus Thomas, the income to be expended f o r the operation of the Section. T h i s income has been augmented by additional donations and grants by the American Medical Association, Mr.

122

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Samuel Fels, Mrs. Frederick Hemsley, Mrs. A . E. H a z a r d , Mrs. Justice M . T h o m p s o n , a n d the Smith, K l i n e , a n d F r e n c h Laboratories. T h e service of the Section to the c o m m u n i t y has c o n t i n u e d to be its p r i m e purpose, but its investigative work especially has attracted attention in the U n i t e d States a n d abroad. W i t h i n a ten-year period its staff has c o n t r i b u t e d sixty-seven articles to medical literature and has presented papers before most of the national societies having an interest in clinical digestive problems. A w a r d s for special work h a v e been m a d e to staff members by the A m e r i c a n M e d i c a l Association, the A m e r i c a n R o e n t g e n o l o g i c a l Society, the A m e r i c a n Radiological Society, a n d the A m e r i c a n Gastro-Enterological Association. T h e w o r k of the Section that has attracted most attention has been the i n v e n t i o n a n d d e v e l o p m e n t of w h a t is k n o w n as "intestinal i n t u b a t i o n , " by means of w h i c h a tube can be introduced into w h a t e v e r level of the b o w e l it is desired to reach. In addition to p r o v i d i n g more satisfactory diagnoses, this t e c h n i q u e has permitted the d e v e l o p m e n t of a n o n o p e r a t i v e m e t h o d of d e a l i n g w i t h serious cases of intestinal obstruction; in some instances r e n d e r i n g operation unnecessary, in others p e r m i t t i n g o p e r a t i o n to be delayed until it is a relatively safe procedure. Its v a l u e in the latter respect is indicated by the fact that already the mortality in obstructed cases so m a n a g e d has been reduced by fifty per cent. A n o t h e r use n o w b e i n g m a d e of the t e c h n i q u e is the study of conditions of spasm or r e l a x a t i o n w i t h i n the bowel. T h i s has been made possible by the d e v e l o p m e n t by the J o h n s o n F o u n d a t i o n of a small but complicated device w h i c h can be attached to the intestinal tube and is so controlled by an electrical a p p a r a t u s outside the body that the most m i n u t e variations in pressure can be recorded. It is believed that this e x t e n d e d t e c h n i q u e m a y lead to i m p o r t a n t new discoveries r e g a r d i n g the action of the intestine u n d e r b o t h normal a n d a b n o r m a l conditions. T h e C a r d i a c a n d Peripheral Vascular Sections (The Robinette Foundation) T h e R o b i n e t t e F o u n d a t i o n was established in 1928 t h r o u g h the generosity of the late E d w a r d B. R o b i n e t t e , a g r a d u a t e of the C o l l e g e in 1909. M r . R o b i n e t t e ' s purpose was to promote research in circulatory diseases, especially those of the degenerative type. K n o w i n g that medical science had greatly increased the average l e n g t h of h u m a n life, particularly by l i m i t i n g the dangers of the diseases of i n f a n c y a n d c h i l d h o o d a n d of infectious disease generally, he recognized

SCHOOL

OF MEDICINE

123

that the next great chapter in medical history must be the prevention and control of the diseases of the later half of life. T h e Cardiovascular Section of the Medical Clinic was chosen as the nucleus for the work of the Foundation, and as activities increased, it was found necessary to divide the original Section into two: Cardiac and Peripheral Vascular. These and the offices of the Foundation are located on the third floor of the Maloney Clinic, where more than four thousand patients are examined each year by means of electrocardiagraphs, fluoroscopic machines, and the other apparatus used in the diagnosis of circulatory diseases. In 1929 the medical staff consisted of but three; at present there are sixteen. T h e research work of the Foundation is conducted mainly in experimental laboratories on the eighth and ninth floors of the Maloney Clinic. Many of the projects have been carried out entirely within the Foundation, while others have been in cooperation with other departments of the University Hospital or the Medical School. T h e Foundation has also supported promising investigations in other hospitals, especially the Philadelphia General Hospital. T h e clinical and experimental activities of the Foundation have produced significant results. A series of investigations has led to the use of chest leads in electrocardiography and to the first demonstration of their usefulness in the study of coronary occlusion. T h e new technique has been said to be the most important advance in cardiac diagnosis during the past twenty-five years. Another important contribution has been the study by graphic methods of the time relationship between heart sounds and other cardiac events. T h i s has made possible a new classification of heart sounds and has greatly increased the existing knowledge of the mechanism of the production of heart sounds. In the course of this study various methods of diagnosis have been improved, including the d e v e l o p ment of a simple technique for the accurate timing of roentgenkymographic curves by means of electrocardiography. For the treatment of peripheral vascular disease, the staff has developed the first suction-pressure pump for restoring normal circulation. T h i s apparatus, perhaps the most effective yet designed, has saved numerous extremities which otherwise would have been amputated. T h e staff has also conducted a series of experimental and clinical studies of hypertension (high blood-pressure). These have resulted in important contributions to the knowledge of the mechanism of p a p i l l e d e m a (swelling of the nerve-heads of the retina) in hypertension; improved methods of studying hypertension by means of small animals; and new procedures for the differentia-

124

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

tion of clinical types of hypertension. Of great importance also has been the study of edema, a watery swelling of tissue. T h i s has resulted in a new clinical classification that is now generally recognized. T h e Diabetic Section ( T h e C o x Institute) T h e work of the Diabetic Section of the Medical Clinic is carried on by the George S. C o x Medical Research Institute within the Department of Medicine of the University. T h e C o x Institute, an independent foundation, was set up under the will of the late George S. C o x , a prominent Philadelphian. It is the first endowment in America exclusively for the study of diabetes. In 1931 the Trustees of the Institute and the Trustees of the University of Pennsylvania agreed on an arrangement whereby the Institute w o u l d occupy space in the Maloney Clinic and would conduct the Diabetic Section of the Medical Clinic. As a result the Institute benefits from the use of research facilities already in existence at the University and in turn greatly benefits the University itself, especially in the practical management of the patients, w h o make more than two thousand visits to the Clinic annually. T h e latter is on the second floor of the Maloney Clinic; the research activities are carried on on the eighth floor. T h e recent work of the Institute has been directed mainly toward discovering the relationship between the pituitary and adrenal glands and diabetes. T h e ultimate goal of the research is to discover means of preventing diabetes, at the same time advancing the control of the disease with the modern use of insulin and other measures. Other work of the Institute, in which the Clinic has played a part, includes a study of the role of vitamin Β and vitamin C and the value of the proper amount of exercise in the treatment of diabetes. A small metabolic ward is maintained for the study of diabetic patients, and a camp for children is conducted in the summer. Physical Therapy: T h e Department of Physical T h e r a p y occupies most of the fifth floor of the Maloney Clinic. A d j o i n i n g , on the top floor of the Gibson W i n g of the Hospital, is a gymnasium equipped w i t h the usual bicycles, stall bars, trapezes, and similar apparatus. T h e space in the Maloney Clinic is divided into numerous rooms and booths provided with equipment for light treatments, for diathermy, for the suction-pressure treatment of infected limbs or limbs threatened with gangrene, and for hydro-therapy. A l t h o u g h the Department gives instruction in physical therapy to fourth-year

SCHOOL OF

MEDICINE

»25

medical students, its primary function is the care of Hospital patients, who receive more than thirteen thousand treatments a year. The Pepper Laboratory of Clinical Medicine: Provost William Pepper was the father of laboratory development in the University Hospital. In 1895 by the foundation of the William Pepper Laboratory of Clinical Medicine in honor of his father, William Pepper (1810-1865), h e established a department to serve as a connecting link between the Medical School and the patient, and also to provide for research. T h e Pepper Laboratory was the first of its kind in the country. Generous endowment by the founder and substantial additions by Mrs. William Pepper, Mrs. Phoebe A. Hearst, Dr. George Woodward, and Mr. Samuel Dickson established the investigative foundation upon which subsequent history is based. Dr. Pepper specified that graduate investigation, not undergraduate work, was to be pursued. The ivy-covered, square, red brick building at Thirty-sixth and Spruce which originally housed the Pepper Laboratory and where such men as Alfred Stengel, W. G. Spiller, S. S. Kneass, C. L. Leonard, D. L. Edsall, A. E. Taylor, C. H. Frazier, and D. J . McCarthy laid the foundation for their careers was removed in 1928 to make way for the Maloney Clinic, on the seventh floor of which a new location was found. The original frieze on the northern face and the door of the old building are preserved in the new quarters, and there are portraits of all the professors in the Medical School since John Morgan, an oil portrait of William Pepper, Primus, by Meynen, and a marble bust of the founder. The Pepper Laboratory was the mother of all the specialized laboratories of clinical medicine and teaching. T h e present departmental laboratories of roentgenology, surgical pathology, gynecological pathology, surgical metabolism, hematology, cardiology, and ophthalmology had their origin in it. T h e success of investigative work in the early days made it imperative that, for the patient's sake, routine tests be easily available. In 1914 the University Trustees and the Managers of the Hospital expanded the work and gave financial support without interfering with the autonomous position, the endowment funds, or the special studies of the Foundation. Whereas in 1923, a total of twenty-five thousand tests was made, in lgjg the figure was 165,000, an increase of over six hundred per cent. The present staff consists of five professional and twenty-one non-professional workers. As was conceived by Dr. Pepper, the laboratory continues to func-

126

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

tion as a place w h e r e analyses a n d special studies can b e m a d e for the sake of patients and w h e r e there can be l a b o r a t o r y i n v e s t i g a t i o n of all p r o p o s e d methods for the a d v a n c e m e n t of m e d i c a l science and the p r e p a r a t i o n and p u b l i c a t i o n of such studies. T h e latter appear periodically as b o u n d volumes, thirteen of w h i c h h a v e been published since 1900. Forty-seven associates a n d assistant associates have passed t h r o u g h the P e p p e r L a b o r a t o r y . T e m p o r a r y w o r k is also done by representatives f r o m other d e p a r t m e n t s ; for a time senior medical officers r e q u i r e d that their j u n i o r s spend a short time here. Every hospital interne must pass at least two m o n t h s of his service at laboratory w o r k . T h e L a b o r a t o r y serves for r o u t i n e purposes the in-patients a n d out-patients; it controls the milk hygiene in the H o s p i t a l a n d the sterility of the surgical divisions; in a d d i t i o n it carries o u t investigative w o r k . T h e D i v i s i o n of C h e m i s t r y was o r i g i n a l l y interested in diet a n d n u t r i t i o n , then in nephritis. T o d a y it has still u n d e r study the b l o o d urea q u o t i e n t , the electrolyte content of the b l o o d , the significance of b l o o d v o l u m e , a n d clinical toxicology. T h e D i v i s i o n of M e t a b o l i s m , a b r a n c h of the D i v i s i o n of Chemistry in charge of the W o o d w a r d F e l l o w in P h y s i o l o g i c a l C h e m i s t r y , is interested in m e t a b o l i s m of thyroid disease a n d in v i t a m i n balances. F o r m e r l y this division d i d n o t a b l e w o r k in the d a i l y b l o o d sugar curves, a n d the establishment of correct i n s u l i n dosages. T h e D i v i s i o n of Bacteriology, b e g u n i n 1896 by S. S. Kneass, fresh f r o m the Pasteur Institute of Paris, has c o n t r i b u t e d n o t a b l y in the r a p i d diagnosis of infectious conditions, for the c l i n i c i a n must get this i n f o r m a t i o n as q u i c k l y as possible for the patient's sake. T h e D i v i s i o n of Bioscopical P a t h o l o g y is d e s i g n e d f o r the study of glands, p u n c t u r e fluids, a n d pieces f r o m the l u n g s a n d l a r y n x . F o r twenty years it has paid special a t t e n t i o n to the l y m p h n o d e s a n d spleen, p u b l i s h i n g ten articles on t h e m . T h e Division of Serology has kept pace w i t h the studies in this difficult subject, n o t a b l y by p a r t i c i p a t i n g in the n a t i o n - w i d e standardization of the W a s s e r m a n n test. T h e R o u t i n e D i v i s i o n cares for the s i m p l e r tests a n d supervises the Hospital's b l o o d b a n k a n d the donors, k e e p i n g a c a r e f u l card i n d e x check of every step. The John Herr Musser Department of Research Medicine: The D e p a r t m e n t of Research M e d i c i n e , w h i c h is o n the e i g h t h floor of the M a l o n e y C l i n i c , was created in 1909 by a g i f t to the U n i v e r s i t y

SCHOOL OF MEDICINE

137

by Mrs. Harriet C. Prevost, a friend and patient of the late Dr. John H. Musser, then Professor of Clinical Medicine in the University. Following the death of Dr. Musser in 1912, the name was changed by the donor to the John Herr Musser Department of Research Medicine. The purpose of the Department was to apply the methods of bacteriology, pathology, physiology, chemistry, or pharmacology to the investigation of disease. The first Professor of Research Medicine, Richard Mills Pearce, directed the Department from 1910 to 1919. A major interest of Dr. Pearce's was the training of young graduates in medicine for experimental research, an activity in which he was supremely successful, for most of those who worked under his direction now hold professional titles in various university medical schools. During Dr. Pearce's directorship 108 papers were published from the Department. These dealt with experimental studies of physiology of the spleen, and anemia, nephritis, anaphylaxis, and immunity. In more recent years the Department's research activities have been in the field of the physiology of blood electrolytes, of hemoglobin and its derivatives, and of tissue respiration. There has been active collaboration with the Pepper Laboratory, the Cox Institute, the Department of Surgical Research, and the Department of Physiological Chemistry. The Milton B. Hartzell Department 0/ Research Therapeutics: This department, which was organized in 1933, was endowed by the will of Dr. Milton Bixler Hartzell, the distinguished Professor of Dermatology in the School of Medicine from 1911 to 1922. Its laboratory is on the eighth floor of the Maloney Clinic, where research has been conducted on new methods of therapy, especially on drugs of the choline series and physical methods for the relief of pain by counter-irritation. Much work has also been done to devise methods by which the action of the therapeutic agents used in heart disease can be investigated and assessed by measurement of the amount of blood pumped by the heart each minute. The Johnson Foundation for Medical Physics: The Eldridge Reeves Johnson Foundation for Research in Medical Physics was established in 1929 by a munificent gift from Mr. Eldridge R. Johnson for endowment and to provide suitable laboratories. T h e Foundation, which is the first and largest institute in the world devoted exclusively to research in the physical aspects of medicine and biology, occupies twenty-two rooms on the sixth floor

is8

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

of the Maloney Clinic. These include a large shop equipped with modern tools and machines for the construction of scientific apparatus, a reference library, offices, photographic rooms, and sixteen rooms for research in various aspects of biophysics. W i t h these exceptional facilities the Foundation, in accordance with the terms of the endowment, is furthering the development of medicine and biology by applying the principles and methods of the physical sciences to the study of living organisms. T h i s it does through the research of the members of the Foundation staff, by the creation of new physical methods and apparatus for the use of research workers in other departments of the University, and by teaching and research training. T h e Foundation's investigations have covered a wide range of biological and medical subjects. These include extensive studies on the effects of radiation on living organisms, the use of high intensity sound waves for liberating immunologically important substances from bacteria and the general biological effects of such waves, the molecular structure of living cells, the mechanism of muscular contraction, the nature of visual processes, and the properties of the nervous system which make possible the coordinated control of the organism. By measuring the electrical changes from moment to moment in single nerve cells the Foundation has been a pioneer in the development of a new era in experimental neurology. T h e wide recognition of the importance of this work has attracted to the Foundation doctors from universities throughout the world who have come for a year of research training in this science. Such training in research constitutes an important part of the work of the Foundation, for in this way investigators now active in institutions in many parts of the world have been fitted to utilize more effectively the methods and principles of physics in the study of disease. An occasional graduate student who shows exceptional aptitudes in both the biological and physical sciences is accepted as a resident scholar. After a series of graduate courses in various departments of the School of Medicine, in the Moore School of Electrical Engineering, and in the T o w n e Scientific School, he is apprenticed to one or more of the members of the Foundation for three years of research. Most of the students, however, are mature scholars who have already received their doctorate at another university and come to the Foundation for a year or more of specialized training. During the first ten years there have been over thirty of these visiting fellows from Finland, Sweden, Germany, Scotland, England, Italy,

SCHOOL OF

MEDICINE

129

Canada, Belgium, China, and from many universities in this country. One of the most important contributions of the physical sciences to biology and medicine is the devising of instruments for measuring biological processes and the condition of the body, and for administering therapeutic procedures. The close proximity of the laboratories of the Foundation to the wards and clinics of the University Hospital and to the laboratory departments of the Medical School and College enables the members of the Foundation to be of service in the development and application of physical methods to the research problems which arise in other departments. An extensive supply of physical apparatus is available for special problems, experts in various phases of engineering and physics devote much of their time to consultation with members of other departments, and more than half of the services of the large instrument shop are employed in the design and construction of apparatus for scientists throughout the Medical School and in other universities. As part of its program for expanding and improving the biophysical approach to medical science, the Foundation sponsors the Eldridge Reeves Johnson Lectures. At about two-year intervals one of the most distinguished workers in this field of biophysics is invited to reside at the University for some weeks and to give a series of lectures on the most significant aspects of his research. Up to the present the lecturers have been Α. V. Hill of the University of London, E. D. Adrian of Cambridge University, Joseph Erlanger of Washington University, H. S. Gasser of the Rockefeller Institute, and Irving Langmuir of the General Electric Company. T h e lectures that have been published by the University Press are recognized as the outstanding publications in this field of science. As the work of the Foundation has demonstrated the increasing usefulness of physical principles and methods in the medical sciences, the scope of its activities has increased. This has brought a steady increase of financial support and an increasing number of workers. From an initial staff of six the number of workers had increased to twenty-one in 1939. The Institute of Neurology: Much of the most distinguished research of the Johnson Foundation has dealt with problems of neurology. This is not by accident, for in a number of instances the personnel of the staff of the Johnson Foundation and that of the staff of the Institute are the same. At present the clinical work of the Institute is carried on in

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

various parts of the University Hospital, and the experimental research activities, which are supported in part by a generous endowment from Mr. Fred M. Kirby and Dr. Daniel J . McCarthy, Professor of Medical Jurisprudence, make use of facilities on the sixth floor of the Maloney Clinic provided by the Johnson Foundation. With the completion of the Agnew-Dulles section of the Hospital the present Maternity building will be modified for the use of the Institute and two additional floors will be added in order to provide quarters for clinical and research laboratories. These will be connected with the Johnson Foundation by a bridging corridor. In this way it will be possible to relate the fundamental research of the Johnson Foundation to the clinical research of the Institute. Many special laboratory facilities will be shared by the two organizations. T h e Institute of Neurology was established in 1936. More than a mere department of neurology, it has as its primary purpose the coordination of the various research, clinical, and teaching activities related to neurology in the University. It is thus possible to focus on neurological problems the activities of many departments of the Medical School, the Graduate School of Medicine, the Veterinary School, and certain departments of the College. But neurology at the University began much earlier than 1936. It was introduced formally into the Medical School in 1875, when Dr. Horatio C. Wood was appointed Professor of Nervous Diseases. T h e subject could hardly have received a great deal of attention, however, for during most of his career Dr. Wood served also as Professor of Materia Medica, Pharmacy, and General Therapeutics. Originally "nervous diseases" included those diseases which have an organic basis and also those which have symptoms revealed primarily in behavior and changes in personality, but a division was made in 1893, when a separate professorship of mental diseases (now psychiatry) was established. Dr. Wood made important contributions to the literature of neurology, as did his successor, Dr. Charles K. Mills, who was Professor of Neurology from 1903 until 1915. Very widely known also was the late Dr. William G . Spiller, who served from 1 9 1 5 until his retirement in 1932. T h e author of more than two hundred books and articles, Dr. Spiller was recognized throughout the world for his contributions to clinical neurology and neuropathology. One of the important units in the new quarters of the Institute of Neurology will be the William G. Spiller Laboratory of Neuropathology. Another will be the Charles W. Burr Library of Neurology, named for the distinguished Emeritus Professor of Mental Diseases.

SCHOOL

OF

MEDICINE

D E P A R T M E N T S IN T H E W H I T E P A V I L I O N A N D R E L A T E D D E P A R T M E N T S

Radiology: T h e Department of Radiology occupies about ten thousand square feet of space on the first floor of the W h i t e Surgical P a v i l i o n — a considerable increase over the facilities used by Dr. Charles Lester Leonard, the first roentgenologist at the University. In 1896 the University Hospital, one of the first institutions to employ the x-rays as a diagnostic agent, allotted Dr. Leonard a small room on one of the upper floors of the Pepper Clinical Laboratory, which seemed ample in view of the meager equipment then available and the number of patients. In 1900 Dr. Leonard reported that he had examined eighty-six patients during the preceding year. T h e diagnostic portion of the present quarters consists of six radiologic rooms, three fluoroscopic rooms, a developing room, a record room where one hundred thousand non-explosive films are filed, and numerous other rooms which serve as dressing rooms and offices. T h e office of the head of the Department is in what was formerly an orthopedic gymnasium, and here the instruction in radiologic diagnosis and therapy is given to undergraduate physicians with the aid of a projectoscope which throws on a screen greatly magnified images of the fractures, infections, tumors, pulmonary and gastro-intestinal disturbances, and foreign bodies which trouble the patients examined in the clinic. T h e clinic is a busy place, not only because of the number of patients—sixteen thousand in a y e a r — b u t because many of them remain for a l o n g time, waiting between examinations while the barium and sodium-iodophenolphthalein they have swallowed reaches or leaves the parts to be examined. A complete gastrointestinal examination takes a good part of two days, during w h i c h as many as fifteen films may be exposed. T h e process has been speeded up, however, by the recent installation of motor-driven fluoroscopic tables w i t h special mechanical devices for "spot film" gastro-intestinal work and switches which automatically control radiographic technique. Modern shock-proof therapy apparatus likewise enables the clinic to care for patients more rapidly and with greater comfort. T h i s equipment includes two 200 kv. machines and one 135 kv. machine. T h e r e is also a highly specialized low-voltage C h a o u l machine, the latter presented to the clinic by Mr. W i l l i a m H . Donner. T h e equipment of the Department had a value in 1939 of approximately $100,000, including five hundred milligrams of radium.

13»

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

It is modern and adequate, but it is to be greatly increased when the Department moves into its new quarters on the first floor of the Agnew-Dulles section of the University Hospital. A large gift from Mr. Donner for equipment is expected to make the new clinic second to none. Since roentgenology is a young science, there have been but three heads of the Department. T h e first was Dr. Leonard, whose work in urological roentgenology brought him many honors. His career was cut short in 1902, when he was forced to retire because of x-ray burns, so frequently suffered by pioneers in radiology. H e died in 1913, a martyr to the science. Such injuries do not occur in the Department today. W o r k i n g behind lead screens, with vastly improved apparatus and with lead-impregnated canvas and rubber gloves, the roentgenologists insist that injuries are now likely to be caused only by carelessness. Dr. Leonard's successor was Dr. Henry K . Pancoast, w h o died in 1939. U n d e r him the work of the clinic expanded so greatly that in 1904 it was given ten rooms in the A g n e w Pavilion. In 1905 Dr. Pancoast was appointed Lecturer in Skiagraphy in the Medical School, and in 1912 a chair of radiology was established for him, the first in this country and one of the first in the medical schools of the world. Dr. Pancoast's investigations in the roentgen treatment of leukemia, first published in 1906, are still considered authoritative, and his studies in pneumoconiosis, begun in 1916, gained for the Department an international reputation. Recently much of the research of the Department has been directed toward the effect of dust on the pulmonary system. T h i s work, financed largely by a grant from the A i r Hygiene Foundation, has been carried on in cooperation with the Department of Anatomy and the Moore School of Electrical Engineering. T h e studies have been concerned largely with the diagnosis, treatment, and prevention of such diseases as silicosis. A n interesting investigation has been the development of a new technique whereby sensitized paper becomes satisfactory for survey purposes. These negatives are much less expensive than the regular x-ray film in making preliminary examinations of large groups of industrial workers. Surgery: In the early years of the School of Medicine, surgery received only a part of the attention of one professor—Dr. W i l l i a m Shippen, Jr., w h o f o u n d time to teach anatomy, surgery, and midwifery. But in 1805 a chair devoted solely to surgery was established, and the man w h o was appointed to it is generally recognized as the

SCHOOL OF

MEDICINE

>33

father of American surgery. This was Dr. Philip Syng Physick, who held the chair from 1805 until 1819. Another Professor of Surgery during the nineteenth century was Dr. D. Hayes Agnew, who was, perhaps, the most famous teacher the School of Medicine has known. Appointed to the chair of surgery in 1872, he became the John Rhea Barton Professor of Surgery in 1878, when the chair was endowed by Mrs. Susan R. Barton in honor of her husband, a noted member of the class of 1818. Two of the best-known holders of the Barton chair during the present century have been Dr. John B. Deaver and Dr. Charles Harrison Frazier, who served from 1918 to 1922 and from 1922 to 1936, respectively. Dr. Deaver, one of the most successful surgeons this country has produced, attracted patients from all over the world. Dr. Frazier, one-time Dean of the School of Medicine and a noted author, was widely known for his work in neurological surgery, especially for the relief of tic douloureux. There have been many subdivisions of the Department of Surgery since 1805, when a separate professorship was first established. Gynecology, ophthalmology, and otolaryngology have become separate departments, as has radiology, which was originally under the Department of Surgery. With the trend toward specialization, urology (once known as genito-urinary surgery, a field in which two Barton professors, Dr. J . William White and Dr. Edward Martin, were especially distinguished), neurological surgery, and orthopedic surgery have been established as separate divisions. Another is the Division of Anesthesia, now one of the best in the country. Until 1841 the teaching of surgery was confined almost entirely to didactic lectures and demonstrations. In that year clinical instruction was instituted with the establishment of a system of "dispensary cliniques," and in 1847 a c h a > r of clinical surgery was created. Today a staff of almost fifty surgeons introduce the student to surgery during his preclinical years by lectures and clinics designed to point out the value and importance of the relationship between the preclinical and clinical studies. In addition to the 1 1 2 didactic lectures that he now receives during his four-year course, the student, in his third year, spends 120 hours in the Surgical OutPatient Department, and for one trimester of the fourth year he serves a clinical clerkship on the surgical wards of the University Hospital, the Pennsylvania Hospital, the Episcopal Hospital, the Philadelphia General Hospital, or the Presbyterian Hospital, where he is in constant contact with and under the supervision of members of the University surgical staff.

134

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

T h e object of the instruction is not to turn out finished surgeons, but men with a scientific and clinical foundation in surgery. T o the student who enters a branch of medicine other than surgery, the object is to give a fundamental understanding of surgical lesions in order that he will know when to call a surgeon in consultation. T o the student who will ultimately specialize in surgery, this teaching serves as a foundation for several years of advanced study and training. Like the course of study, the physical equipment for the teaching of surgery has expanded greatly since Dr. W i l l i a m Shippen, Jr., taught surgery in a small wooden structure on F i f t h Street below Chestnut known as Surgeon's Hall. Dr. Physick used rooms in the Presidential Mansion on N i n t h Street, which in 1829 was replaced by the new Medical Hall, where there were three lecture rooms, a museum, and offices—all this to accommodate the 421 students registered in the year 1829-30! W h e n the University Hospital was established in 1874, the facilities for clinical teaching were greatly improved, and there was a further improvement in 1897, w h e n the D. Hayes Agnew Memorial Pavilion with its three surgical amphitheatres was completed. T h e Surgical Department is now housed chiefly in the J. W i l l i a m W h i t e Surgical Pavilion, which at the time of its completion in 1922 was the last word in surgical equipment. T h e men's surgical ward is on the first floor, the women's surgical ward on the second floor. T h e third floor is occupied by the gynecological ward, which is soon to be used as a second men's surgical ward. O n the fourth floor are three surgical amphitheatres. T h e laboratories of surgical pathology, neurosurgical pathology, the surgical record room, and the departmental library are on the fifth floor. In 1931 a seventh floor was added to the White Pavilion. T h i s floor accommodates a women's surgical ward and the office of the John R h e a Barton Professor of Surgery. W i t h the completion of the new Agnew-Dulles building, six additional operating rooms with the most modern equipment available for the practice and teaching of surgery will adjoin the present ones. T h e new construction will also make it possible to bring the Surgical Out-Patient Department from the central building of the Hospital to the ground floor of the W h i t e Pavilion. T h e Orthopedic Division of the Department of Surgery has been especially handicapped since the fire of 1937. In recent years only five beds in the University Hospital have been available for orthopedic patients over twelve years of age. T h e number is so inadequate

SCHOOL

OF

MEDICINE

135

that patients have been kept for many months on a waiting list for admission to the Hospital for operation. T h i s situation has existed in spite of a very significant trend in orthopedic surgery. For long after the Orthopedic Dispensary, or Out-Patient Clinic, of the University Hospital was established by Dr. De Forest Willard in 1877, the chief concern of orthopedic surgeons was the prevention and correction of deformities in children. But during the past twenty-five years there has been an enormous development in this branch of surgery which was stimulated greatly by the World War. O n e of the very important functions of the orthopedic surgeon today is to rehabilitate the adult who has been crippled or disabled in the extremities and the back, a task that frequently requires surgical operation. T h e activity of State and Federal agencies which are attempting to bring aid to every crippled child in the country has also increased the demands upon the orthopedic surgeons of the country. In 1938 the Orthopaedic Hospital of Philadelphia merged w i t h the University of Pennsylvania, an arrangement which has helped to finance the new construction at the University Hospital. T h e completion of the new Agnew-Dulles buildings will permit a surgical ward in the W h i t e Pavilion to be converted into a ward for adult orthopedic cases providing beds for twelve to fifteen patients of each sex. T h e increased operating-room facilities resulting from the new construction will make possible prompt and adequate surgical procedures. Included will be a special room for putting on plaster casts after operations or manipulations and for the reduction of fractures. Another improvement will be the enlargement of the Out-Patient Department. T h e present space available at the rear of the Agnew Pavilion is much too small to take care of patients, to say nothing of the teaching of students w h o attend during clinic hours. It is expected that greatly enlarged quarters will be made available on the ground floor of the W h i t e Pavilion. Until these changes occur, much of the instruction in orthopedic surgery will continue at the Orthopaedic Hospital, which will be closed when the improvements at the University Hospital are complete. The Harrison Department of Surgical Research: Since 1906, when the Department of Surgical Research was organized, surgical research has been carried on in rooms on the second floor of the Medical Laboratories adjoining the Department of Pathology. W i t h the completion of the Anatomy-Chemistry wing in 1928 the Department expanded into adjacent laboratories in the new building. T h e laboratories are thus in the center of the research activities in pathology,

136

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

physiological chemistry, a n d anatomy, w i t h w h i c h surgical research is closely allied. W h e n the new A g n e w - D u l l e s b u i l d i n g s of the University Hospital are completed, an a d d i t i o n a l laboratory, elaborately e q u i p p e d for clinical research in surgery, w i l l o c c u p y the fifth floor of the A g n e w B u i l d i n g , where investigations can be carried on more conveniently in cooperation w i t h the D e p a r t m e n t of Surgery. T h i s continual increase in the facilities of the D e p a r t m e n t is o w i n g partly to the recognition of the i m p o r t a n c e of surgical research and partly to the large e n d o w m e n t of the D e p a r t m e n t , to w h i c h that recognition has led. I n 1926, t h r o u g h a bequest f r o m the late Dr. J. W i l l i a m W h i t e , funds became a v a i l a b l e for a chair of surgical research, a n d the activities of the D e p a r t m e n t increased considerably. T h e greatest increase, however, has resulted f r o m the generous bequest for surgical research made by the late G e o r g e L e i b Harrison. In 1936, w h e n the Harrison F u n d (the largest e n d o w m e n t in the w o r l d devoted to surgical research) b e c a m e available, the Department was reorganized as the G e o r g e L e i b a n d E m i l y M c M i c h a e l Harrison Department of Surgical Research, w i t h the H a r r i s o n Professor of Surgery as Director of the D e p a r t m e n t . T h e r e are n o w several subsections in the Department. O n e of these is an excellent laboratory of surgical bacteriological research. A n o t h e r is a laboratory of orthopedic research, the first of its k i n d in any surgical research department in this country. T h e program of the Department is t w o f o l d : O n o n e h a n d it trains the research fellows w h o are so i m p o r t a n t in any p r o g r a m of advanced medical instruction; on the other it conducts research, m u c h of it in cooperation w i t h other departments of the School of Medicine. T h e r e are j u n i o r a n d senior fellows. T h e j u n i o r fellows are selected graduates of class A medical schools w h o wish to specialize in surgery. For five years they devote their time to study a n d research in surgery, anatomy, and pathology, b o t h in the laboratories of the Medical School and in hospital clinics. A t the e n d of their t r a i n i n g they have become technically proficient surgeons w i t h g o o d surgical judgment, and they may become candidates for the degree of D o c t o r of Medical Sciences in Surgery in the G r a d u a t e School of Medicine. T h e senior fellows are selected f r o m applicants w h o s e records show that they are capable of independent investigation. A s a rule they are already qualified surgeons. T h e fellows as well as the p e r m a n e n t m e m b e r s of the staff participate in the important research activities of the D e p a r t m e n t . I n recent vears these have been chiefly concerned w i t h the problems of

SCHOOL

OF

MEDICINE

>37

nutrition, the physiology and pathologic physiology of the liver and gall bladder, surgical shock and high blood pressure, the action of new chemical substances on infections, the effect of a deficient oxygen supply to the brain during anesthesia or from other causes, and the problems of circulating clots (embolisms) which cause unexpected death after operation. One especially interesting development has been the invention of a perfusion apparatus or artificial heart which will permit the maintenance of life in an animal after complete stoppage of the heart's action. T h i s apparatus apparently is the finest of its type now available, for, whereas other apparatus can be used for a single organ, this device permits of perfusion of the entire animal with sterile blood. It already has permitted the study of circulation under conditions of the most precise laboratory control, and its ultimate purpose is to make possible the medical and surgical treatment of the human heart by measures that cannot now be employed. Surgical research is no longer primarily concerned with developing new techniques of operations, but with making operations safer. T h i s has been accomplished by acquiring more intimate knowledge of the reactions of the surgical patient to his disease. A s an example of what can be done in this direction the following facts are interesting: Prior to 1937 about one in every ten patients operated on for obstructive jaundice died from hemorrhage, but since the administration of bile salts and vitamin Κ to patients before operation, post-operative hemorrhage is no longer a frequent complication. Similarly, prior to the use of sulfanilamide in conjunction with operations, acute suppurative infections of the appendix were associated with a high mortality. N o w the mortality in the University Hospital is less than one per cent. In both instances operative technique remains the same, but pre- and post-operative care has thrown added safeguards around the patient. Obstetrics and Gynecology: T h e Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology has three divisions: obstetrics, gynecology, and research, the latter bearing the name of the Gynecean Hospital Institute of Gynecologic Research. Prior to 1927 obstetrics and gynecology were independent departments, and the present scattered location of the activities of the Department and its staff of forty-four represents partly the earlier division and partly the failure of building facilities to keep pace with the development of medical education. A t present the Obstetrics Division is housed in the Maternity buildings, w h i c h were erected largely through the generosity and

138

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

efforts of Dr. Barton Cooke Hirst, an inspiring teacher and the author of standard works on obstetrics and gynecology that passed through many editions. Theoretical and clinical teaching in obstetrics is provided for in these buildings and at the Philadelphia Lying-in Hospital. In addition certain lectures are given in the Medical Laboratories. T h e work in gynecology is carried on mainly in the J . William White Pavilion at Thirty-fourth and Spruce streets and in the Gynecological Out-Patient Section in the central building of the University Hospital. In the White Pavilion are the J o h n G . Clark Gynecological W a r d and the J o h n G . Clark Amphitheatre, both named f o r the holder of the William Goodell Professorship of Gynecology from 1900 to 1927, in whose honor his patients and friends established in 1931 the J o h n G . Clark Memorial F u n d for Gynecology. Another endowment, known as the Dr. J o h n G . Clark Fund, created in 1931 by the bequest of Mrs. J . Louis Ketterlinus, is used for the work in gynecology and for research fellowships. Dr. Clark, a preeminent surgeon and a scientist of the highest order, was a pioneer in the use of radium in gynecologic practice and one of the first to advocate radical operation f o r cancer of the female genital tract. H e was also the founder of the Undergraduate Medical Association, an important research organization in the School of Medicine. T h e Cystoscopic Section and the extensive laboratory of the Department are also in the White Pavilion. T h e laboratory examines more than nine hundred pathologic specimens yearly, and the increasingly important Section on Endocrinology carries out approximately five hundred complex biologic tests relating to sterility, hormones, and pregnancy. Cystoscopy was introduced into the Gynecological Division by Dr. Clark's successor, Dr. Floyd E. Keene, a brilliant surgeon and author, who died in 1938. Dr. Keene was also largely responsible for the inauguration of the work in endocrinology and sterility. F o r instruction in gynecology, the Department uses all of these facilities and the Radiologic Clinic of the Philadelphia General Hospital. T h e Gynecean Hospital Institute occupies several large laboratories in the Anatomy-Chemistry wing of the Medical Laboratories. T h e Institute is the direct outgrowth of the Gynecean Hospital, founded in 1886 by the late Dr. R . A. F. Penrose, who held the chair of Obstetrics and Diseases of Women and Children in the University f r o m 1863 to 1888. In 1923 this hospital ceased to function, and in 1926 its Board of Governors founded the Gynecean Hospital Insti-

M A L O N E Y CLINIC

GRADUATE

HOSPITAL

SCHOOL

OF MEDICINE

139

tute of Gynecologic Research to perpetuate the name of the hospital by means of research in the diseases of women, placing the Institute under the auspices of the Trustees of the University. Four extremely interesting investigations, which the Institute has been carrying out over a number of years, have dealt with the effect of radium and roentgen therapy of women upon the health and development of their future offspring, the reproductive characteristics of parents of congenitally malformed children, new methods for the treatment of the asphyxia of the newborn, and the sensitivity of the uterine muscle. Perhaps the most significant results have come from the first two of these, both of which are primarily concerned with the birth of physically defective children. It seems to have been established that one-third of the children of women who have been subjected to heavy therapeutic irradiation during early pregnancy are born deformed and that one-half of these are microcephalic, and also, that if parents have produced one deformed child, the chances that additional children will also be deformed are twenty-five times greater than with other couples. In addition various members of the staff are engaged in important research problems carried on independently and in collaboration with the Departments of Physiological Chemistry, Pediatrics, and Radiology. This work, much of it supported by grants from various organizations, is concerned with sex endocrinology. In this field it has been possible, with the Department of Physiological Chemistry, to announce during the summer of 1939 the isolation of the pregnancy hormone involved in the diagnosis of pregnancy. Clinical studies of the toxemias of pregnancy and of the various tumors that afflict women are also under way. T h e scattered location of the divisions of the Department will shortly be changed. With the completion of the Agnew-Dulles buildings, all of the work in obstetrics and gynecology will be virtually under one roof. Although some teaching will continue at the Philadelphia Lying-in Hospital and the Philadelphia General Hospital, the remainder of the work in obstetrics and gynecology will be brought to the new building, including all the research activities of the Department. T h e latter will utilize the entire fifth floor of the Dulles wing, construction and equipment of the floor having been made possible by a grant from the Commonwealth Fund. When the changes are complete, the Department will enjoy centralized facilities in keeping with the record created by a long line of distinguished teachers and practitioners.

140

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

That record is long and too complex to give in detail here. It starts with Dr. William Shippen, Jr., who taught anatomy, surgery, and midwifery to the early medical students. In 1810 midwifery, as it was called until the thirties, was separated from surgery with the appointment of a Professor of Midwifery and the Diseases of Women and Children, Dr. Thomas Chalkley James, the first man in this country successfully to induce premature labor. Under Dr. James, gynecology first became officially a part of the medical curriculum. After 1874, when Dr. William Goodell, in whose honor the Goodell Chair of Gynecology was established in 1919, was appointed Clinical Professor of the Diseases of Women and Children, obstetrics and gynecology were separated. Complete separation, however, did not occur until the retirement, in 1888, of Dr. R. A. F. Penrose, who had held the chair of Obstetrics and Diseases of Women and Children since 1863. Finally, in 1927, the two obviously related branches were once more combined under the title of Obstetrics and Gynecology. Pediatrics: The development of medicine in general is partly responsible for the present importance of pediatrics in the medical curriculum and the practice of medicine, but a contributing factor has been the falling birth-rate in the population at large and the recognition that the fewer children of the future will become more valuable as potential citizens. It is natural, therefore, that preventive medicine and the study of healthy children should be so important in pediatrics today, and that the Department of Pediatrics at the University should make use of the entire facilities of one large hospital and to a lesser extent the facilities of three others. Something of this development is indicated in the history of pediatrics at the University of Pennsylvania. The diseases of children first received attention in the curriculum in 1810, when Thomas Chalkley James was appointed to the new professorship of Midwifery and the Diseases of Women and Children. So matters stood until 1874, when a further division was made and Dr. William Goodell was appointed Clinical Professor of the Diseases of Women and Children. Then in 1884, four years before the founding of the American Pediatric Society, the child as an individual and not as an appendage of his mother was recognized at Pennsylvania, and a clinical professorship in pediatrics was founded. This chair was occupied successively by Louis Starr, Hobart A. Hare, and J . P. Crozer Griffith, the latter being raised to the rank of full professor in 1913. In 1930 the chair was endowed and Dr. J . Claxton

SCHOOL OF MEDICINE

141

Gittings, who had succeeded Dr. Griffith in 1924, became the William H. Bennett Professor of Pediatrics, retiring in 1939. Although the Department conducts a clinic in the University Hospital, most of the work of its staff of forty physicians is carried on in the Children's Hospital at Eighteenth and Bainbridge streets, a little over a mile from the Campus and close to the Graduate Hospital. Additional teaching is done in the Philadelphia General Hospital and St. Christopher's Hospital for Children. T h e Children's Hospital, the oldest children's hospital in America and the third oldest in the world, has its own Board of Managers, entirely independent of the University of Pennsylvania, but in 1930 an arrangement was concluded providing that the Professor of Pediatrics in the Medical School should be a member of the visiting staff of the Hospital and should serve as Physician-in-Chief of its Medical Division, with the privilege of nominating his associates and assistants. Because it is one of the most modern hospital plants in the City, with 120 beds, with out-patient departments that receive more than forty thousand visits annually, and with more than adequate research facilities, the fourth-year students who go there to study both sick and well children are benefited greatly by the arrangement. In 1925 the Department began its participation in the research activities of the Medical School, and since 1930 most of its contributions to the literature of pediatrics have resulted from investigations carried on through the Research Division of the Children's Hospital. These have comprised studies ranging from improved methods of treatment to the attempt to discover the relationship between heredity and diet and the resistance to disease. Another type of research carried on by the Department is concerned with diseases that affect both children and adults—a field of investigation that is especially significant because childhood affords the best opportunity for determining the initial changes brought about by a particular disease before the body begins the degeneration caused by age, intemperance, accident, or other diseases. OTHER CLINICAL DEPARTMENTS OF THE MEDICAL SCHOOL

Ophthalmology: Instruction in diseases of the eye began in the School of Medicine in 1870, when Dr. George Strawbridge established an eye and ear clinic in Medical Hall at Ninth and Chestnut streets. Associated with him was Dr. William F. Norris, who in 1874, when the School of Medicine moved to West Philadelphia,

142

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

was a p p o i n t e d Clinical Professor of Diseases of the Eye, becoming Professor of O p h t h a l m o l o g y in 1891. D r . Norris was followed by Dr. George E. deSchweinitz, whose fame as a research worker, clinician, a n d teacher is well known. H i s ability as a teacher is shown by the fact that no less than twelve of the men associated w i t h h i m in the Department attained professorial rank in various medical schools, one of w h o m was his successor, Dr. Τ . B. H o l l o w a y , w h o had gained before his death in 1937 a national reputation for his writings in m a n y branches of ophthalmology. D u r i n g these years the Department was able to take a leading place a m o n g similar institutions in spite of inadequate facilities. T h e Out-Patient Department in the central b u i l d i n g of the Hospital was too small for the large n u m b e r of patients a n d medical students, the ward space consisted of only fourteen beds, and no f u n d s were available for fellowships or research. T h e r e was no secretary, not even an office where adequate records c o u l d be kept. N o w , however, the D e p a r t m e n t finds itself in an era of change a n d development. Offices in the G i b s o n W i n g and a secretarial staff have been provided. T h r e e three-year fellowships have been established, and the out-patient staff has been enlarged. A considerable s u m of money f r o m the M a r k l e F o u n d a t i o n has enabled the Departm e n t to embark o n a three-year program of research w i t h full-time research fellows a n d a full-time chemist. T h i s research is o n two m a j o r problems. G l a u c o m a , a disease in w h i c h increased pressure inside the eye results in blindness, is b e i n g studied f r o m the chemical point of view. It is believed that alterations in the nature of the fluid formed inside the eye m a y account f o r the rise in pressure. T h e second problem, one that has been w i d e l y recognized in recent years because of its association w i t h the d r i v i n g of automobiles at night and in aviation, is " n i g h t blindness." T h e ability of the eye to see at night is affected by the a m o u n t of v i t a m i n A in the body, and the Department's studies are directed t o w a r d solving the relationship between this vitamin a n d the ability to see in d i m illumination. T h e fire of 1937, w h i c h burnt out the o l d eye wards a n d o p e r a t i n g r o o m in the A g n e w Pavilion, was an ill w i n d that blew g o o d to o p h t h a l m o l o g y . W h i l e plans were b e i n g made f o r the new A g n e w D u l l e s buildings, a substantial gift in memory of Mrs. J o h n Frederick Lewis was made to the Department. T h i s will provide a n entire floor (the third) in the new building, w h i c h w i l l house a men's w a r d and a women's ward, each w i t h twelve beds, a completely

SCHOOL

OF

MEDICINE

>43

equipped operating room, a preparation room, and an examining room. T h e r e will also be three private rooms and three or four semi-private rooms. A room for clinical research in ophthalmology will be provided on the fifth floor, which is devoted to surgical research. W h e n the new building is completed, the first floor of the front of the Gibson W i n g will be used by the Department. It will house a completely equipped pathological laboratory with the valuable collection of slides and specimens made by Dr. deSchweinitz and others. Besides the present offices of the Department there will also be a room for the recording of visual fields, so important in the diagnosis of neurological and neurosurgical cases, rooms for the three fellows, and a large staff room, which will contain the complete library of Dr. deSchweinitz. In addition the Out-Patient Department will occupy the whole wing on the floor below the offices and library. Otolaryngology: Before 1924 otology and laryngology were taught in separate departments. Since the early 90's otology had been under the direction of Dr. B. Alexander R a n d a l l and laryngology under Dr. Charles P. Grayson, both prominent members of the medical faculty and well-known Philadelphia physicians. In 1924 Dr. George Fetterolf was appointed Professor of Otolaryngology, a newly created chair, and the work of the two departments was combined. A voluminous writer, Dr. Fetterolf remained as head of the Department until his death in 1932. T h e following year Dr. George M . Coates was appointed to the chair, serving until his retirement in 1939. Dr. Coates was widely known throughout the United States as a surgeon, teacher, and author, and as President of the American Academy of Ophthalmology and Otolaryngology. A l t h o u g h the Otolaryngologic Clinic is one of the very active divisions of the University Hospital, because of lack of space its work has been carried on with considerable difficulty, especially since the fire of 1937, which destroyed operating-room facilities and ward space assigned to the Department. Nevertheless, in the Hospital more than a thousand operations a year are performed on the ear, nose, and throat. Completion of the new Agnew-Dulles buildings will speed u p the operating schedule and will also permit the Out-Patient Department, which receives over five thousand visits a year, to occupy m u c h larger quarters in the central building of the Hospital than the five rooms it uses at present. A n important part of the work of the Department is carried on

144

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

by the Bronchoscopic Clinic, which was established in 1920 by Dr. Chevalier Jackson, the inventor of the bronchoscope and the originator of bronchoscopy. Since the fire, the Bronchoscopic Clinic has had a temporary location at the rear of the A g n e w Pavilion (to be changed ultimately to the ground floor of the W h i t e Pavilion), where each year its staff receives more than 2,500 visits from patients and performs more than 1,200 operative procedures for the removal of foreign bodies from the pharynx, larynx, trachea, esophagus, lungs, and stomach. Dermatology and Syphilology: T h i s department has its clinic in the University Hospital Out-Patient Department, where it receives more than twenty-five thousand visits from patients each year. Its founder, Dr. Louis A . Duhring, was appointed to a clinical professorship in 1874 and to a full professorship in 1890, becoming the holder of one of the first full chairs of dermatology in the United States. T h e generosity of Dr. Duhring, w h o left most of a large fortune to various divisions of the University, provided the endowment for the chair subsequently occupied by Dr. M i l t o n B. Hartzell, w h o established the Laboratory of Dermatological Research, and by Dr. John H . Stokes, called from the M a y o Clinic in 1924. A reorganization carried through following Dr. Stokes's appointment brought all the work in syphilis at the University Hospital within the jurisdiction of the Department of Dermatology and Syphilology. Substantial expenditures from the D u h r i n g endowment and the generosity of members of the Board of Managers of the Hospital made possible extensive expansion of physical plant and equipment. T h e introduction of graduate training and a full-time paid medical staff under the aegis of the Graduate School of Medicine resulted in significant changes in the aims and technique of teaching and research. T h e intake of patients was increased many times. Instructional units adequate for teaching and treatment purposes in roentgenology as applied to dermatology, in actinotherapy, in all aspects of the treatment of syphilis, including intraspinal and fever therapy (except malaria), are provided as necessary parts of a teaching and practice center. W h i l e in the conduct of the more extensive and intricate forms of investigation into the physiology and chemistry of the skin it has been both necessary and desirable to seek the cooperation of appropriate departments in the Medical School and elsewhere (particularly the Department of Physiological Chemistry), the Department has maintained its own laboratories for the conduct of sero-

SCHOOL

OF

MEDICINE

145

logic investigation and, in recent years, for histopathological and other routine clinical as well as investigative services. Since 1924 the activities of the full-time and part-time staff have resulted in the publication of approximately 150 studies. In the field of dermatology these have been concerned with the effect of emotional and nervous states on the skin, and they have represented extended fundamental work on skin metabolism and chemistry, especially with reference to carbohydrate metabolism and water balance, the physiology of sweat, lactic acid production, and susceptibility and resistance to infection. Studies of the reactivity of the skin and its behavior under roentgen irradiation and studies of anergic tuberculosis and tuberculin reactions have furnished material of doctorate thesis calibre. In the field of syphilis, the appointment of the head of the Department to the Commission of Experts on Syphilis of the League of Nations Health Organization initiated a connection with the United States Public Health Service and the so-called Cooperative Clinical Group of five major university syphilis clinics. Under grants from a number of sources, including major foundations, the Committee on Research in Syphilis, the United States Public Health Service, and the Abbott Laboratories, which maintain the Abbott Fellowship for Chemotherapeutic Research, the members of the clinic staff concerned with syphilis have contributed to the studies of the results of and methods for the standardization of treatment for syphilis in the United States and throughout the world. Serologic investigation on the accuracy and sensitivity of diagnostic tests, extended and costly studies of experimental syphilis, particularly concerning treatment-resistant strains of the spirochaeta pallida, the germ cause of the disease, have been made possible in this way. Extensive comparative testing of drugs for the more effective treatment of syphilis has been carried on, the study of treatment reactions has been furthered, and original methods for the tracing of the transmission of syphilis through the community and the holding of patients to treatment until cured have been developed. In 1936, in recognition particularly of the work of the Syphilis Clinic in the field of epidemiology, the State Health Department, with the cooperation of the United States Public Health Service, established in the Department the Institute for the Control of Syphilis, which trains medical and public health nursing personnel for the public campaign against syphilis. In addition, important technical research in the epidemiologic field, including particularly the transmission of the disease by persons who show no active symp-

146

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

toms, is under way. Extensive studies of syphilis in the child infected by its mother have been carried on in the Department. As an integral part of these activities, the head of the Department has served on the Advisory Committee to Surgeon-General Parran and as technical adviser to the Division of Syphilis and Genito-Infectious Diseases of the Pennsylvania State Department of Health. Dermatological Research: T h e Laboratory of Dermatological Research, which is administered independently of the Department of Dermatology and Syphilology, occupies three large rooms on the first floor of the Medical Laboratories. T h e Laboratory, or Department as it may be called, was established in 1917 by Dr. Milton B. Hartzell. A portion of the income of the Duhring bequest is assigned to it. Chiefly concerned with the study and treatment of the patient, the Laboratory is deeply interested in the "whys" and "hows" of clinical dermatology. T h i s is revealed primarily in a very active service in the study of cutaneous biopsy material obtained largely from the Graduate Hospital, the Philadelphia General Hospital, and local and out-of-town physicians. A n extremely important activity is the teaching of graduate students in pathology, including animal parasitology and mycology, for a period of eight months each year. In addition to the regular staff a full-time fellow is assigned to the Laboratory for instruction and research. Prominent among the Laboratory's achievements have been its contribution to the standardization of mycologic mediums, the use of wax reconstructions in the study of such obscure clinical conditions as paraffinomas, multiple sarcoid-like granulomas of the skin, chromoblastomycosis and lymphoblastomycosis. Of special interest has been the study of various types of xanthoma, which, w i t h a report on these yellowing dermatoses, formed the basis of an important monograph. Psychiatry: Benjamin R u s h has been called the first American psychiatrist. For twenty-nine years he was attending physician to the Pennsylvania Hospital and to the mentally ill which it harbored, and his advocacy of the scientific and humane treatment of the "distempered in mind" is well known. T h e present Department of Psychiatry, however, is one of the youngest in the Medical School. For many years two distinguished physicians, first Dr. Charles K. Mills and later Dr. Charles W . Burr, occupied the chair of Mental Diseases and gave clinics to the fourthyear classes, usually in the Philadelphia General Hospital. D u r i n g

SCHOOL

OF

MEDICINE

'47

most of the time they had no associates and carried the entire burden of teaching. In 1930 the Department was named Psychiatry to indicate its wider scope, and the work was extended to all four years of the Medical School course. At present Dr. Edward A. Strecker, chairman of the undergraduate department, heads a staff of twenty-two. Psychiatry also plays an important part in the work of the Graduate School of Medicine. When that school was founded in 1919, Dr. Earl D. Bond was chosen Professor of Psychiatry in the Department of Neuro-psychiatry, becoming Vice-Dean for Psychiatry in 1936, when neurology and psychiatry separated. In the Institute for Mental Hygiene of the Pennsylvania Hospital, which serves as a training ground for students in both schools, the point of view is that all of the psychiatric theories and therapies now being advanced have something of value, but that no one of them possesses all of the truth concerning the complex relationships between the mind and body. Its physicians represent many schools of thought. With the present emphasis on preventive medicine and mental hygiene, the Institute is interested not merely in aggravated cases, but in persons needing some slight readjustment to their environment. One important aspect of its work is with the Student Health Service at the University of Pennsylvania and at neighboring schools and colleges, where it has clearly been shown that young people respond remarkably well to simple psychiatric measures. Many students have been enabled to finish their college courses successfully or have been saved from serious breakdowns. Psychiatric principles have even been extended into such aspects of everyday life as the mass mind and crowd psychology, as seen in the Salmon Memorial Lectures given by Dr. Strecker. Although one psychiatrist, interested in the physical symptoms due to emotional stress, is in regular attendance on the surgical and medical wards of the University Hospital, clinical teaching is carried on only at the Philadelphia General Hospital, the Friends' Hospital in Frankford, and the Pennsylvania Hospital. T h e closest relationship, however, is with the Department for Mental Diseases of the Pennsylvania Hospital and with that Hospital's celebrated Institute for Mental Hygiene. This association is the result of an agreement between the Pennsylvania Hospital and the University under which the Professor of Psychiatry of the University is also Director of the Institute of Mental Hygiene. Although the Institute had been in existence only nine years, its pioneer work in the promotion of men-

148

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

tal health was recognized in 1933, w h e n Dr. B o n d received the Philadelphia Award. T h e Institute provides unusual facilities for the study and treatment not only of neuroses but of the emotional difficulties of people w h o need help in continuing their family and their business lives. Its unique out-patient clinic makes with the patients appointments lasting a f u l l hour. Diagnosis includes not only the tests given in any general hospital, but a careful and sympathetic study by a psychiatrist of hidden emotional causes of maladjustment, a method which combines both treatment and diagnosis. Research is an important part of the work of both the Institute and the Department of Mental Diseases of the Hospital. In the Institute the members of the staff are exploring the psychological, chemical, and electrical aspects of normal and abnormal mental functioning. Migraine, for instance, is now being especially considered. In the Hospital itself, where cases requiring acute or prolonged treatment can be studied, research supported largely by the Rockefeller and Markle Foundations is being carried on in many fields. A t present one of the most important of these is the treatment of dementia praecox by means of insulin-shock. The Laboratory and Department of Public and Preventive Medicine

Health

T h i s department traces its origin to the appointment in 1892 of Colonel John S. Billings, U. S. Α., as Pepper Professor of Hygiene and Director of the Institute of Hygiene, as the laboratory of the Department was then known. In that year the Laboratory, on the east side of Thirty-fourth Street above Spruce, was opened, and the first independent work in bacteriology and hygiene at the University was started. T h e original part of the present laboratory was the gift of Henry C. Lea, and the equipment was provided by Henry C. Gibson, both of w h o m were frequent benefactors of the University. Dr. A l e x a n d e r C. A b b o t t succeeded Colonel Billings in 1896, and under his administration the work so expanded that an addition to the building had to be constructed in 1899. T h i s was partly owing to the fact that medical bacteriology, w h i c h formerly had been taught in the Department of Pathology, was transferred to the Laboratory of Hygiene, as it had come to be known. In 1906 Dr. A b b o t t established a School of Public Hygiene with courses leading to the degree of Doctor of Public Health, but following the f o u n d i n g of the Graduate School of Medicine m u c h of the work in public health was transferred to it, and the School of

GRADUATE

SCHOOL OF MEDICINE

»49

Public Health ceased to function. In 1931 a new Department of Medical Bacteriology was organized in the Medical School, and work in that subject was transferred to the Medical Laboratories. T h e staff of the Laboratory of Hygiene, however, continued to give courses in bacteriology, especially as it relates to public health, food, and industrial processes. These courses are given to the students in nearly every division of the University, including a great number in the Graduate School. In 1939 the name of the Laboratory was changed to the Laboratory of Public Health and Preventive Medicine, and the same change was made in the name of the Pepper chair. T h e changes were the result of a reorganization of the work in hygiene by which the old School of Public Health was in effect revived. Since 1919 space in the Laboratory has been occupied by the Division of Laboratories of the Pennsylvania State Department of Health, which uses a detached animal house at the rear of the building, a large part of the basement, and all of the first floor except a laboratory occupied by the Department of Chemistry, and the large lecture room seating 310, where the Student Health Service gives a course in Personal Hygiene to all freshmen. T h e facilities available to the Department of Public Health and Preventive Medicine include an animal room and rooms for the preparation of media in the basement, and on the second floor a large laboratory accommodating eighty-six students, numerous small laboratories, offices for the staff, and the departmental library. Because the Department cooperates closely with the United States Public Health Service, the State Department of Health, the Philadelphia Board of Health, and numerous industrial organizations as well as with all other departments of the University, the members of the staff are continually engaged in research, the greater part of which is published in government reports and in scientific journals.

THE GRADUATE

SCHOOL OF

MEDICINE

T h e office of the Dean of the Graduate School of Medicine is in the Medical Laboratories, and some of the work of the first period of the course, when the basic studies in the medical sciences are pursued for one year, is carried on there. But the Graduate Hospital at Nineteenth and Lombard streets was built expressly as the teaching center of the School, and a great part of the thirteen thousand student hours of instruction given each year takes place there.

150

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Study in the G r a d u a t e School of Medicine, however, is not confined to hospitals and laboratories maintained by the University of Pennsylvania, for no less than fifty-seven hospitals and other medical organizations in and near Philadelphia cooperate w i t h the University by providing facilities for the first year of study. Indeed, during the second year, w h e n the student-physician serves as a preceptee under a master clinician, he may work in any approved hospital wherever located, or even as an assistant in the private practice of a specialist of recognized achievement. T h e third period of study, which is devoted to research, may also be spent in any location, b u t it is likely to be in the hospitals a n d laboratories of the University of Pennsylvania. T h e G r a d u a t e School of Medicine, like the School of Medicine, is a University "first," a n d a very successful one. T h e School, w h i c h celebrated its twenty-first birthday in 1940, has already given instruction to 4,650 graduates of practically all A m e r i c a n and C a n a d i a n schools of medicine a n d of various other of the world's Englishspeaking medical schools. B y the end of the Bicentennial year it will have conferred the degree of M.Sc. (Med.) o n more than six h u n d r e d student-physicians, the degree of D.Sc. (Med.) o n fifty, a n d will have granted to two thousand its one-year study certificate. E a c h year approximately 270 physicians enroll for study u n d e r a faculty that now numbers 445, and a l t h o u g h the facilities are extensive, prospective students usually must make application a year before they can expect to begin work. Prior to the f o u n d i n g of the G r a d u a t e School of Medicine, no such adequate facilities for graduate study in medicine were available in America. In a n u m b e r of places it had been possible for the graduate physician to o b t a i n additional training, but for the most part this h a d been in polyclinic systems of intensive courses of a few weeks or months, a n d the obvious failure of this type of effort to meet advanced educational requirements was recognized in 1923 in the report to the A m e r i c a n Medical Association of the C o u n c i l o n Medical E d u c a t i o n and Hospitals. Seven years before this report, however, the University h a d m a d e a significant start toward graduate medical education in A m e r i c a . I n 1916 a merger was arranged w i t h the Medico-Chirurgical C o l l e g e a n d Hospital for the purpose of establishing a graduate school of medicine as a part of the University. America's entry into the W o r l d W a r prevented the actual opening of the school, but by 1918, w h e n a second merger, w i t h the Philadelphia Polyclinic and C o l l e g e for Graduates, took place, the faculty had been organized, a n d in 1919

GRADUATE

SCHOOL OF

MEDICINE

the first students were admitted. As a result of the two mergers and subsequent mergers and benefactions, the University acquired assets totaling more than $4,000,000 for graduate medical education. The beginnings of the project were due largely to the late Provost Edgar Fahs Smith and two members of the medical faculty, who were aided by the advice of the Carnegie Foundation and the General Education Board. Its organization was placed in the hands of Dr. George H. Meeker, formerly Professor of Chemistry in the Medico-Chirurgical College, who became the Dean of the School. He formulated and put into effect the "Pennsylvania Plan" of graduate study adopted in 1919, which at least in its essentials is looked on as the model for graduate study in medicine in the United States. Under the plan properly qualified graduates in medicine follow a definite and highly organized program of studies lasting from at least one academic year of thirty-two weeks to 136 weeks or even longer. A principal purpose of the program is to qualify the student for the practice of one of the twelve clinical specialties represented in the curricula of the Graduate School of Medicine, at the same time giving him a thorough grounding in the basic medical sciences. Training in research is also an important part of the work, and a satisfactory thesis is required of all who are to receive the D.Sc. Something of the foresight and high standards represented by the Pennsylvania Plan is indicated by a more recent development in graduate medical education. In order to improve the standards of medical specialization in the United States, various organizations in the medical profession, including the American Medical Association, united to set up the "American Boards," which conduct examinations to determine whether the physician has fully qualified himself for specialization by means of a thorough and well-planned course including adequate work in the medical sciences and study under master clinicians. It is significant that the requirements of these boards were anticipated from the beginning by the plan of graduate medical education carried out under the supervision of the University of Pennsylvania. The Graduate

Hospital

T h e principal teaching center of the Graduate School of Medicine is the Graduate Hospital, a twelve-story structure of yellow brick that was completed in 1928. T h e vertical lines of the architectural design and the large area devoted to windows give the Hospital the appearance of a modern office building—or perhaps better, of a modern city hospital.

«52

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

T h e b u i l d i n g is on the southeast corner of N i n e t e e n t h a n d Lombard streets a n d extends south to N a u d a i n Street. It is L-shaped; the shorter wing, in w h i c h is the m a i n entrance, faces o n L o m b a r d Street. A d j a c e n t o n L o m b a r d Street are the buildings of the old Polyclinic Hospital, w h i c h now house classrooms, out-patient departments, the Social Service D e p a r t m e n t , the nurses' home, and administrative offices. T h e entire block b o u n d e d by Eighteenth, Nineteenth, L o m b a r d , and N a u d a i n streets is o w n e d by the University, and it is expected that ultimately the area will be occupied by a modern hospital b u i l d i n g of w h i c h the section erected in 1928 will be but a wing. T h i s section, nevertheless, is a large hospital. It has fifty-four private rooms (on the third to n i n t h floors of the L o m b a r d Street wing), and a total capacity of five h u n d r e d beds. It is organized a n d staffed for all the clinical departments of medicine except psychopathic and contagious diseases a n d obstetrics. T h e first floor contains accident a n d receiving wards a n d the diet kitchen, the basement housing all the mechanical e q u i p m e n t . T h e second floor has the offices of the Hospital, the X-ray D e p a r t m e n t , and the children's medical ward, w h i c h is very busy, for the Hospital is in a densely p o p u l a t e d section of the C i t y . T h e third floor contains semi-private rooms w i t h fifty-eight beds. T h e f o u r t h to eighth floors have wards for medical a n d surgical cases a n d the specialties. T h e entire ninth floor is devoted exclusively to gynecology. T h e tenth floor contains the seven o p e r a t i n g rooms of the Hospital, a n extensive laboratory of surgical pathology, a n d the Chevalier Jackson Bronchoscopic Clinic. O n the mezzanine over the tenth floor are dressing rooms for the staff a n d the student physicians and entrances to the amphitheatres of the o p e r a t i n g rooms. O n the roof is a solarium, a lounge, a n d a restaurant seating 150. T h e importance of the Hospital to the G r a d u a t e School of Medicine and also to the sick of P h i l a d e l p h i a is revealed by some figures o n the records of the Hospital. E a c h year some 8,000 in-patients spend a total of 50,000 "patient d a y s " in the Hospital, a n d 35,000 a m b u l a n t patients make 175,000 visits to the out-patient departments. T h e f o u r h u n d r e d and more physicians o n the staff of the G r a d u a t e School of M e d i c i n e care for these patients, aided by a resident staff of sixteen internes a n d nine residents, and a Social Service Department of ten workers. In addition to graduate medical education, the Hospital conducts courses lasting from a year to eighteen months for hospital workers. E a c h year some two h u n d r e d persons in these courses are l e a r n i n g

WISTAR

INSTITUTE

'53

to become physical therapists, x-ray technicians, dietitians, and to keep medical records. Included are eighty students in the Philadelphia School of Occupational Therapy, which is affiliated with the Graduate Hospital.

THE WISTAR

INSTITUTE

On the west side of Thirty-sixth Street, facing Logan Hall, is the yellow brick building that houses the Wistar Institute of Anatomy and Biology, the first anatomical institute in America devoted entirely to research. T h e Institute is an auxiliary division of the University, and the relationship is best indicated by the way in which the nine members of the Board of Managers are selected. Six of these are chosen by the Trustees of the University, two by the Academy of Natural Sciences from its own membership, and one must be a lineal descendant of the father of General Isaac J . Wistar, who founded the Institute in 1892 in honor of his great-uncle, Dr. Caspar Wistar, and who by various gifts and the bequest of his residuary estate provided an endowment that will ultimately amount to approximately three million dollars. T h e original building of the Institute, which stretches along Thirty-sixth Street from Spruce Street to Woodland Avenue, was dedicated in 1894. In 1897 an addition extending a short distance along Woodland Avenue was completed. A t present the Institute owns the entire triangle bounded by Thirty-sixth and Spruce streets and Woodland Avenue, much of the land being the gift of the University. Until 1902 a Philadelphia police station stood at the western end. In that year the City was willing to sell out for $12,000, and part of the station house was converted into a rat colony. T h e station house was torn down in 1932, when the sandstone basement of what is planned to be a new museum of imposing architecture was constructed along Woodland Avenue. At the same time a new building for the rat colonies was erected in the court in the rear. A m o n g the Institute's collections are most of the original specimens of the Wistar and Horner Museum of Anatomy, begun in 1808 by Caspar Wistar. T h e Institute was founded to provide for the safe preservation, intelligent arrangement, and free exhibition of these specimens and their increase to a complete collection useful in the advanced study of biology and anatomy, and to make permanent the progress in anatomical research to which such University scientists as Leidy, Cope, R y d e r , and T y s o n had contributed so

»54

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

greatly. T h e anatomical specimens, which have been continually added to, include preserved embryos, monstrosities, a large variety of skeletons of various human races and other mammals, and specimens illustrating modern surgical methods of overcoming pathological conditions. T h e collection of the brains of scholars is well known, one of the latest additions being the brain of the English scientist J. B. S. Haldane. All told, there are close to twenty thousand anatomical preparations. A number of objects of historical interest are in the Institute, mainly in a large room on the second floor filled with General Wistar's bookcases, which contain the four thousand volumes of his personal library. In the room is a collection of colonial furniture, including a highboy damaged by Pulaski's cavalry in 1778 and two settees inherited by General Wistar through his mother from Thomas Mifflin, the first governor of Pennsylvania and a graduate of the College of Philadelphia. In a large case near the entrance of the Institute are numerous military relics of the General, who had a picturesque career in the California gold rush and later took part in the Battle of Gettysburg. T h e Institute does not believe, however, that it should serve only as a depository of relics and a storehouse of bones. It envisages a new type of living museum in which exhibitions of current medical research and working models, operated and illuminated by electricity, would serve as a textbook of anatomy and physiology for medical students and the general public. A start in this direction has been made by adding to the equipment a library of anatomical, biological, and medical films, many of them with sound track and most of them in color. Besides the exhibition rooms, offices, library, photographic room, and machine shop, the main building contains three large laboratories, each accommodating four to six men, and fifteen small laboratories, each occupied by a single research worker. Here is carried on research in anatomy, experimental zoology and genetics, neuro-embryology, biochemistry and nutrition. A n important part in this research is played by the famous Wistar rats, now nearing their two-hundredth generation. As a result of the unsurpassed hygienic conditions under which they are bred, the surplus has a ready sale to other institutions. In the colony houses are kept a few specimens of all the rare strains of rats, so that if a war or other catastrophe should destroy European colonies, experiments in these strains could be resumed and the results of years of research would not be lost.

P H I P P S INSTITUTE

SCHOOL OF V E T E R I N A R Y MEDICINE

I

PHIPPS INSTITUTE

155

Because it is independent of any teaching institution and therefore can serve all institutions better, the Institute acts as a center for the dissemination of the results of anatomical and biological research throughout the world. It does this by publishing the following learned journals, which are edited in various institutions, including the University of Pennsylvania and the Institute itself: Journal of Morphology, Journal of Comparative Neurology, American Journal of Anatomy, Anatomical Record, Journal of Experimental Zoology, American Journal of Physical Anthropology, Journal of Cellular and Comparative Physiology, Journal of Nutrition, American Anatomical Memoirs, Publications of the Biological Survey of the Mount Desert Region. In addition there is a Bibliographical Service, which issues abstracts of papers in advance of their appearance in journals. T h e printing of these publications is done in a complete plant located in special quarters of the Institute building on Woodland Avenue. An important part of the Institute's research facilities is the Morris Biological Farm of 150 acres near Bristol, Pennsylvania, given in 1928 by Effingham B. Morris, the late President of the Board. T h e gift included livestock, farm equipment, and funds for scientific equipment and the reconstruction of the early American farmhouse as a residence for investigators. Additional residences have since been constructed, along with laboratories, aquaria, and colony houses for rats and opossums. T h e facilities for research with opossums and amphibia are unique.

THE PHIPPS

INSTITUTE

T h e Henry Phipps Institute for the Study, Treatment, and Prevention of Tuberculosis is one of the world's productive centers of research in tuberculosis. It was established in 1903 by Mr. Henry Phipps and was given by him to the University in 1910. During the first ten years of the University's responsibility for the Institute, it was maintained by annual gifts from the founder. Since then it has been supported by appropriations from the University and by contributions from philanthropic foundations, the Welfare Federation, and private benefactors, including members of the family of Mr. Phipps. In 1928 a considerable endowment was secured, half of it from the Phipps family and half from previous endowments and a contribution set aside by the University. T h e Institute occupies a brick building of modified colonial de-

156

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

sign at Seventh and Lombard streets, completed in 1 9 1 3 . On the first floor are the general offices, record rooms, examining rooms, a drug room, and treatment rooms; on the second are a large collapse therapy clinic and most of the laboratories; on the third are research laboratories and quarters for experimental animals; on the fourth is the X-ray Department with storage space for the seventy thousand films now on file; on the fifth is the library. T h e basement is divided: in the front wing are nurses' offices and an auditorium; in the rear wing are shops, laundry, furnace rooms, and certain special research rooms. T h e location of the building in a highly congested section of the City makes possible especially effective care of ambulant tuberculous patients (no bed patients are cared for) and the Institute's extensive program of research. On the average about 3,000 patients make 14,000 visits a year to the clinic. T h e y come from approximately 1,000 families that are under constant supervision by the medical and nursing staff of the Institute. Close to twenty per cent of the patients have clinical tuberculosis; the rest are under observation because they are or have been in contact with the disease. In addition to medical and nursing service, more than 10,000 laboratory tests and 4,000 x-ray examinations are made annually. Virtually all of these services are provided to the community without cost by a staff composed of nine full-time physicians, eight part-time physicians, eight public health nurses, and various secretarial, clinical, and technical assistants. Supplementing the regular staff are visiting physicians and nurses sponsored by philanthropic foundations and departments of health, and also a group of ten Negro physicians and twelve Negro nurses, who, supported by the Philadelphia Health Council and Tuberculosis Committee, are engaged in one of the most active Negro antituberculosis campaigns in the country. In recent years the Institute's research activities have been concentrated on problems of epidemiology, Negro tuberculosis, and the chemistry of the important active principles of the bacteriological cause of tuberculosis. T h e epidemiological investigations have attracted world-wide attention. Fundamental studies, inaugurated in 1924, on the spread of tuberculosis in families, have provided the background and many of the technical methods for the present nationally organized campaign against the disease. One of the most notable of modern contributions toward understanding the disease—the knowledge that pulmonary tuberculosis may smolder without giving other evidence

EVANS

INSTITUTE

'57

of its presence than that obtained by the x-ray film—is in large part due to the work of the Phipps Institute. In the important field of Negro tuberculosis, the Institute has pioneered in the training of Negro physicians and public health nurses. Experience has shown that the serious problem of tuberculosis among Negroes can best be handled by placing heavy responsibility on well-trained Negroes, who are sympathetic to the traditions of the race. One of the best-known achievements of the Institute is the purification of the active principle of tuberculin, a substance used in the detection of tuberculosis both in men and cattle. These investigations, which made possible the standardization of tuberculin, were carried on largely by means of a Tiselius electrophoresis apparatus, a precision instrument, the gift of the Carnegie Corporation, that represents the most modern mechanical construction in its particular field of physical chemistry. T h e work in the chemistry and immunology of tuberculin resulted in the award of the T r u d e a u medal in 1938 to a member of the staff.

THE EVANS INSTITUTE AND THE SCHOOL OF DENTISTRY T h e School of Dentistry of the University of Pennsylvania was organized in 1878, shortly after the Robert Hare Laboratory had been completed; and until 1896 it occupied space in both the H a r e Laboratory and L o g a n Hall, which was then called Medical H a l l and was the home of the Medical School until 1904. In 1896 a new building on the west side of Thirty-third Street north of Spruce was provided for it, but in less than twenty years the School had outgrown those quarters, partly as a result of a merger in 1909 with the Pennsylvania College of Dental Surgery, which had been founded in 1856, following a separation from the slightly older Philadelphia College of Dental Surgery. In 1 9 1 5 the Dental School moved into its present home, on the northwest corner of Fortieth and Spruce streets, an Η-shaped building of T u d o r Gothic architecture. Over the doorway at the base of the tower the passer-by will read: • T h e · Thomas · W · Evans · Museum · and · Dental · Institute · • School · of · Dentistry University · of · Pennsylvania · A n d the catalogue of the Dental School, as both the building, and

158

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

the justly distinguished school which it houses are known to most Pennsylvanians, is equally ambiguous. T h e same words are printed (in four lines instead of two) on the cover of the catalogue, without benefit of punctuation. Perhaps a short history of the Evans Institute will clear u p a situation that is complicated by a number of legal considerations. In 1897 Dr. T h o m a s W . Evans, a native P h i l a d e l p h i a s died in Paris, leaving an estate of $3,500,000, the result of his having cared for the teeth of many of the crowned heads of Europe and other important and wealthy Europeans, and from the wise investment of the funds so acquired. T h e entire estate was bequeathed to " T h e T h o m a s W . Evans M u s e u m and Dental Institute Society" for the purpose of building and endowing a dental "institute" or school at Fortieth and Spruce streets, where Dr. Evans had been born. Unfortunately no such society had yet been created, and although Mayor Ashbridge of Philadelphia a few weeks later organized one, the French courts decided that the money should stay in France. A f t e r years of litigation, however, a compromise was effected and ultimately the Society f o u n d itself in possession of about $1,750,000, a handsome sum, but not enough to create a dental school, as Dr. Evans' will had directed, "inferior to none" in the city of Philadelphia. Very sensibly, then, in 1912, the Society entered into an agreement, to last 999 years, with the Trustees of the University, whereby the T h o m a s W . Evans Dental Institute would be constructed and equipped by the Society, and instruction would be given by the faculty of the School of Dentistry of the University of Pennsylvania, the remainder of the funds serving as endowment. T h e name over the door is intended to express this relationship without giving undue emphasis to either party of the contract. T h e Museum is something else. W h e n the good doctor died, he possessed a most remarkable collection of pictures, statuary, vases, clocks, and other Victorian objects of art, most of them gifts of royalty, to w h o m it w o u l d have been improper to send a bill. H e had silver tea sets, chinaware, a Bible collection, scientific and literary manuscripts, autographed letters and decorations from royalty, jewelry valued today at $40,000, and a closed carriage in which in 1870 he had smuggled the Empress E u g i n i e out of Paris and away from the enraged C o m m u n e . A t the end of his life, proud of these symbols of a career that had in it something of an Alger book and something of A Tale of Two Cities, he directed in his will that the building erected by the Society should contain "an absolutely fire-

EVANS

INSTITUTE

»59

proof room and positively burglar proof," in which the objects should repose forever. Few people now seek to enter the Museum, but the Secretary of the Society is glad to unlock the doors for the occasional visitor and show the carefully guarded treasures on the ground floor of the southeast wing. Dr. Evans stipulated that the building should be of "refined and artistic beauty," and his will has been.faithfully executed. T h e tower, which rises eighty-four feet over the center of the Spruce Street side, is perhaps the most impressive feature, but the general effect of the building with its richly carved limestone trim and mullioned windows has been greatly admired. T h e interior design is equally effective. After passing through the main entrance, one glances u p a handsome marble stairway to a stained-glass window over a low Gothic doorway. T h e view is very likely to appear in the class record published each year by the hundred dental graduates w h o come from all parts of the world to receive the degree of D.D.S. from the University of Pennsylvania. On the Spruce Street side of the first floor, to the left of the entrance, are the administrative offices with a board room adjoining. T o the right is the Museum, the office of the Secretary of the Society, and a diagnostic clinic. Along the entire north side stretches a clinic f o r plate prosthesis (the fitting of sets of false teeth). Also on the first floor is an x-ray clinic containing machines that are kept busy most of the time. After a patient (20,000 of them come to the Institute each year) has visited this clinic, he is likely to go across the hall to the exodontic clinic, where more than 50,000 teeth are extracted annually. Stretching along the entire north side of the second floor is an operative clinic. L i k e the plate clinic below, this room is lighted by huge windows overlooking property owned by the Institute as insurance against the light being cut off by the erection of tall buildings. T h e room measures 205 by 48 feet and has a ceiling thirty feet high; in it are 132 dental chairs, which, like most of the 228 chairs in the Institute, were replaced in 1 9 3 1 . T h e library, which is on the south side of the second floor and is two stories in height, contains more than ten thousand volumes of the standard and periodical literature of dentistry. Included is a collection of cartoons and prints illustrating the practices of the times when dentistry was not the science it is today. T h e remaining facilities in the building cannot be mentioned in detail. T h e r e are two lecture rooms seating f o u r hundred and three

ι6ο

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

h u n d r e d students, respectively; there are clinics f o r crcwn a n d bridge w o r k a n d f o r o r t h o d o n t i a . Bacteriology, histology, a n d pharmacology, as they especially relate to the mouth, are taught in laboratories in the Institute, b u t f u n d a m e n t a l courses in anatomy, histology, physiological chemistry, physiology, and pathology are given in the Medical L a b o r a t o r i e s on H a m i l t o n W a l k . In the basement are the mechanical laboratories, w h e r e m u c h of the $10,000 worth of gold a n d other precious metals used each year by the Institute is f a s h i o n e d into dentures. Dentistry has a d v a n c e d since 1878, w h e n the School was f o u n d e d , a n d that advance is symbolized by the present course of s t u d y — a n d the ninety members of the f a c u l t y w h o give i t — q u i t e as well as by the b u i l d i n g a n d e q u i p m e n t . T h e constantly increasing k n o w l e d g e of the relationship of the m o u t h a n d teeth to bodily health has made of the modern dentist a physician w h o is concerned with the w h o l e body. It is n a t u r a l , therefore, that the course of study should closely parallel in o u t l i n e the course i n medicine, w i t h the first two years devoted p r i m a r i l y to the study of the f u n d a m e n t a l sciences of anatomy, bacteriology, physiological chemistry, physiology, a n d pathology, and the last two years to dental technique a n d to a clinical study of the diseases of the m o u t h a n d teeth, w i t h w h i c h the work of the first two years is closely correlated. It is natural, too, that great care should be exercised in the selection of students. I n the earlier years of the School v i r t u a l l y no entrance requirements existed, but w i t h the raising of the standards in the profession it was f o u n d desirable, in 1927, to d e m a n d a p r e l i m i n a r y two years of collegc w o r k of the student w h o wishes to enroll, a n d at present nearly half of the matriculates have a Bachelor's degree. T h e purpose of the Institute is not only to prepare m e n a n d w o m e n (women were first a d m i t t e d in 1 9 1 4 ) f o r the practice of dentistry, but to stimulate research, a n d therefore there are indiv i d u a l private laboratories w h e r e investigations by members of the faculty, advanced students, a n d graduates are conducted. O t h e r research is regularly carried o n in the Medical L a b o r a t o r i e s in cooperation with v a r i o u s departments of the Medical School. Evidence of this activity can be f o u n d in the Institute's a n n u a l bibliography, w h i c h each year contains considerably more than a h u n d r e d entries of publications by members of the faculty and graduates. A b o u t one-third of these are by members of the faculty, a n d deal both with f u n d a m e n t a l problems of anatomy, bacteriology, etc., and with problems directly related to dentistry. It is significant that graduates are also active in research.

VETERINARY

MEDICINE

THE SCHOOL OF VETERINARY MEDICINE THE VETERINARY HOSPITAL

161

AND

T h e Veterinary building, which is at Thirty-ninth Street and Woodland Avenue, was designed in a style of architecture adapted from the English collegiate of the seventeenth century. It forms a quadrangle 260 by 210 feet, and was erected in four sections at twoyear intervals—in 1907, 1909, 1 9 1 1 , and 1913. When everything was complete, the University had acquired an impressive building of brick and limestone, similar in design to the dormitories which extend along the opposite side of Woodland Avenue. Most of the credit for the building and its original equipment is due to the late Dr. Leonard Pearson, Dean of the School from 1897 to 1909. Appointed State Veterinarian in 1895, he was responsible for the passage by the Legislature of many laws for the control of the communicable diseases of domestic animals which were later copied by other states, and he was the first to use the tuberculin test for tuberculosis in cattle and the mallein test for glanders in horses, two diseases transmissible to man which almost have been eradicated from this country. Largely through the efforts of Dr. Pearson, who was supported by the veterinarians of the State, the Pennsylvania Legislature appropriated funds which made possible the erection and equipping of the present Veterinary School and Hospital. T h e main entrance of the building is on Thirty-ninth Street, through a low archway opening on a grassy court, and the principal entrance to the northern half of the building, which is devoted mainly to lecture rooms and laboratories, is to the left of the archway. Here, on the first floor, are the offices of the Dean of the School, the library, and the laboratories of pharmacology and milk hygiene. On the second floor are offices occupied by the Bureau of Animal Industry of the Pennsylvania Department of Agriculture and the laboratories of pathology and parasitology. Also on the second floor, but at the east and southeast ends of the building, are the laboratories of anatomy and physiology. Besides the large laboratories used for the instruction of the undergraduates, there are numerous laboratories for research, in which important investigations are being carried on by the faculty and their six research associates, some of it in cooperation with members of the staff of the Medical School interested in the diseases of animals that are communicable to human beings.

ι6ζ

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

U n d e r the archway o n T h i r t y - n i n t h Street is the office of the Hospital, to w h i c h in a single year are b r o u g h t more than thirteen thousand animals, large a n d small. B y far the greatest number are dogs, w h i c h are followed by cats, horses, a n d cattle in that order; b u t the Hospital cares for any a n i m a l that is sick, relieving its suffering by treatment and by means of anesthesia if an operation is necessary. M a n y of the ailments, of course, are diseases f o u n d only in animals, but a glance at the records reveals that patients come for accouchement, caesarian sections, thyroidectomies, treatment of angina, arthritis, bronchitis, gastric ulcers, paralysis—even pyorrhea! T h e clinic for large animals is o n the g r o u n d level, a n d a number of horses a n d cows, many of t h e m v a l u a b l e animals brought from l o n g distances, will always be f o u n d in the fifty-five b o x stalls of the Hospital. Besides the usual stocks for h o l d i n g an animal d u r i n g a n operation, the e q u i p m e n t of the clinic includes apparatus for the artificial induction of fever, a n d x-ray machines for diagnosis a n d therapy. T h e therapy unit, a 220,ooo-volt m a c h i n e installed in 1938, is at present the largest apparatus in existence for the treatment of animals. T h e unit, the most m o b i l e of its type, is m a n i p u l a t e d by means of a chain hoist. It is housed in a special r o o m and has a raised operator's booth protected by a ton of lead sheets. Students w a t c h i n g the apparatus in use f r o m an a d j a c e n t r o o m look through leaded glass windows set in lead-covered doors. A s t o n i s h i n g results have been obtained w i t h this machine in the treatment of malignant growths in large animals. A d j o i n i n g the clinic for large animals at the west end is a pharmacy; at the east end is a farriery, o n e of the few in the City, where an expert farrier, supervised by the doctors, fits horses and mules w i t h w h a t might be called orthopedic shoes. N e a r the farriery is the morgue, to w h i c h dead animals are b r o u g h t for post-mortems f r o m all over the City, for the veterinarians are p r o u d of the fact that only three or f o u r large animals a year die in the Hospital itself. T h e clinic for small animals is o n the second floor. T h e f o u r wards, i n c l u d i n g one for infectious diseases, a c c o m m o d a t e a total of one h u n d r e d animals. N e a r b y are a r u n w a y for exercising convalescents, a large clinic r o o m w h e r e students a n d internes take care of m i n o r ailments, a n d a tiled o p e r a t i n g room, w h e r e veterinary students and white-capped graduate nurses assist the surgeons w i t h instruments, dressings, and in administering anesthetics. N o t all the clinical service is in the Hospital. Because the Veterinary School is in the center of a region rich in livestock, an

VETERINARY

MEDICINE

163

ambulatory clinic is maintained which cares for nearly six thousand additional cases each year. There is also the School of Animal Pathology, which was established in 1937 as a result of the gift by the heirs of Effingham B. Morris, a Trustee of the University, of the Bolton Farm of four hundred acres near Bristol, Pennsylvania, where a completely equipped research laboratory was set up and research projects inaugurated as the result of an appropriation of the Pennsylvania Legislature in 1937. T h e purpose of the School of Animal Pathology is to study the diseases of wild and domestic animals, especially as they affect man and the livestock industry. In this work the farm's exceptional herd of registered Guernsey cattle and other livestock is of great importance. Although as early as 1807 Benjamin Rush had proposed that a course in veterinary medicine be given in the University, no definite steps were taken until 1882, when Joshua B. Lippincott, a Trustee, and Joseph E. Gillingham contributed funds to establish a Department of Veterinary Medicine. Within a few months a building for the new department was under construction on the site now occupied by the Medical Laboratories on Hamilton Walk. Instruction in veterinary subjects was to be given in this building, but fundamental courses in pathology, chemistry, etc. were to be conducted in the Medical School, as is still done. On October 2, 1884, the new building was opened, and a year later another building, providing facilities for clinical instruction, was added following a second gift from Mr. Lippincott. This plant was further increased by an appropriation in 1889 by the Pennsylvania Legislature for a building, completed in 1892, to house a hospital for dogs and additional laboratories. Dean of the Veterinary faculty from 1883 until 1889 was Dr. Rush Shippen Huidekoper, a graduate of the Medical School who had also graduated from the veterinary school in Alfort, France, and had studied in the laboratories of Virchow, Koch, Chaveau, and Pasteur. Modeled after the courses in the French and German schools, the three-year course that he instituted was more comprehensive and extended over a longer period than that of any other veterinary school in this country save one. Most of the schools at that time were graduating students after two sessions of six months each, and even the medical school courses lasted only three years. T h e original thorough course has since been extended and strengthened greatly. With the aid of gifts from the daughter of Mr. Lippincott and a bequest from Mr. Gillingham, the faculty for many years has been on a full-time basis; new activities such as

164

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

the ambulatory clinic and a system of veterinary extension have been established; and the course now extends over four years, with one year of study in an approved college as an entrance requirement, which will become two years in 1940-41. T h e program of research has also increased greatly. One of the current projects is a study of swine influenza, a disease closely related to the influenza that affects man. Other investigations are concerned with tularemia, Rocky Mountain spotted fever, and mastitis (caked udder), the latter being the most serious disease from an economic standpoint that now affects cattle. Of obvious importance also is the work of one member of the staff who has succeeded in transferring a type of sarcoma to healthy animals. T h e investigations have shown that if the animal recovers from the malignant growth it is immune to further inoculation. Since the opening of the School more than 1,200 students have received the degree of Doctor of Veterinary Medicine from the University. Most of them have devoted themselves to private practice, but many have engaged in teaching, research, the preparation of biological products, and public health work as Federal and State officials in the control of infectious diseases of animals and as officers in the Veterinary Corps of the United States Army, the present organization of which is largely owing to a former member of the faculty and two alumni. Some have contributed to the advancement of veterinary knowledge and practice, and many have had an active part in such achievements as the stamping out of the three epizootics of foot and mouth disease which have occurred since 1903, in bovine tuberculosis eradication, in the control of Bang's disease (the organism of which causes undulant fever in man), in the almost complete eradication of glanders, and in greatly reducing the area infected with the Texas fever tick.

STUDENT LIFE

N o UNIVERSITY can provide merely a faculty, classrooms, laboratories, and a library for its students, and ignore the recreational and extra-curricular part of student life. Whether encouraged by the authorities or not, what are known as "activities" will appear (or else a more or less violent substitute), and it is the better plan to organize and direct student activities in such a way that they will supplement the educational program of the University. That most of the activities of the Pennsylvania student body have a direct educational value cannot be doubted; that they provide healthful recreation is equally certain. T h e various aspects of student life are the concern of the Dean of Student Affairs and his staff, who have offices in College Hall. An important part of their work is the constructive oversight of the hundred or more clubs, societies, and other organizations formed by the students. In addition they have jurisdiction over the dormitories, fraternities, and other student residences; the awarding of the 1,100 scholarships that the University grants each year to undergraduates; and, largely through the University Placement Service, finding means of furnishing financial aid to students. T h e Dean of Student Affairs has nothing to do directly with scholastic shortcomings. These receive attention from personnel officers associated with the deans of the various schools, but when financial difficulties or too many student activities cause trouble, the offices cooperate. Associated with the Dean of Student Affairs is the Undergraduate Council, an organization composed of the presidents of the three upper classes and of certain other student groups. T h e Council serves as an intermediary between the administration and faculty and the students, suggesting new policies and helping to put them into effect. As an advisory body it maintains contact with every activity on the Campus, including publications, athletics, debating, and fraternity relations. T h e life of women students at the University is under the supervision of the Directress of Women, whose offices are in Bennett Hall. She and her staff are in charge of activities, student residences, and 165

ι66

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

a varied social program. L i f e in Sergeant H a l l (the w o m e n ' s dormitory) a n d the women's fraternities is r e g u l a t e d by the Women's Student G o v e r n m e n t Association in cooperation w i t h the staff of the Directress of W o m e n . A t the beginning of the year the Directress of W o m e n or her assistant interviews each new student i n f o r m a l l y b u t at length, so that she can be assisted in g e t t i n g the most o u t of her academic w o r k by participating in related activities a n d by b r o a d e n i n g her social relationships. A similar interview is h e l d w i t h each senior girl, to determine whether she is f a m i l i a r w i t h opportunities for e m p l o y m e n t or to guide her later education, to g a u g e her d e v e l o p m e n t w h i l e in college, and to secure suggestions concerning improvements that might benefit w o m e n students. T h e buildings in w h i c h student life at the University centers a n d some of the student organizations are described below. Irvine

Auditorium.

T h e Irvine A u d i t o r i u m , w h i c h is at T h i r t y - f o u r t h a n d Spruce streets, just south of the L i b r a r y , was c o m p l e t e d in 1928. It is the tallest b u i l d i n g o n the C a m p u s , its tower e x t e n d i n g 202 feet into the air; the design is G o t h i c adapted to meet the need f o r a large buildi n g that w o u l d fit into the square piece of g r o u n d that was available. T h e m a j o r portion of the f u n d s used in its erection was prov i d e d by the wills of the late W i l l i a m B. Irvine a n d his sister. T h e first floor of the a u d i t o r i u m seats 1,134 persons; the balcony 720; the stage, w h i c h is forty-eight feet w i d e a n d thirty-eight feet deep, can seat 150. In front of the stage is the console of one of the world's largest organs. Built for the Sesqui-Centennial E x p o s i t i o n of 1926, it was given to the University by the late Cyrus Η . K . Curtis. T h e interior of the a u d i t o r i u m is impressive: it rises unobstructed to the roof of the tower a n d the walls are decorated in brightly colored medieval designs. S u r r o u n d i n g the a u d i t o r i u m o n the g r o u n d floor is a d d i t i o n a l space. O n the east side are the offices of the A l u m n i Association; o n the .west side are the offices of the Mask a n d W i g C l u b , celebrated undergraduate dramatic organization; the foyer to the south is used as a music r o o m by the D e p a r t m e n t of Music, as is a similar r o o m in the basement just below. T h e basement also contains offices f o r members of the D e p a r t m e n t of Music, store rooms for scenery a n d electrical e q u i p m e n t of the Mask a n d W i g C l u b , a r o o m for p a i n t i n g scenery, a l o u n g e f o r men, a n d a l o u n g e f o r w o m e n . O n e

BIG QUAD:

DORMITORIES

HOUSTON H A L L

STUDENT

LIFE

167

of the dressing rooms off the wings of the stage serves as an office for the Director of Dramatics. Except for the June Commencements and major dramatic productions, all of the larger University gatherings are held in Irvine. These include the chapel services, the Wharton School's Crawley Memorial Lectures, the presentation of candidates for higher degrees, and frequent concerts. For Commencement exercises, the University uses the Philadelphia Convention Hall on Thirty-fourth Street south of Spruce. T h e dramatic clubs prefer theatres in the center of the city. Houston

Hall

Another University "first" is Houston Hall, the first student union in the United States, which was erected in 1895 to the south of College Hall. T h e original three-story building, the gift of Henry Howard and Sallie S. Houston in memory of their son, Henry Howard Houston, Jr., who died soon after his graduation from Pennsylvania, was greatly enlarged in 1939 by the addition of two wings erected through the generosity of Samuel Houston, Gertrude Houston Woodward, and the late Sallie Houston Henry, the children of the original donors. T h e architectural design is in an English collegiate style that represents a transition from Gothic to Renaissance. T h e newly erected wings, like the original part, are of limestone and Conshohocken granite. T h e idea for such a building is said to have originated with Charles C. Harrison as soon as he became Provost in 1894. Impressed with the lack of suitable space for the students of all departments of the University to mingle with each other and especially by a movement that had raised $12,000 to provide a home for the newly organized Christian Association, he brought the attention of Mr. Houston, a Trustee, to the need. Although student unions originated at Oxford and Cambridge in 1815, before the opening of Houston Hall no institution had attempted to provide a common club room or building of such proportions as this. Today there are over seventy such organizations in operation in the United States. Entering from the central Spruce Street doors and facing a similar doorway which opens on a terrace to the rear of College Hall, the visitor finds himself in the large lobby, with its two huge fireplaces and the old College Hall bell. Alcoves house a lost and found department, an information bureau, and a theatre ticket service. T h e entire lobby, like most of Houston Hall, is paneled in oak. At the left is the "Lt. Henry W. Houston, Class of 1916 College, Room,"

j 68

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

o n e of the many lounges and reading rooms in the building. A t the n o r t h end of this r o o m are the offices of the University C h a p l a i n . Farther to the left, in the new west wing, is the " D r . J o h n Houston, Class of 1769 Medical, R o o m , " w h i c h serves as the main l o u n g e and r e a d i n g room, a n d o n occasion for dinners and dances. O n the right of the lobby is the Faculty a n d A d m i n i s t r a t i v e Officers' L o u n g e , w h i c h has d i n i n g facilities for sixty-two people. T o the north of this r o o m are the offices of the Director of H o u s t o n Hall, a n d of the Student B o a r d of Governors, w h i c h supervises the activities and the recreational program of H o u s t o n H a l l . Beyond, in the new east wing, is the d i n i n g hall, w h i c h is used as a Freshman C o m m o n s . Its main floor and balcony seat over 350 persons. T h e basement of H o u s t o n H a l l once contained a s w i m m i n g pool a n d b o w l i n g alleys. In the central part are n o w the kitchen and pantries, w h i c h are supervised by a trained dietitian. T h i s section also has a barber shop, a p u b l i c stenographer, and rest rooms for students a n d employees. T h e H o u s t o n H a l l Store, w h i c h occupies the west wing, includes a book store, a stationery department, a gift department, a cigar a n d candy counter, a post office, a n d a very useful check-cashing department. O r i g i n a l l y a one-room bookshop o n the third floor, o p e n only a few hours a day, the Store now makes possible the operation of H o u s t o n H a l l as a recreational center w i t h o u t any charge to the students. In the central part of the second floor are three private d i n i n g rooms. T o the west of the central stairway are the B e n j a m i n Franklin R o o m , w h i c h is used for dinners, and the Bishop W h i t e R o o m , w h i c h is used for meetings of learned societies and serves as a board r o o m for the Trustees. Beyond, in the west wing, is a large g a m e r o o m e q u i p p e d w i t h billiard, ping-pong, bridge, a n d b a c k g a m m o n tables. East of the central stairway is an a u d i t o r i u m w i t h chairs that can be r e m o v e d for dances a n d receptions. Seating four hundred, it is the scene of n u m e r o u s lectures, entertainments, rallies, a n d smokers t h r o u g h o u t the college year. In the east w i n g is a large rehearsal room, the office of the University B a n d , a r o o m for b a n d e q u i p m e n t , a n d the office of the University C o u n c i l . O n the third floor are ten smaller rooms, some of w h i c h once a c c o m m o d a t e d overnight guests. T h e s e provide permanent quarters f o r the P h i l o m a t h e a n a n d Zelosophic Literary Societies, the Photog r a p h i c Society, the Chess C l u b , and the D e b a t e C o u n c i l . T h e s e a n d more than fifty other campus organizations regularly hold their meetings in H o u s t o n Hall. I n the original b u i l d i n g more than 1,600 dinners, dances, lectures,

STUDENT

LIFE

and meetings took place every year, and each day it was visited by more than 6,500 students. With the new addition these figures will be greatly increased. In the course of time the footsteps of the students had so hollowed the stone step at the entrance facing College Hall that a new step had to be supplied; and already the stone that replaced it shows so much wear that it in turn must shortly be replaced—an effective tribute to the foresight of the donors and Provost Harrison in providing for student welfare at the University of Pennsylvania. The Dormitories If the first concern of Provost Harrison on taking office in 1894 was for a student union, satisfactory living quarters for students were his next. Although in 1762 the Trustees of the old College ordered the erection of a dormitory building with sixteen bedrooms, that was the only official student residence provided by the University of Pennsylvania until the first units of the present dormitory system for men were opened in the fall of 1896. Perhaps it is as well that construction did not begin in 1872, when serpentine stone was the preferred material. At any rate, the dormitory buildings, designed at a time when a new spirit was being felt in American architecture, are a feature of the Campus of which all Pennsylvanians feel justly proud. T h e architects prepared plans for a complete system of houses extending from Thirty-ninth Street along Woodland Avenue to Thirty-seventh, along Spruce to Thirtysixth, down Thirty-sixth to Hamilton Walk, and back along Hamilton Walk (where there was to be a commons, a plan now abandoned) to Thirty-ninth. T h e interior of this quadrilateral was to be divided by additional houses into what are now called the Little Quad, the Triangle, the Big Quad, the East Quad, the South Quad. T h e arrangement provided for numerous archways, vistas, and corners, very effective in photographs and equally effective if viewed by the passer-by, especially in the spring, when the dogwood and other plantings are in bloom. T h e style is what can be called English collegiate, with detail that ranges from Gothic grotesques to Renaissance pilasters and balustrades. No attempt to achieve complete uniformity was made, but rather an atmosphere suggestive of gradual development. As a result the predominantly Jacobean design of the main portion gives way in the South Quad to the Tudor, in which limestone decorations are no longer prominent. T h e first houses to be constructed (the cornerstone was laid

STUDENT LIFE

171

November 5, 1895) were those on the Hamilton Walk and Woodland Avenue sides of the Triangle, where the statue of Provost Harrison by Lynn Jenkins faces McKenzie's statue of Whitefield, the evangelist for whom the University's first home was constructed. At first the rooms were not filled, but by igoo, when the Memorial Tower at Thirty-seventh Street was completed, applications were more than double the four hundred that could be accommodated. By 1910 the line had been extended to the Provost's Tower on Thirty-sixth Street. T h e latest houses to be erected are the four on the south side of the South Quad, which were added in 1928-29. These brought the total accommodations to 1,131. Eight proctors, forming a parietal committee, reside in the dormitories. In addition, in each of the sixteen freshmen houses lives a senior adviser, a member of the senior class chosen for his qualities of leadership. Since 1919 all of the houses opening on the Big, East, and South Quads save the Graduate House have been assigned to freshmen, who, if from out of town, are required to live there. Each house has its own entry on the courtyards and is separated by firewalls from its neighbors, to prevent either fires or too hilarious students from racing through continuous corridors that would otherwise be nearly a mile in length. T h e numbers below and on the opposite page indicate approximately the order in which the houses were constructed. 1

2

3 4 5

Brooks: Named in honor of Phillips Brooks, this house is the gift of his friends who were also his parishioners while he had charge of Holy Trinity Church. It was the first memorial in America to this eminent clergyman. Leidy: Named for Joseph Leidy (1823-1891), who was graduated from the Medical School in 1844. He was Professor of Anatomy, 1853-91, and also Professor of Zoology and Comparative Anatomy, 1884-91; Surgeon to the Satterlee Military Hospital during the Civil War; President of the Academy of Natural Sciences, 1871-1891. Franklin: Named for Benjamin Franklin. Foerderer: T h e gift of the late Robert H. Foerderer, a member of the United States Congress. McKean: Named for Thomas McKean, member of the Continental Congress, signer of the Declaration of Independence, Governor of Pennsylvania, and President of the Board of Trustees of the University.

172 6

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Baldwin: T h e gift of John H. Converse, late President of the Baldwin Locomotive Works, in memory of Matthias W. Baldwin, founder of that company. 7 Class of Eighty-Seven: T h e gift of the Class of 1887, College, a class especially noted for its contributions to the University. 8 Craig: Given in memory of Wilson D. Craig, of the Class of 1878, by his brother and sister. 9 Baird: T h e gift of John E. and Thomas E. Baird, in memory of their father, John Baird, 1820-94, who was prominent as a merchant, financier, and philanthropist. 10 Fitler: T h e gift of Edwin H. Fitler, 1825-96; Mayor of Philadelphia, 1887-91. It is named for him. 1 1 Hopkinson: Named for Francis Hopkinson, 1737-91, a graduate of the first class to receive degrees in 1757, a signer of the Declaration of Independence, and a Trustee of the University. 12 Provost Smith: Named for William Smith, first Provost of the University. 13 Lippincott: T h e gift of James Dundas Lippincott in memory of his father, Joshua Lippincott. 14 Carruth: T h e gift of John G. Carruth in memory of his daughter, Jean May Carruth. 15 New York Alumni: T h e gift of alumni of the University residing in the State of New York. 16 Memorial Tower: T h e gift of the alumni of the University in memory of the men of the University of Pennsylvania who served in the Spanish-American War. 17 Morgan: Named for John Morgan, a member of the first graduating class of 1757 and the first professor to be named to the medical faculty. 18 Bodine: T h e gift of Samuel T . Bodine, a member of the Class of 1873 and a prominent Philadelphia industrialist. It is named for his family. 19 Morris: Named for Robert Morris, financier of the American Revolution, signer of the Declaration of Independence, and Trustee of the University. It is the gift of his great-granddaughter, Ellen Wain Harrison. 20 Wilson: Named for James Wilson, a signer of the Declaration of Independence, a Trustee of the University, and its first Professor of Law. 21 Edgar F. Smith: Named for Edgar Fahs Smith, Professor of Chemistry and thirteenth Provost of the University. 22 Coxe: Named for the Coxe family for their many benefactions

STUDENT

LIFE

to the University and in appreciation of the large gift by Eckley B. Coxe, Jr., of the Class of 1893, towards an endowment for professors' salaries. 23 Rodney: Named for Caesar Augustus Rodney, a distinguished American statesman who was graduated from the University in 1789. 24 Bishop White: Named for the Rev. William White, a member of the Class of 1765 and a Trustee. He was Chaplain to the United States Congress, first Bishop of Pennsylvania (1786-1836), and Presiding Bishop of the Episcopal Church in the United States (1796-1836). 25 Birthday: T h e gift of the late Mrs. Charles C. Harrison and her six children in honor of the sixty-fourth birthday (May 3, 1908) of the late Provost Harrison. 26 Mask and Wig: T h e gift of the Mask and Wig Club as a memorial to the late Clayton F. McMichael, its founder and president for fifteen years. 27 Provosts' Tower: A memorial to the Provosts of the University. 28 Graduate: A house erected for the accommodation of graduate students. A large room on the first floor serves as a club room. 29 Thomas Penn: Named for Thomas Penn, second son of William Penn. As Proprietor of Pennsylvania, he granted the Charter of 1753 and accompanied it with a substantial gift. 30 Cleeman: A memorial to Dr. Richard A. Cleeman, a graduate of the College in 1859 and of the Medical School in 1862. 31 Ashhurst: T h e gift of William Henry Ashhurst, who graduated from the College in 1891. T h e Quad Shop, a branch of the Houston Hall Store, is maintained in the basement of this dormitory and the adjoining Magee dormitory. 32 Magee: T h e gift of James R . Magee in memory of his brothers, Horace Magee (C. '65) and Frank H. Magee (C. '76). 33 Mcllhenny: T h e gift of Miss Seiina B. Mcllhenny in memory of her brother, Francis S. Mcllhenny, a graduate of the College in 1895 and of the Law School in 1898. 34 Warwick: T h e gift of Dr. Hill S. Warwick, Graduate School, 1891. It is named for him. 35 Ward: A memorial to Robert Boyd Ward given by his son, the late William B. Ward, a graduate from the College in 1907. 36 Chesnut: A memorial to John S. Chesnut, a graduate from the Law School in 1879. It was provided by a bequest from his sister, Mary E. Chesnut.

»74

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Dormitory Annex: I n addition to the thirty-six houses of the main dormitory system, the University provides dormitory accommodations in five remodeled residences at 3604-12 Locust Street. T h e s e were purchased by the University in 1931. Sergeant Hall: Dormitory a c c o m m o d a t i o n s for w o m e n are provided i n Sergeant H a l l , a four-story b u i l d i n g at T h i r t y - f o u r t h a n d W a l n u t streets. Formerly an apartment house, it was purchased in 1924. Previously the women's dormitory consisted of four remodeled residences o n the west side of T h i r t y - f o u r t h a b o v e W a l n u t , which are now occupied by a religious order. T h e older dormitory was also k n o w n as Sergeant Hall, a name given in h o n o r of H a n n a h Sergeant, w i f e of J o h n Ewing, second Provost of the University. I n a d d i t i o n to bedrooms a c c o m m o d a t i n g 150, Sergeant H a l l has f o u r reception rooms on the first floor, a l o n g w i t h offices for the Directress of W o m e n and her assistants w h o are in charge of student activities and of student residences, offices of the Bennett News, a n d several small music rooms used by students in the Department of Music. In the basement is a large recreation r o o m and an equally large d i n i n g room. T h e University Directory records that the Bennett C l u b is in Sergeant H a l l . T h i s name is somewhat v a g u e l y applied to various rooms o n the first floor a n d in the basement, w h i c h are for the benefit of all w o m e n students at the University a n d serve as a student union. Formerly the Bennett C l u b h a d its o w n home in two o l d residences (razed in 1931) o n the site of Bennett Field to the east of B e n n e t t Hall. Fraternities: T h e regular dormitories d o not afford sufficient accommodations for all the resident students at the University. A d d i t i o n a l residence facilities are provided by the fraternities, which have been an important part of undergraduate life since l o n g before the University moved to West Philadelphia. M a n y of the fraternities have donated their chapter houses to the University, and such houses are m a i n t a i n e d as fraternity dormitories. I n assigning rooms in these houses, the University gives preference to students n o m i n a t e d by the fraternity. Life in the houses is u n d e r the jurisdiction of the D e a n of Student Affairs. C o o p e r a t i n g w i t h officials of the University are two Interfraternity Councils, w h i c h are especially concerned w i t h the supervision and regulation of " r u s h i n g . " In the f o l l o w i n g list of national fraternities, the date signifies the year in w h i c h the Pennsylvania chapter was established.

STUDENT Acacia Alpha Chi Rho Alpha Epsilon Pi Alpha Sigma Phi Alpha Tau Omega Beta Sigma Rho Beta Theta Pi Delta Kappa Epsilon Delta Phi Delta Psi Delta Sigma Phi Delta Tau Delta Delta Upsilon Kappa Alpha Kappa Nu Kappa Sigma Lambda Chi Alpha Phi Alpha Phi Beta Delta Phi Delta Theta Phi Epsilon Pi Phi Gamma Delta Phi Kappa Psi Phi Kappa Sigma Phi Kappa Tau Phi Sigma Delta Phi Sigma Kappa Pi Kappa Alpha Pi Lambda Phi Psi Upsilon Sigma Alpha Epsilon Sigma Alpha Mu Sigma Chi Sigma Nu Sigma Phi Epsilon Sigma Phi Sigma Tau Delta Phi Tau Epsilon Phi Tau Kappa Epsilon Theta Chi Theta Xi Zeta Beta Tau Zeta Psi

175

LIFE 3907 Spruce 219 S. 36 3745 Locust 3903 Spruce 3914 Walnut 3914 Spruce 3529 Locust 307 S· 39 3453 Woodland 3637 Locust 202 S. 36 3533 Locust 3614 Locust 3537 Locust 3703 Locust 3706 Locust 229 S. 39 3926 Spruce 3815 Walnut 3700 Locust 3940 Spruce 3619 Locust 3641 Locust 3539 Locust 3902 Locust 3824 Spruce 3618 Locust 3900 Locust 3800 Locust 300 S. 36 3908 Spruce 3817 Walnut 3809 Locust 3819 Walnut 3909 Spruce 3935 Locust 224 S. 39 3729 Chestnut 3707 Locust 3817 Spruce 3930 Spruce 39 & Irving 3337 Walnut

1906 1896 1919 1908 1881 1922 1880 1899 1849 1854 1908 1897 1888 1 1 9 3 !9!9 1892 1912 1921 »9!9 1883 19*4 1881 1877 1850 1926 »9!5 1900 1920 1912 1891 1901 19H 1875 1894 1904 1908 1920 1921 1930 1912 1912 1907 1850

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Women's Fraternities: W o m e n ' s fraternities also p r o v i d e a d d i t i o n a l d o r m i t o r y a c c o m m o d a t i o n s at the University. Each c h a p t e r house has its hostess a n d is u n d e r the supervision of the Directress of W o m e n . T h e f o l l o w i n g n a t i o n a l women's fraternities m a i n t a i n chapters on the Campus: Alpha Chi Omega Alpha Kappa Alpha Alpha Omicron Pi Alpha Xi Delta Chi Omega Delta Delta Delta Delta Phi Epsilon Delta Sigma Theta Kappa Alpha Theta Kappa Delta Kappa Kappa Gamma Sigma Delta Tau Zeta Tau Alpha

STUDENT

3919 Locust Sergeant H a l l 3824 Locust 3822 Locust 3408 Sansom 2 1 2 S. M c A l p i n 3413 C h e s t n u t Sergeant H a l l 214 S. M c A l p i n 223 S. 37 3323 W a l n u t 232 S. 38 3406 Sansom

>9!9 J 2 9 5 1918 1927 1

9,9 1904 1926 1913 >9·9 1921 1890 1 1 9 9 1918

ACTIVITIES

DRAMATICS D u r i n g t h e C h r i s t m a s holidays of 1756-57 the s t u d e n t s of the College of P h i l a d e l p h i a p r e s e n t e d a m a s q u e for the e n t e r t a i n m e n t of themselves a n d t h e i r f r i e n d s . T h i s was The Masque of Alfred, a d r a m a t i c p r o d u c t i o n t h a t was a d a p t e d to the students' use a n d d i r e c t e d by t h e first Provost, W i l l i a m Smith. It is the earliest surviving e x a m p l e of a d r a m a t i c p r o d u c t i o n c o n t a i n i n g original A m e r ican m a t e r i a l t h a t has actually been p u t o n the stage. A n d in 1767 The Prince of Parthia, t h e first play w r i t t e n in America to be prod u c e d o n t h e p r o f e s s i o n a l stage, was presented at a P h i l a d e l p h i a t h e a t r e . Its a u t h o r was T h o m a s G o d f r e y , a s t u d e n t u n d e r Provost W i l l i a m S m i t h . Because of this early interest in the d r a m a , it m i g h t b e e x p e c t e d t h a t d r a m a t i c s w o u l d be a conspicuous p a r t of t h e s t u d e n t life at t h e University. T h i s is t h e case, t h o u g h p r o b a b l y less because of the first Provost t h a n because of y o u n g people's n a t u r a l interest in the stage a n d t h e v a r i e d talents offered by a large s t u d e n t body. Each year the v a r i o u s f o r e i g n l a n g u a g e clubs, such as Le Cercle Fran$ais, II Circolo I t a l i a n o , a n d t h e G e r m a n C l u b , p r o d u c e plays in f o r e i g n languages; f o r m a n y years t h e P h i l o m a t h e a n a n d Zelosophic Lit-

STUDENT

LIFE

>77

erary Societies presented Elizabethan and American plays, respectively; by 1939 the Men About Towne Club (engineers) had given eighteen annual shows, usually musical burlesques; and the Architects' Ball is always accompanied by a pageant with elaborate costumes and settings. During the decade 1910-20 ambitious productions w:ere given in the Botanical Gardens, sometimes to audiences of ten thousand. But the oldest and best-known dramatic organization is the Mask and Wig Club. T H E M A S K A N D WIG C L U B

Each year the Mask and Wig Club presents an original operetta, musical comedy, or musical review for at least a week in a Philadelphia theatre. Originally Easter week was the time, but the week of Thanksgiving was chosen in 1936. During the ig2o's the stand in Philadelphia usually lasted two weeks, and always additional performances have been given in other cities—New York, Washington, Chicago, and others. Over the years, twenty-nine cities have seen the Mask and Wig Club productions. An important social event in Philadelphia, the annual show is an elaborately staged affair in which an average of more than fifty actors, dancers, and singers, all of them male undergraduates, take part. In many instances Mask and Wiggers have later achieved distinction on Broadway and in Hollywood. That the Club has always been especially concerned with the welfare of the University is shown by the fact that it has contributed more than $150,000 to it. Starting in the go's with uniforms for the baseball team, it followed with shells and a coaching launch for the crew, gifts to defray football coaching expenses, and support for the Glee Club and Debating Team. During the War, it gave a considerable sum to the University Base Hospital No. 20. T h e three largest and best-known gifts have been a contribution towards the purchase of the Provost's House, the establishment of a chair of Dramatic Art, and the Mask and Wig Dormitory, the latter in honor of Clayton Fotteral McMichael, who in 1889 conceived the idea of the Mask and Wig Club. It was on June 4 of that year that Lurline was given at the Chestnut Street Opera House. Forty-six students took part in the flamboyant cloak-and-sword drama, and in the leading röle was C. F. McMichael, whose name was prominent on an elaborately written notice, inviting students to join the new club, that had been posted in the basement of College Hall in February. At the bottom of the notice was the line from Henry VI, Part I: "Defer no time;

178

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

delays have dangerous ends." T o d a y no such insistence is needed, for membership in the Mask and W i g C l u b is a coveted honor at the University, as is the privilege of walking uninvited into the C l u b House at 310 S. Quince Street. The Mask and Wig Club

House

T h e Mask and W i g C l u b House was once a church, built in 1834. In the early 8o's it became a stable. In 1894 it was purchased and remodeled by the Mask and W i g C l u b . T h e building houses an auditorium with stage and dressing rooms, offices, a kitchen, and a grill room. T h e grill room, with its heavy beams and tiled fireplace, is especially impressive. A number of murals executed by Maxfield Parrish are in the building. T h e C l u b House is used as a social club by the members of the Mask and W i g C l u b and especially for rehearsals and as a theatre in which candidates for the shows are selected. THE PENNSYLVANIA PLAYERS

Nearly fifty years younger than the Mask and W i g Club, the g r o u p known as T h e Pennsylvania Players is an extremely healthy infant. In the spring of 1936, the University Players, the Zelosophic Society, Bowling Green, and Touchstone, four organizations interested in non-musical dramatics, decided to band together for better productions. It was agreed that the last three should retain their individual identities, but that n o major productions should be given by any organization save the newly formed Pennsylvania Players. O n l y one play was presented the following winter, financed partly by a grant from the University, and it was evident that a permanent Director of Dramatics was needed. As a result a Director was appointed in the fall of 1937 on a half-time basis. Under organized leadership the response was tremendous, for some six hundred undergraduates, in interviews held during the first three weeks of college, expressed an interest in various phases of theatrical activities. T h e first production, P h i l i p Barry's Holiday, which was given at T h e Plays and Players, a little theatre in the City, received favorable reviews from newspaper critics and enthusiastic comment from the University faculty and patrons. W h i l e the cast of Holiday was rehearsing for a performance in Atlantic City, the first tour of the group, a telegram from M a x w e l l Anderson was received granting permission to give as their spring

STUDENT

LIFE

>79

production High Tor, a play that had not come to Philadelphia professionally. T h e keen competition for parts that resulted included a number of members of the Mask and Wig show, which had completed its tour; the excellent cast that was finally selected rehearsed long and enthusiastically. Important, too, was the work of the scenic department, which labored six weeks to create a steam-shovel and a mountain top. Playing to capacity houses, High Tor attracted professional talent scouts at all of its performances, and the leading boy and girl were sought by several movie companies. T h e girl has since made a motion picture in Hollywood; the boy was awarded a scholarship to the Mohawk Drama Festival in Schenectady. Another Mohawk scholarship was granted to a Mask and Wig star who played a comedy lead. Because of the success of the first year, the University placed the Director on a full-time basis, granted her an assistant, and substantially increased the budget. As a result the season of 1938-39 saw the activities more than doubled. Three major productions were presented at T h e Plays and Players: Philip Barry's Hotel Universe, George Kaufman's and Edna Ferber's The Royal Family, and Eugene O'Neill's The Straw. T h e last, like High Tor, was the Philadelphia premiere and was obtained by special permission from the author. Following the season, four students were granted scholarships to summer stock companies and two were accepted as apprentices. T h e Pennsylvania Players are also very much interested in oneact plays. In 1937-38 an Original One-act Play Competition, to be held annually, was inaugurated. T h e following year a monthly series of one-act plays for experimental purposes was begun. T w o of these each month are put on by students desiring experience in directing; the third is to give training to novice actors. Another activity of the Players is radio dramatics. Following an initial broadcast in January 1939, the head of the Radio Division of the Federal Theatre suggested a plan which resulted in six educational half-hour programs given over a nation-wide hookup by the Players under the auspices of the Federal Theatre. PUBLICATIONS Student publications at the University are under the supervision of the Graduate Manager of Student Publications, whose offices are in the Franklin Building, where the editorial offices of the

i8o

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Daily Pennsylvanian, the Pennsylvania Punch Bowl, and the Record are located. T h e G r a d u a t e M a n a g e r , w h o is a member of the administrative staff of the University, acts as treasurer and business manager of the undergraduate publications. T h e F r a n k l i n Society, f o u n d e d in 1918, is an organization composed of students w o r k i n g for publications. Its purpose is the maintenance of editorial standards. T h e Daily Pennsylvanian is the oldest of the undergraduate publications save the a n n u a l Record. It is an o u t g r o w t h of the University Magazine, a literary m o n t h l y published by the P h i l o m a t h e a n Literary Society from 1875 to 1885. In 1885 the Pennsylvanian, a monthly w i t h editors chosen f r o m the entire student body, superseded the University Magazine. Primarily a literary magazine at first, the Pennsylvanian became a newspaper in 188g, w h e n the now defunct Red and Blue was f o u n d e d . In 1894 it became the Daily Pennsylvanian. T h e w o m e n students' newspaper, the Bennett News, is a weekly, f o u n d e d in 1924. T h e Punch Bowl, the students' h u m o r o u s publication, is a flourishing monthly that first a p p e a r e d o n F e b r u a r y 5, 1900, and has been published regularly since, save for a few months d u r i n g the W a r . Its predecessors, Ben Franklin a n d Chaff, flickered briefly. T h e first class record, apparently, was published in 1852. It was a thin, paper-bound volume, listing the members of the g r a d u a t i n g class and some of the professors. A f t e r 1856, the publication of annuals was nearly continuous, b u t until the early 70's they contained data of interest to all the classes and not merely seniors. T h e w o m e n students have their o w n Record, as do the medical students (the Scope) a n d the dental students (the Dental Record). O t h e r student publications are the Pennsylvania Triangle, a scientific monthly written a n d edited by the students in the T o w n e Scientific School, the M o o r e School of Electrical Engineering, and the School of Fine Arts; the Wharton Review of Finance and Commerce, a monthly edited by W h a r t o n School students and c o n t a i n i n g articles by prominent businessmen a n d p u b l i c officials; the Lantern, a similar monthly edited by the students in the W h a r t o n E v e n i n g School; the Law Review, a m o n t h l y edited by the law students and containing articles by themselves a n d by prominent lawyers a n d jurists; a n d the Penn Dental Journal, a scientific monthly. A l t h o u g h they are not student publications, mention m i g h t be made of the Pennsylvania Gazette, an a l u m n i monthly d e v o t e d primarily to news; the General Magazine ir Historical Chronicle,

STUDENT

LIFE

181

an alumni quarterly containing articles of historical and literary interest; and the Franklin Field Illustrated, a publication of the Department of Physical Education that serves as a program at athletic contests. MUSIC T h e Men's Glee C l u b was founded in 1864. Originally devoted to singing the older type of college songs, in recent years it has presented programs of unusual musical merit. T h e women students have their own Glee Club, and most of the members of these two organizations are also members of the University Choral Society, a distinctly educational project founded in 1930. Since 1933 the Choral Society has been under the direction of Dr. Harl MacDonald, Professor of Music and a noted composer and conductor. T h e Choral Society has sung with the Philadelphia Orchestra in Philadelphia, New York, and other cities. T h e University Band is well k n o w n to Pennsylvanians, especially those w h o attend the football games. Composed of more than a hundred members, it practices long and earnestly to perfect not only its music but also the intricate maneuvers that it executes on Franklin Field between the halves of football games. DEBATING T h e Pennsylvania Debate Council is one of the undergraduate organizations the educational value of which cannot be doubted. Under the direction of a faculty adviser, the Council participates in as many as seventy debates each year, including a series of radio debates given weekly during January, February, March, and A p r i l . Financed by a grant from the University, the debaters make at least one long trip each year. LITERARY

SOCIETIES

Oldest of the student organizations at the University are the Philomathean and Zelosophic Literary Societies, founded in 1813 and 1829, respectively. Until 1926 each of these societies was assigned two large rooms on the fourth floor of College Hall, commonly referred to as the Garret, where as undergraduates many of the best-known alumni of the University and its faculty debated formally or informally and planned some of the important dramatic

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

productions given by the students. T h e two societies now have rooms on the third floor of Houston Hall. DEPARTMENTAL

ORGANIZATIONS

Nearly all the schools of the University have organizations intended to promote intellectual activities of the sort that appeal to their own students. In the College, the Arts and Science Association, aided by a grant from the General Alumni Society, sponsors lectures and musical recitals. Students in the College for Women may be associate members of this organization. In the Wharton School, the Wharton Association arranges for lectures (endowed by the Howard Crawley Memorial Fund) given by prominent businessmen and men in public life. T h e Wharton Evening School has a separate organization. T h e School of Fine Arts has the Architectural Society and the Fine Arts Society, and the School of Education has two Education Associations, one for men and one for women. T h e Caducean Society is composed of students taking a pre-medical course, both men and women. In addition, various instructional departments sponsor student clubs. These include the Classics Club, Le Cercle F r a ^ a i s , II Circolo Italiano, the Spanish Club, the German Club, the Priestley Chemical Club, the Propeller Club (Foreign Trade), the Insurance Society, the International Policy Association, the Transportation Society, the Society for the Advancement of Management. T h e professional schools also have their societies. In the Law School are ten student clubs that hold moot courts and argue legal problems. T h e Medical School has its undergraduate Medical Association, which is especially for the promotion of undergraduate research. There are also the Women's Medical Society and clubs devoted to such special subjects as anatomy, surgery, obstetrics, and medicine. T h e Dental School has two clubs and the Veterinary School has its Junior Veterinary Association. There are also numerous clubs with special interests not necessarily related to academic pursuits. Some of these are the Music Club, the Scouters' Club (Boy Scout activities), the Flying Club, the Photographic Society, and Avukah (Jewish problems). Especially important is the Kite and Key Society, which entertains prospective students at athletic and social events and acts as host to visiting athletic teams.

STUDENT

LIFE

183

HONOR SOCIETIES Achievement in undergraduate activities is recognized at Pennsylvania by election to various honor societies. Best known of these are the senior societies—Friars and Sphinx—which were founded in i8gg and igoo, respectively. Hexagon, a senior society founded in igio, is limited to students in the Towne Scientific School, the Moore School of Electrical Engineering, and the School of Fine Arts. T h e right to wear a "senior hat" is one of the coveted honors at the University. Phi Kappa Beta, an honor society founded in igi6, is composed of members of the junior class. Senior women students are elected to Mortar Board, a national senior honor society; junior students to Sphinx and Key. Other societies recognize achievement in particular activities: the Franklin Society, Publications; the Scales Society, the Men's Glee Club; Sigma Chi, the Women's Glee Club; Fanfare, the Band; Scabbard and Blade, Military Training; Bowling Green, Women's Dramatics, HONORARY SCHOLASTIC

FRATERNITIES

Achievement in scholarship is recognized by a great number of scholastic fraternities. These are: Phi Beta Kappa: T h e Delta Chapter of Pennsylvania was established in the College in i8g2. In 1935 a separate section for students in the College for Women was inaugurated. Only students taking a liberal arts course are eligible for election. Sigma X i : T h e Society of Sigma X i is a national, honorary scholastic fraternity the object of which is to encourage original investigation in science, pure and applied. T h e Pennsylvania chapter was established in 189g. Departments from which elections can be made are Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry, Astronomy, Earth Sciences, Biology and its branches (including Psychology), Anthropology, Medicine and its branches, Engineering and its branches. Beta Gamma Sigma: T h e Alpha Chapter of Beta Gamma Sigma was established in the Wharton School in 1916. In addition to electing approximately sixteen members of the senior class to membership each year, the fraternity encourages scholarship in finance and commerce by granting scholastic awards to the highest three per cent of the freshman class. T a u Beta Pi: T a u Beta Pi is a national honorary engineering fraternity. T h e Pennsylvania chapter was established in 1921.

I84

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Other honorary scholastic fraternities are: Sigma T a u , Engineering; Eta Kappa Nu, Electrical Engineering; T a u Sigma Delta, Architecture; A l p h a C h i Sigma, Chemistry; K a p p a Phi Kappa, Education; Pi Lambda T h e t a , Education; Phi Delta Kappa, Graduate Education; Eta Sigma Phi, Classics; Delta Phi A l p h a , German; Pi M u Epsilon, Mathematics; Pi G a m m a M u , Social Sciences; A l p h a Omega Alpha, Medicine; Order of the Coif, L a w .

PHYSICAL

EDUCATION

AND

ATHLETICS

Benjamin Franklin in his Proposals Relating to the Education of Youth in Pensilvania recommended that his ideal academy be located "if it may be, not far from a River, having a Garden, Orchard, Meadow, and a Field or two," where the students might "be frequently exercis'd in R u n n i n g , Leaping, Wrestling, and Swimming." Perhaps to symbolize this interest in sound bodies, the statue by R . T a i t McKenzie of the sturdy y o u n g Franklin entering Philadelphia has been placed in front of W e i g h t m a n Hall, and the principal athletic field bears his name. Franklin's vision has become a splendid reality in the Department of Physical Education and its three divisions—Intercollegiate Athletics, Physical Education, and Student Health. T o d a y this department supervises the intercollegiate athletic contests of teams representing a dozen sports, provides facilities for recreation and physical education for the entire student body, gives a four-year course in physical education, and keeps a professional eye on the health of the student body. T o achieve this, there is a physical plant that is comprised of many buildings and playing fields and requires the full time of a large administrative and educational staff. T h i s plant includes the following buildings and fields: Weightman

Hall

Weightman Hall, a building of English collegiate design on Thirty-third Street north of Spruce, was completed in 1904. Funds for its erection were provided by the Athletic Association. It contains a large gymnasium, now used for military drill, indoor tennis, track, and women's activities; a swimming pool and locker rooms now assigned to women students, w h o also have a gymnasium on the top floor of Bennett Hall. It also houses the administrative offices of the Dean of the Department, the Director of Intercollegiate Athletics, the various coaching staffs, the publicity offices of the Univer-

IRVINE AUDITORIUM

STUDENT

LIFE

185

sity, and other offices connected with the administration of athletics. These are at the north end of the building. At the south end are the offices of the Department of Military Science and Tactics. J. William. White Training

House and Student

Infirmary

This building is located just north of Weightman Hall, which it resembles in design. It was erected in 1907 as a training house and now serves the double purpose of athletic training quarters and student infirmary. It is named for the first Director of the Department of Physical Education. T h e first floor contains a dining room and a lounge for the use of teams in training. T h e second and third floors, which are given over entirely to the Division of Student Health, have offices for the Director and his staff, examining rooms, and rooms for students confined with minor ailments. All serious cases are sent to the University Hospital. Franklin

Field

T h e principal athletic field of the University (but one of eight) is within the double-decked stadium that lies behind Weightman Hall. Here are held all the intercollegiate football and track contests, which have attracted audiences as large as seventy-eight thousand, the capacity of the stadium, the largest collegiate stadium in the East. T h e stadium is of steel and concrete with a brick and limestone surface, the second deck being supported by a cantilever construction that employs a minimum number of posts to obstruct the view. It surrounds a quarter-mile cinder track and the football field. Beneath the stands are dressing rooms for the home and visiting teams, a crew room for indoor practice on rowing machines, a rifle range, and many squash courts. T h e lower stand of the stadium was completed in 1922, the upper in 1925. Since the fall of 1939 Franklin Field has been used only for intercollegiate football games and for track practice and track meets. Provision for athletics at the University was not always so extensive. In the fall of 1873 a group of students leveled off a makeshift track in the open space behind College Hall, a plot then filled with debris left from the building operations. By 1882 five sports were flourishing, and their activities were transferred to the field west of Thirty-sixth Street, where the freshman dormitories are now located. When plans for the dormitories were being made, the Trustees turned over to the athletes the site now occupied by Franklin Field, at that time a combination of abandoned quarry and dump. After

ι86

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

three years of patient work, the field was filled in and leveled and a quarter-mile cinder track was built, with a wooden stand on the south side. Named Franklin Field by Provost Harrison, the new grounds were formally opened on April 21, 1895, with the first annual Relay Carnival, one of the University's most successful athletic ventures, a form of competition now imitated at many other institutions. But the popularity of athletics made necessary enlarged facilities, and in 1904 the University opened a new stadium on the site, a brick horseshoe structure (the first such athletic stadium in America) with Weightman Hall at the open end. In turn, these stands were razed in 1922 to make way for the present stadium. Palestra, Swimming

Pool, and Hutchinson

Gymnasium

T h i s building stands north of Franklin Field on a large tract of ground that was gradually acquired as a site for a much-needed gymnasium larger than Weightman Hall and for an indoor stadium. T h e open expanse in front is used for outdoor gymnasium classes. T h e building itself, which matches the architecture of Franklin Field, was opened for use in 1927. T h e Palestra, the largest of the three units, is used for basketball, wrestling, boxing, and other indoor sports. Seats for ten thousand spectators rise at a sharp angle from the playing floor, which is large enough for three basketball courts. T h e swimming pool unit is attached to the south side of the Palestra. It contains a large swimming pool, seventy-five by thirty feet, with a smaller pool for beginners at one end. A large office where a record is kept of attendance at gymnasium classes is in this unit. T h e Hutchinson Gymnasium, named for Sydney Emlen Hutchinson, former chairman of the Council on Athletics, joins the Swimming Pool at the south. It contains a gymnasium floor 250 by 75 feet, below which is a large locker room for students, a smaller one for faculty members, rooms for boxing, wrestling, fencing, and corrective exercises. T h e offices of the Director of Physical Education and his assistants are in this unit. T h e r e is also a large laundry that cares for the towels and gym suits used by some 1,200 students daily. River Athletic

Fields

T h e River Fields, six in number, are on a tract of eighteen acres acquired from the City in 1908. T h e ground borders on the Schuylkill River and extends nearly half a mile from the Heating Plant at South Street Bridge southwest to the University Bridge. T h e ground was not used regularly until 1919, when three athletic fields were

STUDENT

LIFE

.87

laid out. T h e r e are now six fields, one of which is filled with tennis courts; the others are for baseball, soccer, and football practice. O n e of the two field houses on the River Fields was erected in 1924. It is used for tennis and soccer. T h e other, completed in 1939, is used for football and baseball. A n additional athletic field, known as Museum Field, lies east of the University Museum. In 1939 this field was assigned to the women students, w h o previously had used one of the River Fields. River

Boathouse

Oldest of the University's buildings devoted to athletics, the Boathouse was built shortly after the opening of College Hall, and like College Hall, the original part is of serpentine stone. It is located in "Boathouse R o w , " on the east bank of the Schuylkill north of the Spring Garden Street dam. Greatly enlarged in 1921, it accommodates sixteen eight-oared shells, a practice barge, and two launches, as well as lockers for the two hundred and more candidates for the crews. THE DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND ATHLETICS

Both the University's splendid athletic plant and the Department of Physical Education and Athletics are largely owing to student initiative. T h e young men w h o made a running track in the dibris behind College Hall in 1873 organized an athletic association for the promotion of track and field athletics, and shortly afterward the College Boat C l u b was formed. By 1882 there were three additional associations—for cricket, baseball, and football. A l l five were combined into one in 1882, and in 1883 the Athletic Association was incorporated, its first president being T h o m a s McKean, '62, w h o contributed several thousand dollars for the equipment of the old field on the site of the dormitories, the first of many contributions for athletics that have come through the Athletic Association. T h i s Association, with a faculty committee on eligibility, was in sole charge of athletics until 1916, when a new body known as the Council on Athletics was given sole jurisdiction, subject to review by the Trustees. In the meantime the students had had much to do with the founding of the Department of Physical Education. In 1877 the University Magazine, predecessor of the Pennsylvanian, urged the establishment of such a department, but it was not until 1884, after the Athletic Association had presented a formal petition to the Trustees, that the Department was established, its first Director

188

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

being Dr. J. William White, a prominent surgeon on the medical faculty, who had vigorously urged the plan. W h e n the Department moved in 1904 to the new Weightman Hall, the work in physical education expanded greatly, and the Department, under the direction o£ Dr. R. T a i t McKenzie, became one of the most important in the country. In the fall of 1930, the Trustees determined on a new organization which would combine the closely associated Council on Athletics and Department of Physical Education, to which would be added a third division, of Student Health. As a result, in 1931 the new Department of Physical Education and Athletics, a component part of the University structure with its own Dean, was established. T h e Department is one of the busiest divisions of the University. In addition to managing all the intercollegiate athletics, it supervises the physical education and cares for the health of more than five thousand undergraduates. A l l full-time students in the undergraduate schools are required to do systematic work in physical education classes and to pass certain minimum swimming tests. U p o n entrance each is given a complete physical examination; his defects are noted and measurements are recorded. Students physically sound who wish to become candidates for athletic teams are encouraged to do so as a part of their physical education requirement. T h o s e having defects are referred either to appropriate members of the physical education staff or the medical staff, or to a family physician. Special classes are provided for students with physical defects that need correction. Illnesses are cared for by the Division of Student Health, which maintains a staff of physicians, including specialists in the various branches of medicine. In the Infirmary, where ordinary cases of illness are cared for, a staff physician and nurses are on duty at all times. W o m e n students have their own Athletic Association under a Director who is a member of the staff of the Department of Physical Education and Athletics. T h e Women's Athletic Association was founded in the year 1920-21, one year after the first provision was made at the University for physical education for women. A t first the activities were carried on off the Campus, at locations not owned by the University, but facilities on the Campus were soon provided. In 1921 the River Fields were made available. In 1925 the opening of Bennett Hall provided a gymnasium and the adjoining Bennett Field, and in 1927 the swimming pool in W e i g h t m a n H a l l was allotted to women. In 1939 the women ceased to use the River Fields. For tennis they now use the courts behind the L a w School; for hockey, Museum Field. These facilities are used for the

STUDENT

LIFE

189

regular work in physical education and f o r Intercollegiate and intramural contests in hockey, basketball, tennis, swimming, and other sports that are sponsored by the W o m e n ' s A t h l e t i c Association. MILITARY SCIENCE AND TACTICS

T h e Department of Military Science and T a c t i c s was organized at the University w i t h an Infantry U n i t in 1917. In O c t o b e r 1918 the Department was replaced by the Student A r m y T r a i n i n g Corps, which was disbanded in December of that year. T h e D e p a r t m e n t of Military Science a n d T a c t i c s was then reestablished and has functioned since 1919. A largely increased enrollment and a d e m a n d for more varied military instruction caused the formation of a D e n t a l C o r p s U n i t in 1921 and a Medical Corps U n i t in 1922. B o t h the Medical and D e n t a l units were discontinued in 1933, but the Medical U n i t was reestablished in the fall of 1937. A p p r o x i m a t e l y three hundred students are enrolled in the I n f a n t r y U n i t a n d one hundred in the M e d i c a l Unit. T h e course in the Infantry R . O . T . C . U n i t is essentially a practical course in the development of leadership a n d is as applicable to civil life as to army life. T h i s course covers f o u r years, a n d the student receives f r o m it sixteen academic semester credits and eight physical training credits towards graduation. T h e course in the Medical R . O . T . C . U n i t is for the purpose of training the student so to apply his medical k n o w l e d g e for the needs of the A r m y that this force w i l l always have the m a x i m u m possible n u m b e r of soldiers physically fit for service in the field i n time of war. Emphasis is placed o n sanitation, control of communicable diseases, and the institution a n d maintenance of medical aid stations a n d hospitals, as well as the treatment a n d evacuation of the sick a n d w o u n d e d . Originally quartered in H o u s t o n Hall, the D e p a r t m e n t moved to the south end of W e i g h t m a n H a l l w h e n the completion of the Palestra made space available there. For drill the Department uses the gymnasium i n W e i g h t m a n H a l l a n d M u s e u m Field.

RELIGIOUS T H E UNIVERSITY

LIFE CHAPLAIN

In the spring of 1932 the Trustees, feeling that religion should occupy a more prominent place in the broad educational program of the University, approved the appointment of a full-time, resident

igo

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Chaplain of the University, who would also serve as Boardman Lecturer in Christian Ethics. Previously chaplains were chosen from the clergymen of Philadelphia to conduct the daily services and to meet students desiring their counsel. T h e Chaplain has many opportunities for service. Of these, services and meetings come first. Each year eight All-University Chapel services are conducted, with an average voluntary attendance of about nine hundred. There are no Sunday services, right of way being given to the local churches which have regular programs especially designed for students. In addition a number of groups of undergraduates, graduate students, and recent graduates meet regularly for religious discussion at the Chaplain's home at 3805 Locust Street. Discussion meetings are conducted in twenty fraternity houses. Services are held for the student nurses of the University Hospital once each month. Weekend conferences are planned several times each year. T h e Chaplain also has the privilege of addressing many campus organizations, of speaking at many churches, schools, and colleges throughout the country, and of officiating occasionally at the weddings and funerals of those connected with the University. Personal work with individual students is a major opportunity of the Chaplain. He makes frequent visits to the Hospital and Infirmary, to the dormitories, to fraternity houses, and to all places where students gather. Many in turn visit the Chaplain for consultation in Houston Hall. Of particular help is the Chaplain's home, where, during the past few years, over a thousand students a year have been entertained at meals. T h e Chaplain also gives a two-hour accredited course (Religious Orientation I) in both the College and the College for Women, and a series of lectures to the student nurses of the University Hospital. He is also active in the promotion of a united religious front on the Campus. T o this end, the Chaplain's Religious Council was organized in 1935. This Council is composed of representatives from the Christian Association (Protestant), the Newman Club (Catholic), and the Louis Marshall Society (Jewish), together with a student committee and representatives from the Faculty and the Trustees. THE CHRISTIAN

ASSOCIATION

T h e Christian Association had its beginnings in 1889 as a division of the Intercollegiate Christian Association, which in Philadelphia embraced all the colleges and medical institutions. In the spring

STUDENT

LIFE

of 1892 the University of Pennsylvania organized its own Association. T h e first real home of the new organization was at 3449 Woodland Avenue; but a movement among the students to provide better quarters helped to convince Provost C. C. Harrison of the need for a student union, and from 1896, when Houston Hall, America's first student union, was completed, until 1922, the Association occupied rooms on the second floor of that building. In 1922 the increased demands being made on Houston Hall resulted in the Association moving to 3437 Woodland Avenue, where it remained until its present building at 3601 Locust Street was completed in 1928. The Christian Association

Building

T h e Christian Association Building, although not owned by the University, for the Association is an independent corporation, is a splendid addition to the Campus, both architecturally and in the uses to which it is put. It was made possible through the generosity of students, faculty, alumni, and church people of Philadelphia who were concerned that the Protestant religious forces of the University should have an adequate home. T h e building, which is in an English style, was dedicated on March 22, 1929. T h e exterior is of brick and delicately cut limestone; the interior has marble floors and walnut paneling. In the basement are three dining-rooms, a kitchen, and a cloakroom. On the first floor, directly off the main entrance on Thirty-sixth Street, is a large, handsomely furnished lobby; surrounding the lobby are offices of members of the staff; to the left is a men's lounge. On the second floor are more offices, including those of the Executive Secretary. T h i s floor also has a women's lounge and Memorial Hall, an auditorium seating 350. T h e auditorium is so named as a tribute to the University men w h o died in the W o r l d W a r and in recognition of contributions from the undergraduates. It is used by many organizations other than the Christian Association itself. On the third floor is a lounge for the use of faculty members, and a number of conference rooms. T h e Christian Association is an independent corporation representing six of the larger Protestant churches of the country. Its staff includes six clergymen, representing officially the Baptist, Episcopal, Methodist, Lutheran, Reformed, and Presbyterian Churches; a woman secretary in charge of the Women's Division of the Association; a building hostess; and an Executive Secretary, who supervises and coordinates the Association's extensive program. T h i s staff is assisted by the two Christian Association Cabinets, one f o r men

192

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

and one for women. Each of the Cabinets is composed of about twenty undergraduates who are leaders in the activities of the Association. T h e pastors and congregations of various churches near the Campus also coöperate closely with the staff. Early in the history of the Association a program was conceived which would provide students of the University with a well-rounded religious experience. As a result the following divisions of the Association's activities have been developed. The University

Settlement

House

T h e Settlement House began as an experiment in 1897, when students organized athletic and educational activities among boys of the neighborhood across the river. In 1902, through the large gifts of a few interested people, the site of the present building at Twentysixth and Lombard streets was purchased, and in 1906 the building was opened. It is a three-story brick structure, designed in the Philadelphia English colonial style. It contains two gymnasiums, club rooms for boys and girls, a library, a neighborhood room, locker rooms, and living quarters for members of the staff. There is also a roof garden. A program usual in the settlement houses, including medical and dental dispensaries, educational and athletic activities, has been carried on over the years, with students of the University serving as volunteers. A branch of the University House is D i x o n House, at 1920 South Twentieth Street. The University

Camp

T h e University Camp for Boys was an early development of University Settlement. Its present site at Green Lane, Pennsylvania, was given to the Christian Association by Mr. Marshall Morgan in 1908 and has been operated continuously since that time. In its early years it was operated for the benefit of boys and girls, mothers and their babies, from the underprivileged sections of Philadelphia, with students serving as counselors. T h i s camp in more recent years has been turned into a boys' camp, and each summer a group of twenty-five or thirty University men entertain nearly a thousand boys between the ages of ten and sixteen, sent to the camp by forty different social and religious agencies of the city. T h e equipment on the camp's ninety-acre tract includes nine cabins, a counselors' bungalow, a director's cottage, a large recreation hall, and ideal swimming facilities. In September a week-end is set aside for Freshman Camp, the opening activity of each University year.

STUDENT The University

LIFE

Camp for

193 Girls

Originally the last ten days of the season at the boys' camp were devoted to the entertainment of little girls from Philadelphia, with women students serving as counselors. As a result of a gift to the Christian Association from Dr. and Mrs. Edward Sibley of a hundred-acre farm on the west side of Green Lane, the Association was able in 1924 to open a camp entirely for girls. Since that time University women students have entertained each summer approximately 650 children who come from the same districts of Philadelphia as the boys. In September conferences of all four classes of the women's undergraduate schools are held there. The International

Students'

House

T h e International Students' House, a large residence at 3905 Spruce Street, was opened by the Christian Association in 1 9 1 5 . It is operated as a social center for more than three hundred foreign students from nearly sixty countries w h o annually study at Pennsylvania or some other Philadelphia institution. Here the Association through its facilities f o r social life and a well-organized program is enabling men and women students f r o m all parts of the world to develop lasting friendships which will make for creative internationalism. McCracken in C h i n a For over twenty-five years Dr. J . C. McCracken, 'oi Med., has represented the Christian Association in China as a medical missionary. At first his work was identified with Canton Christian College in Canton. In more recent years he has been Professor of Surgery and Dean of the Medical Department of St. John's University in Shanghai. Dr. McCracken's support is provided by alumni and friends. ST. BEDE'S C H A P E L , N E W M A N H A L L , A N D T H E NEWMAN CLUB T h e activities of the R o m a n Catholic students at the University of Pennsylvania center in two three-story, gray-stone buildings on the north side of Spruce Street east of Thirty-eighth. One of the buildings is St. Bede's Chapel, which is appropriately dedicated to the learned author of The Ecclesiastical History of the English Nation; the other, Newman Hall, serves as a student union and is the home

»94

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

of the Newman Club, which carries on an extensive program of religious, educational, and social activities. These are supervised by the Catholic Chaplain, w h o is assisted by an advisory cabinet composed of men and women students of the University. T h e religious activities of the Newman C l u b include, besides masses and other services conducted in the Chapel, lectures by prominent churchmen and participation in the Malvern Retreat for men and the Torresdale week-end f o r women. In addition the C l u b cooperates through the Chaplain with the Religious Council of the University. T h e educational activities consist of lectures by prominent laymen and members of the University faculty, which take place as often as once a week. T h e C l u b also sponsors an intercollegiate play competition, a debating society, discussion groups, a newspaper, and a magazine. T h e many social activities range from bi-weekly get-togethers and informal dances to the annual Intercollegiate Ball. T h e Newman Club at the University of Pennsylvania has the distinction of being the first Catholic club to be established at a non-sectarian American college. Founded in 1893, its activities were greatly extended by the R e v . J o h n Keogh, first Catholic Chaplain at the University, who served from 1 9 1 3 until 1938 and was responsible for the acquisition of the present buildings. T h e purpose and organization of the Newman C l u b are based on the principles set forth in the writings of the great Cardinal f o r w h o m the C l u b was named. Since 1893 Newman Clubs have been established on some three hundred other campuses throughout the United States and in Canada, Puerto Rico, Hawaii, and the Philippines. T h e s e are now banded together in a very active international organization known as the Newman C l u b Federation. T h e provinces into which the Federation is divided hold annual conventions, as does the Federation itself. M A R S H A L L H A L L AND T H E LOUIS M A R S H A L L

SOCIETY

Marshall Hall, also called the Jewish Student House, is the religious center of the Jewish students on the Campus. It is at 3 6 1 3 Locust Street. In 1920 Provost Edgar Fahs Smith pointed out that the J e w i s h community until that time had failed to display real interest in the spiritual welfare of the Jewish students on the Campus. U n d e r the leadership of Dr. and Mrs. Cyrus Adler, the Philadelphia Branch of the United Synagogue of America undertook to supply that need,

STUDENT

LIFE

195

and the present house was dedicated on October 12, 1926. T h e house contains a chapel, a library room, meeting room, recreation room, ping-pong room, and a dining hall which serves meals prepared according to the religious dietary laws. For several years R a b b i Simon Greenberg of the H a r Zion T e m p l e sponsored and advised the student organization. In 1934, the position of resident Jewish Student Adviser was established. In 1937 a change was made in the student organization f o r the purpose of broadening its influence and activity. T h e name of Louis Marshall Society was adopted, and the aims of the group were formulated. T h e three principal aims of the Society today are "to preserve and enhance the spirit of Judaism and to foster Hebrew learning and culture among Jewish students attending the University . . . to promote the desire among students to help the less privileged in the community through social service activity," and "to foster good will, cooperation, and understanding among all the students of the University." T h e Society sponsors bi-weekly Sabbath hours, regular weekly traditional Sabbath services, Sunday evening fireside discussions, Sunday afternoon classes in Hebrew, Bible, and history, discussion groups, dramatic groups, a news sheet, tours to places of interest, refugee resettlement work, and social service in settlement houses. T h e Sabbath hours and Fireside discussions, which are addressed by prominent clergymen, faculty members, and lay readers of the community, are usually sponsored by and held at fraternities. Besides these activities the Marshall Society presents annually at the Hey Day exercises the Charles Edwin F o x Memorial Awards f o r Social Service to the man and woman student, regardless of religious denomination, w h o have done the most valuable work in the field of voluntary social service. T h e Society is co-sponsor of the C.A.-L.M. (Christian Association— Louis Marshall) Drive annually conducted by these two large religious student bodies for the maintenance of activity by the two organizations, f o r the United Campaign, and for other philanthropic needs of the local community and of society at large. It also takes an active part in the work of the Chaplain's Religious Council.

THE VALLEY FORGE

PROJECT

A possible new Campus for the University of Pennsylvania, or at least a portion of its students, is at Valley Forge. T h i s is a 326-acre tract of rolling land composed of two farms—the Cressbrook and

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

W i l s o n farms. T h e Cressbrook F a r m , of 178 acres, was g i v e n to the University in 1926 by Mr. H e n r y N. W o o l m a n , n o w a T r u s t e e of the University. It is a stone farmhouse, erected in 1740, w h i c h served as headquarters for General du Portail, w h o as C h i e f of Engineers of General Washington's army laid o u t the Valley Forge encampment. T h e a d j o i n i n g W i l s o n F a r m of 148 acres, o n w h i c h stands General Lafayette's headquarters, was acquired by the University in 1939. It is proposed to establish a small e x p e r i m e n t a l college at Valley Forge. A t present civil e n g i n e e r i n g students h o l d a summer surveying c a m p there.

THE GENERAL

ALUMNI

SOCIETY

T h e normal expectancy of student life at the University is about f o u r years, of course. A n d each year u p o n g r a d u a t i o n between six h u n d r e d a n d seven h u n d r e d new a l u m n i j o i n the G e n e r a l A l u m n i Society. T h i s organization, w h i c h was f o u n d e d in 1894 by Provost W i l l i a m Pepper, is a federation composed of the D e p a r t m e n t a l Societies, the Associated Pennsylvania Clubs, a n d the O r g a n i z e d Classes. Each of these bodies sends representatives to the G e n e r a l A l u m n i Board, w h i c h manages the affairs of the Society t h r o u g h its officers and fifteen committees. T h e r e are ten D e p a r t m e n t a l Societies, ninety-one local clubs, and 283 organized classes. T h e latter n u m b e r is exp l a i n e d by the fact that classes are organized by b o t h years a n d departments. T h e Society has extensive offices in the Irvine A u d i torium. T h e first a l u m n i organization appeared in 1836, w h e n the graduates of the College held a meeting. T h e law a l u m n i f o l l o w e d in 1861, the medical alumni in 1870, a n d those of other departments subsequently. U n t i l 1911 these D e p a r t m e n t a l Societies were entirely independent of each other, but in that year they agreed to promote unified effort by becoming a part of the G e n e r a l A l u m n i Society. Similarly in 1913 the various local a l u m n i clubs formed a federation, k n o w n at the Associated Pennsylvania Clubs, w h i c h became a part of the General A l u m n i Society, a n d in 1920 the organized classes took the same action. T h e Departmental Societies and the O r g a n i z e d Classes h o l d a n n u a l conferences. T h e General A l u m n i Society itself conducts three principal events d u r i n g the year. O n e of these is Founder's D a y , held o n the Saturday following Franklin's B i r t h d a y (January 17), w h e n the Society's annual meeting takes place, a c c o m p a n i e d by a p r o g r a m

STUDENT

LIFE

»97

of appropriate addresses. Another is Alumni Day in the spring, when returning alumni parade on Franklin Field. T h e third is the annual football luncheon, held before one of the important home games. T h e General Alumni Society has an important voice in the counsels of the University. It is heard partly through the Society's two publications: the Pennsylvania Gazette, a monthly news magazine, and the General Magazine ir Historical Chronicle, a literary and historical quarterly; it is heard through the various conferences and meetings which it sponsors; and it is also heard through the considerable number of trustees of the University which it names.

ADMINISTRATIVE AND OTHER BUILDINGS

ADMINISTRATIVE Blanchard

OFFICES

Hall

ALTHOUGH much of the administration of the University is carried on in College Hall, where the offices of the President and the Provost are located, the busiest administrative center of the University no doubt is Blanchard Hall, which is on the southeast corner of Thirtysixth and Walnut streets. Originally a dwelling house, the building, along with the adjoining property at 3438-40 Walnut Street, was purchased by the University in 1920. It is named for Miss Harriet E. Blanchard and her sister, benefactors of the University, who endowed the principal chair of chemistry in the Towne Scientific School. It is three stories high and is built of local stone. The main entrance is on Walnut Street under a classic portico; above is a mansard roof. The heavy walnut doors and the walnut interior trim give a pleasant Victorian atmosphere. T o the right of the entrance are the offices of the Secretary of the Corporation, who, in addition to many other duties such as the direction and management of academic functions, has charge of official communications of the Trustees, the minutes of their meetings, and the archives of the University. The historical interest of the latter is indicated by the fact that two consecutive pages of the first volume of minutes bear the signatures of three signers of the Declaration of Independence and of many other prominent Revolutionary leaders. T o the left of the entrance are the offices of the Administrative Vice-President. His records deal with such immediate matters as budgets and the operation of the huge University plant. The rest of the building contains the offices of the Treasurer, the Associate Treasurer, the Assistant Treasurer, the Comptroller, and the Cashier, who with their clerical assistants are concerned with the various procedures necessary in handling an annual budget of over $7,000,000. Unrelated to any of the administrative offices in 199

200

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

Blanchard Hall is the Institute of Local and State Government, which occupies rooms on the third floor. BUILDINGS AND GROUNDS AND DEPARTMENTS 209 South

Thirty-sixth

PURCHASING

Street

A considerable proportion of the vouchers signed in the offices at the rear of Blanchard Hall are for the benefit of the two departments that occupy the three-story building of strictly utilitarian design behind the parking lot at 209 South Thirty-sixth Street. T w o stories of this building were constructed in 1923; the third in 1927. T h e first two floors contain a stock room and shops; on the third floor are drafting rooms and the offices of the University's Executive Engineer, who heads the Department of Buildings and •Grounds, and of the Purchasing Agent. T h e Department of Buildings and Grounds cares for the University grounds and for the heating, lighting, repairing, and cleaning of all of the buildings on the Campus except the Evans Dental Institute, but including the University-owned fraternity houses. It has been responsible for the construction of several of the smaller buildings, such as its own building, the Franklin Building, and the locker houses on River Field, and for the modernization of others; and it supervises the planning and construction of all the larger buildings. Its total staff of 250 includes graduate engineers, operating engineers, plumbers, electricians, carpenters, gardeners, and cleaners. Prior to 1923 the Department was housed in the basement and sub-basement of College Hall. Before 1910 there was no Purchasing Department. Instead of a centralized agency to make purchases and authorize payment, some thirty divisions of the University ordered their own supplies and equipment, and lack of method for approving invoices for payment caused delays which resulted in higher prices for supplies and a low credit rating. Since the establishment of the Purchasing Department, the University has taken advantage of all discountable bills, at an estimated annual saving of $12,000, which is only a fraction of the saving resulting from other methods of systematizing the purchases of the University.

ADMINISTRATIVE

BUILDINGS

soi

PRINTING AND DUPLICATING D E P A R T M E N T UNIVERSITY MAIL SERVICE The Franklin

Building

T h e Franklin Building gets its name from Β. Franklin, Printer— not directly but from the Franklin Society, an organization composed of members of the staffs of undergraduate publications. T h e basement contains a busy printing plant; and much of the building is devoted to printing, mimeographing, and other forms of duplicating, all of which is exclusively for the various divisions of the University. T h e Franklin Building was completed in 1931, from plans by the Department of Buildings and Grounds. T h e architectural treatment of the front shows the influence of the medieval architecture of northern Italy. Prior to 1931, the undergraduate publications except the Daily Pennsylvanian were scattered through the various University buildings. T h e latter was edited and printed in a building on Woodland Avenue occupied by T h e Pennsylvania Printing Company, an alumni-controlled shop devoted almost exclusively to publishing the Pennsylvanian. At the same time the University's Duplicating Service was housed in two old residences that were neither suited to their purpose nor structurally fit for continued use. T o remedy this situation, the alumni owners of the Pennsylvania Printing Company generously agreed to merge their plant and funds with the building fund which the Franklin Society had been accumulating for some years. As a result the student publications now have accommodations in one building, and the Duplicating Service has become the Printing and Duplicating Service. T h e Printing and Duplicating Service, which occupies the basement and first floor, prints all of the catalogues, bulletins, and other announcements of the University, the University Directory, which has eighteen thousand entries, and a vast amount of forms, circulars, and pamphlets. It also prints the Daily Pennsylvanian and other student publications. T h e Manager of the Printing and Duplicating Service is also the Office Manager of the University. As such he is concerned with the efficient functioning of the larger offices on the Campus, and the administration of the University telephone exchange, which handles close to fifteen thousand calls a day. His organization also serves as a central agency for the employment of all persons who have "employee" status in the University.

202

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

T w o other University services are housed in the Franklin Building. One of these is University Photography, a student aid project that performs photographic work for the entire student body as well as official photography for the University. T h e other is the University Mail Service, which cares for all University mail, both intramural and extramural, delivering and collecting mail four times a day in thirty-eight buildings on the Campus. From the undergraduates' standpoint, however, the most important occupants of the Franklin Building are the Daily Pennsylvanian, the Pennsylvania Punch Bowl, and the Class Record. These have editorial offices on the second floor along with the offices of the Graduate Manager of Publications. Also on the second floor is the club room of the Franklin Society, where, while waiting for proof perhaps, editors may take their ease and gaze at the murals depicting the life of Benjamin Franklin. T H E RECORDER AND ALUMNI RECORDS T H E UNIVERSITY PLACEMENT SERVICE 3400 Walnut

Street

Another administrative building of the University is at the western intersection of Thirty-fourth Street, Walnut Street, and Woodland Avenue. It bears no other name than its street number—3400 Walnut Street. T h e building, which is of English collegiate design, was erected in 1900, and until 1924, when it was purchased by the University, was occupied by a fraternity. One of the most interesting places on the Campus is the office of the University Recorder, which is on the first floor. T h e walls are hung with old pictures of University buildings, photographs of bygone celebrities, and the motion pictures of a galloping horse taken at the University during 1884-85 by Eadweard Muybridge. Old fire buckets, shutter catches from the original Charity School building, manuscripts, and various relics of great University personalities are in the room. In addition there are files containing data on much of the past history of the University, and a virtually complete collection of Class Records and the catalogues of the University. Even more data are in the files of the Alumni Records Office on the third floor of 3400 Walnut Street. T h e innumerable cards in these files list nearly all of the more than 250,000 matriculates of the University (there are some gaps in the earlier years) alphabetically,

ADMINISTRATIVE

BUILDINGS

203

geographically, by department and class. In addition there are 150,000 folders containing biographical material. Other files list faculty and officers and recipients of honorary degrees, and contain the war records of students and faculty beginning with the Revolution. T h e Recorder is responsible for the creation of the "Memorial Library," a collection of fifteen thousand books and pamphlets by Pennsylvania men. These books are in special cases in the Library. T h e remaining space in 3400 Walnut Street, on the first and second floors, is occupied by the University Placement Service, founded in 1926 to coordinate all the efforts of the various divisions of the University toward finding satisfactory employment for students and alumni. T h e Placement Service, however, is far more than an employment office: it cooperates with industrial and commercial firms and educational institutions in an attempt to acquaint them with the resources in personnel of the thirteen undergraduate, graduate, and professional schools of the University. It also offers counsel, based on research into current conditions of employment, to alumni regarding their life work and professional advancement. T h e results of the research and other activities of the Service appear in the quarterly Placement Review, founded in 1929. Since the founding of the Service, student aid has been a major part of the work, becoming especially important since the depression. Thorough surveys are made of employment opportunities in the University itself and in Philadelphia, and students have been provided jobs ranging from running candy stands to tutoring and other forms of teaching. Following the establishment in 1934 of the National Youth Administration, the entire program of the N Y A on the Campus has been administered by the Service, a total of more than $400,000 in wages having been paid in the first five years of the program. Approximately two thousand partially or wholly selfsupporting students are now registered for student aid. A similar number of alumni are also registered for employment, reemployment, and advancement. A fee is charged for the latter service, except to members of the senior class. The Heating Plant Steam was turned on in the University's heating plant at the west end of the South Street Bridge on February 3, 1925, and at once a great saving in the cost of operating Campus buildings began. T h e old heating and lighting plant, completed in 1893 on the site of the Irvine Auditorium, heated comparatively few buildings, and

204

UNIVERSITY

OF

PENNSYLVANIA

yet it consumed eighteen thousand tons of Pennsylvania anthracite, compared to seventeen thousand tons at present. T o d a y , except for the Dental School, all C a m p u s buildings are heated by the central plant, i n c l u d i n g those built or purchased since 1925 a n d certain fraternity houses. A l l o w i n g for depreciation a n d interest on the investment and for the fact that electric current is n o w purchased from the Philadelphia Electric C o m p a n y , the new plant makes a net saving of approximately §100,000 a year. A f u r t h e r advantage is that virtually no smoke or solid material emerges f r o m its 250foot stack, whereas the old plant seemed to convert a m a j o r portion of the coal into cinders, w h i c h settled u n i f o r m l y o n the lawns, the furniture in the buildings, a n d the books of the L i b r a r y . T h e s e improvements are b r o u g h t a b o u t by the f o u r high-pressure, water-tube boilers, w h i c h have a r a t i n g of a b o u t three thousand horsepower. T h e y are fed by a u t o m a t i c stokers f r o m o v e r h e a d bunkers, and only three engineers are r e q u i r e d o n a shift.

PROVOST'S

HOUSE

T h e Provost's House, 4037 Pine Street, the official home of the Provost, is a white, two-story, frame residence of colonial architecture. Its design is obviously inspired by M o u n t V e r n o n . It was purchased and furnished after a short c a m p a i g n conducted by the General A l u m n i Society in 1917, to w h i c h the Mask and W i g C l u b contributed a large sum.

THE LENAPE

CLUB

T h e L e n a p e C l u b , a private c l u b composed of faculty members and administrative officers, is at 204 South M c A l p i n Street. T h e c l u b house consists of four small, remodeled houses over one h u n d r e d years old w h i c h were purchased in 1920.

INDEX

Accounting, 53 Administrative offices, 4, 199 Admissions, Office of, 37 Advertising, 47 Agnew, D. Hayes, Memorial Pavilion, 118, 134 Alumni, 196 Alumni Records Office, 202 American Academy of Political and Social Science, 41 American Law Institute, 97 Anatomy, 107 Anesthesia, Division of, 133 Animal Pathology, School of (Bolton Farm), 163 Anthropology, 21 Archaeology, 21, 91 Architecture, 69 Associated Pennsylvania Clubs (alumni), ig6 Astronomy, 27 Bacteriology, 115, 148 Bennett Club, 174 Bennett Hall, 71 Biddle Law Library, 97, 100 Biology, 33 Blanchard Hall, 199 Boathouse, 187 Bolton Farm (School of Animal Pathology), 163 Botanical Gardens, 30 Botany, 29, 33, 34 Bronchoscopic Clinic, 144 Buildings and Grounds, 200 Business Administration, Graduate Course in, 38 Business Law, 54

Carter, William T., Foundation of Child Helping, 50 Chaplain, Catholic, 194 Chaplain, University, 189 Chaplain's Religious Council, 190 Chemistry and Chemical Engineering, 63, 109 Child Helping, William T . Carter Foundation of, 50 Children's Hospital, 141 Christian Association, 190 Civil Engineering, 58 College, 5 College Collateral Courses, 5 College of Liberal Arts for Women, 72 College Hall, 3; bell, 3 Commerce, Transportation, and Public Utilities, 44 Cox, George S., Medical Research Institute (Diabetic Clinic), 124 Crawley, Howard, Memorial Lectures, 39 Cultural Olympics, 78 Debate Council, 181 Dental School, 157 Departmental organizations and clubs (undergraduate), 182 Departmental societies (alumni), 196 Dermatological Research, Laboratory of, 146 Dermatology and Syphilology, 144 Directress of Women, 165 Dormitories, men's, 169 Dormitory Annex, 174 Dormitory Houses, men's: Ashhurst, 173 Baird, 172

205

INDEX

206

D o r m i t o r y Houses, m e n ' s : — ( C o n t i n u e d ) B a l d w i n , 172

Engineering,

Moore

School

o f , 65

B i r t h d a y , 173 Bodine,

Electrical

Engineering, 57, 65

172

E n g i n e e r i n g B u i l d i n g , 56

Brooks, 171

English, 6

C a r r u t l i , 172

Evans

C h e s n u t , 173

Institute

and

School

of

Den-

tistry, 157

Class of 1887, 172

Evans, Dr. T h o m a s W., M u s e u m ,

158

C l e e m a n , 173

Evening

Fi-

C o x e , 172 172

Fitler,

172

Graduate,

Fine Arts B u i l d i n g , 68

173

Fine Arts, School of, 69

H o p k i n s o n , 172

Flower O b s e r v a t o r y , 27

171

Lippincott,

Franklin B u i l d i n g , 201

172

F r a n k l i n Field, 185

M a g e e , 173

Franklin Society, 180, 202

Mask a n d W i g , 173

Fraternities, honorary scholastic, 183

M c l l h e n n y , 173

Fraternities, men's, 174

171

Fraternities, women's, 176

M e m o r i a l T o w e r , 172

Furness M e m o r i a l L i b r a r y , 88

M o r g a n , 172 172

General A l u m n i Society, 196

N e w Y o r k A l u m n i , 172

G e o g r a p h y and Industry, 45

P e n n , 173

Geological M u s e u m , 20

R o d n e y , 173 Provost Smith, 172

Geology a n d M i n e r a l o g y , 20

Provosts' T o w e r ,

G e r m a n , 14

173

Gibson

E d g a r F. Smith, 172

White,

Hospital) ,

G r a d u a t e School of Arts a n d Sciences,

173

80

W i l s o n , 172 women's

(Sergeant

Hall) ,

G r a d u a t e School of M e d i c i n e , 149 G r e e k , 15

'74

G y m n a s i u m , 184, 186

D r a m a t i c s , 176 Dulles,

(University

G r a d u a t e H o s p i t a l , 151

W a r w i c k , 173

Dormitory,

Wing

118, 143

W a r d , 173 Bishop

and

Finance, 41

F r a n k l i n , 171

Morris,

Accounts

Extension courses, 38

Foederer, 171

McKean,

of

nance, 38

Craig,

Leidy,

School

Crothers,

Memorial

Hospital,

118

Gynecean Hospital Institute of cologic

Research,

137,

Gyne-

138

Gynecology, 137 E a r t h Sciences, 20 E c o n o m i c a n d Social Statistics, 48

H a r e B u i l d i n g , 36

Economics, 39

Harrison D e p a r t m e n t of Surgical

E d u c a t i o n , School of, 73

search, 135

Re-

207

INDEX Harrison, John, Laboratory of Chemistry, 62 Hartzell, Milton B., Department of Research Therapeutics, 127 Heating Plant, 203 Hisiory, 8 History of Religion, 86 Honor societies, 183 Honorary scholastic fraternities, 183 Hospital, University, 116; Graduate, 151 Houston Hall, 167; Store, 168 Hutchinson Gymnasium, 186 Hygiene, Laboratory of, 148 Illman-Carter Unit for Kindergarten and Primary Teachers, 77 Indo-European Philology, 82 Industrial Research, 55 Infirmary, 185 Institute for the Control of Syphilis, >45 Institute for Mental Hygiene, 147 Institute of Local and State Government, 52 Institute of Neurology, 129 Insurance, 43 International Students' House, 193 Irvine Auditorium, 166 Jackson, Chevalier, Bronchoscope Clinic, 152 Johnson, Eldridge Reeves, Foundation for Medical Physics, 127 "Journalism Building," 7 Kinsey-Thomas Foundation (Gastrointestinal Section of the Medical Clinic), 121 Landscape Architecture, 70 Law School, 98; Building, 97 Latin, 16 Lea Library of Medieval and Church History, 89 Lenape Club, 204

Libraries: Biddle Law Library, 97, 100 Brinton Library, University Museum, 92 Burr Library of Neurology, 130 Dental School Library, 159 Fine Arts Library, 68 Furness Library of Shakespeareana, 88 Lea Library of Medieval History, 89 Lippincott Library, Wharton School, 39 Medical School Library, 104 Singer Library of Eighteenth-century Fiction, 89 Singer Library of Recorded Music, 69 Tablet Library, University Museum, 94 University Library, 87 Lippincott Library, 39 Literary societies, 181 Logan Hall, 36 Macfarlane Hall of Botany, 29 Mail Service, 201 Maloney, Martin, Memorial Clinic, 119 Marketing, 47 Marshall Hall, 194 Marshall, Louis, Society, 194 Mask and W i g Club, 177; House, 178 Maternity Department (University Hospital), 119 Mathematics, 18 McCracken in China, 193 Mechanical Engineering, 59 Medical Bacteriology, 115, 148 Medical Laboratories, 103 Medical School, 106, 149 Medicine, Department of, 120 Military Science and Tactics, 189 Moore School of Electrical Engineering, 65 Morgan, Randal, Laboratory of Physics, 25 Morris Arboretum, 31

2o8

INDEX

Morris Biological Farm, 155 Music, 70 Musical organizations, 181 Musser, John Herr, Department of Research Medicine, 126 Neurological Surgery, Division of, 133 Neurology, 129 Newman Club, 193 Newman Hall, 193 Nurses' Home (University Hospital), 117 Nursing Education, 76 Obstetrics and Gynecology, 137 Ophthalmology, 141 Oriental Studies, 84 Orthopedic Surgery, Division of, 134 Otolaryngology, 143 Palestra, 186 Pathology, 113 Pediatrics, 140 Penniman, Maria Hosmer, Memorial Library of Education, 75 Pennsylvania Players, 178 Pennsylvania School of Social Work, 50 Pepper, William, Laboratory of Clinical Medicine, 125 Pharmacology, 111 Philadelphia School of Occupational T h e r a p y . 153 Philomathean Literary Society, 176, 181 Philosophy, 10 Phipps Institute for the Study, Treatment, and Control of Tuberculosis, •55 Photographic Service, 202 Physical Education and Athletics, 187 Physical Therapy, 124 Physics, 26, 127 Physiological Chemistry, 109 Physiology, 110 Placement Service, 203 Political Science, 51

Printing and Duplicating Service, 201 Provost's House, 204 Psychiatry, 146 Psychological Clinic, 22 Psychological Laboratory, 22 Psychology, 22 Publications, Student, 179 Public H e a l t h and Preventive Medicine, 148 Purchasing Department, 200 Radiology, 131 Recorder, 202 Religious life, 189 River Athletic Fields, 186 Robinette, Edward B., Foundation for Study and T r e a t m e n t of Circulatory Diseases, 122 Romance Languages, 12 St. Bede's Chapel, 193 San Francisco Mountain Zoological Station, 33 Scholastic fraternities, 183 Schoolmen's Week, 78 "School of American History and Institutions," 9 School of A n i m a l Pathology (Bolton Farm), 163 School of Architecture, 69 School of Biology, 33 School of Dentistry, 157 School of Education, 73 School of Medicine, 106 School of Nursing, 117 School of Veterinary Medicine, 161 Senior societies, 183 Sergeant Hall (women's dormitory), 174 Settlement House, 192 Smith, Edgar Fahs, Memorial Collection (History of Chemistry), 63 Sociology, 49 Statistics, 48 Statues: B e n j a m i n Franklin, by Boyle, 4 Benjamin Franklin, by McKenzie, 184

INDEX Statues:—(Continued) Charles C. Harrison, by Jenkins, 171 William Pepper, by Bitter, 91 Edgar Fahs Smith, by McKenzie, 63 George Whitefield, by McKenzie, 171 Student activities, 176 Student Affairs, Dean of, 165 Student Health, Division of, 188 Student Publications, Graduate Manager of, 179 Studio (Fine Arts), 69 Summer School, 79 Surgery, 132 Surgical Research, 135 Swimming Pool, 186 3400 Walnut Street, 202 3438-40 Walnut Street, 199 T o w n e Scientific School, 57 T r a i n i n g House, 185 209 South Thirty-sixth Street, 200 Undergraduate Council, 165 University Camp (Christian Association), 192 University Camp for Girls, 193 University Hospital, 116 University Museum, 91

sog

University Press, 90 Urology, Division of, 133 Valley Forge Project, 195 Veterinary School and Hospital, 161 Vivarium, 32 Vocational Teacher Training, 76 Weightman Hall, 184 Wharton Evening School, 38 Wharton School of Accounts and Finance, 37 White, J. William, Surgical Pavilion, 117, 134, 138 White, J. William, Training House and Student Infirmary, 185 Wistar and Horner Museum of Anatomy, 153 Wistar Institute of Anatomy and Biology. '53 Women at the University, 71 Women's Athletic Association, 188 Women's Student Government Association, 166 Zelosophic Literary Society, Zoological Laboratory, 31 Zoology, 29, 33, 35

176, 181

» I MAP OF THE L UNIVERSITY of PENNSYLVANIA 1I P H I L A DINE L P H I A 1

CHESTNUT

SAWSOM

WALNUT

IRVINE

SPRUCE

PEIANCEY

Gticztl

"STREET

STREET

Γ

Dormitories

TrimigU

Wh

HOBERiriD. BERSBEV

STREET

Swimming Pool I

Press

"ineArtfülAq:

Hutchinsons. Gymnasium 'Student

Infirmary

Harrison Ipboralow ail 1 Chemistry / Weiihtrtum

Danklin

field

University Museum

'

University Hospital

HAMILTON

WALK

JWuseum Nursn' Horn* Atuux

field

tiintintj

Fitld toKVmtUm Jennis

Gonmtarthd Jrimtum

\Fieldlloutt